Coiled Tubing Handbook
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Acknowledgements:
HEI would like to thank Michael Bailey for his contribution to the manual as well as Varco for the rights to
publish information from the Varco Coiled Tubing Handbook.
Halliburton warrants only title to the products, supplies and material and that the same are free from defects in work-
manship and materials. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THOSE STATED IN
THE IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING SENTENCE. Halliburton's liability and customer's exclusive remedy in any
cause of action (whether in contact, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise) arising out of the sale or use of any products,
supplies or materials is expressly limited to the replacement of such products, supplies, or materials on their return to
Halliburton or, at Halliburton's option, to the allowance to the customer of credit for the cost of such items. Further:
Halliburton makes no warranties, guarantees, or representations, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the data, cal-
culations and/or opinions contained herein. In no event shall Halliburton be liable for special, incidental, indirect, puni-
tive or consequential damages arising out of the use of any products, supplies, materials, data, calculations or opinions
contained herein.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this handbook, the publisher assumes no respon-
sibility for error or omissions. Information in this documentation is also subject to change without notice.
Varco makes no warranties, express or implied as to the accuracy of the calculations, data and/or opinions.
Neither is any liability assumed for damages whatsoever arising out of the use of the information contained
herein.
Table of Contents
Section 1—General Information
Unit Conversions ..................................................................................... 1-1
Acceleration ....................................................................................... 1-1
Angular .............................................................................................. 1-2
Area ................................................................................................... 1-2
Density .............................................................................................. 1-4
Electrical ............................................................................................ 1-5
Energy/Torque/Power ....................................................................... 1-5
Flow Rate .......................................................................................... 1-9
Force/Mass/Weight ........................................................................... 1-9
Length ............................................................................................... 1-12
Pressure ............................................................................................ 1-15
Rotation ............................................................................................. 1-16
Time .................................................................................................. 1-17
Velocity .............................................................................................. 1-17
Volume .............................................................................................. 1-18
Fractional Decimal Equivalents ............................................................... 1-23
Temperature Conversions ....................................................................... 1-24
API Conversion Table .............................................................................. 1-25
Buoyancy Factors for Steel Pipe In Various Weight Fluids ..................... 1-26
Gas Pressure Conversion Factors ........................................................... 1-27
Shear Strengths of Common Shear Pin Material ..................................... 1-28
Conversion Table for Hardness Testing .................................................. 1-28
Boyle's Gas Law ...................................................................................... 1-29
Ideal Gas Law .......................................................................................... 1-29
Pipe Bouyancy ......................................................................................... 1-30
Nozzle Calculations ................................................................................. 1-30
Useful Formulas ....................................................................................... 1-31
Temperature Conversions ................................................................. 1-31
Volume Capacity of Pipes ................................................................. 1-31
Approximate Volume of Hose ............................................................ 1-31
Velocity .............................................................................................. 1-31
i
Hydraulics .......................................................................................... 1-31
Volumes ............................................................................................. 1-31
Mud Pit Calculation ............................................................................ 1-32
Pipe Displacement ............................................................................. 1-32
ID ........................................................................................................ 1-32
Area of Tubing Wall ............................................................................ 1-32
Tubing Weight Per Foot (Wall Thickness Unknown) .......................... 1-32
Tubing Weight Per Foot ..................................................................... 1-32
Buoyancy Factor ................................................................................ 1-32
Weight of Tubing in Fluid ................................................................... 1-32
Load Capacity at Minimum Yield ........................................................ 1-32
Pressure Capacity .............................................................................. 1-32
Pipe Capacity in Barrels Per Linear Foot ........................................... 1-33
Annular Volume in Barrels Per Linear Foot ........................................ 1-33
Annular Velocity, ft/min ...................................................................... 1-33
Time to Displace ................................................................................ 1-33
Fluid Pressure Gradient ..................................................................... 1-33
Hydrostatic Pressure .......................................................................... 1-33
Bottomhole Pressure .......................................................................... 1-33
Kill Fluid Weight ................................................................................. 1-33
Stretch Due to Weight in Hole, ft ........................................................ 1-33
"Free Point" for Stuck Tubing or the Length of Free Pipe .................. 1-33
Elongation Due to Temperature, ft ..................................................... 1-34
Specific Gravity of Oil from API .......................................................... 1-34
Thermal Gradient, °F / ft ..................................................................... 1-34
KCL in lb for % Needed ...................................................................... 1-34
Rate of Travel with Coiled Tubing ...................................................... 1-34
Pump Rate ......................................................................................... 1-34
Physical Constants ............................................................................. 1-35
Coiled Tubing Glossary ........................................................................... 1-36
Coiled Tubing Cable Installation System ................................................. 1-43
Cables and Slickline Information ............................................................. 1-46
Slicklines - Minimum Breaking Loads ................................................ 1-46
Swablines - Minimum Breaking Loads ............................................... 1-46
GD Stainless and Special Alloy Wirelines .......................................... 1-46
Camesa, Inc.™ Cable Type Designation ........................................... 1-47
Commonly Used Cables: Electric Lines ............................................. 1-48
ii
VannGun™ Assemblies .......................................................................... 1-49
1 9/16-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ...................................... 1-49
2-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-49
2 1/2-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-50
2 3/4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-50
2 7/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-51
2 7/8-in. Heavy Wall Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .................... 1-51
3 3/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-51
4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-53
4 5/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-54
4 3/4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-56
5-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-57
5 1/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-58
5 3/4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-59
6-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-59
6 1/2-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-59
6 1/2-in. High-Pressure Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ................ 1-60
7-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-60
Gun Washover/Fishing Specifications ............................................... 1-61
O-ring Dimensions ................................................................................... 1-62
Displacing Fluid from Coiled Tubing with Nitrogen .................................. 1-64
Procedure ........................................................................................... 1-64
Using Nitrogen Bottles for Purging Coiled Tubing .............................. 1-67
Coiled Tubing and Corrosion ................................................................... 1-69
Procedures to Minimize CT Corrosion ............................................... 1-69
Corrosive fluids .................................................................................. 1-70
Coiled Tubing Storage Guidelines ..................................................... 1-72
Pre-Job Guidelines ............................................................................. 1-76
Post-Job Guidelines ........................................................................... 1-76
Maintenance Recommendations, Special Cases ............................... 1-79
References ......................................................................................... 1-80
iii
Coiled Tubing Fatigue ............................................................................. 2-22
Coiled Tubing Performance Data ............................................................ 2-28
Grade 70 ............................................................................................ 2-28
Grade 80 ............................................................................................ 2-32
Grade 90 ............................................................................................ 2-36
Grade 100 .......................................................................................... 2-40
Grade 110 .......................................................................................... 2-44
Grade 120 .......................................................................................... 2-48
Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements ............................................ 2-52
Tubing Sizes, Volumes, and Displacements ........................................... 2-56
Casing Sizes and Volumes ...................................................................... 2-58
Drillpipe Sizes and Volumes .................................................................... 2-66
Annular Volumes for Coiled Tubing Inside of Tubing .............................. 2-68
Annular Volumes for Tubing Inside of Casing ......................................... 2-74
iv
Bactericides/Biocides ......................................................................... 3-41
Conductivity Enhancers ..................................................................... 3-43
Acids .................................................................................................. 3-45
Corrosion Inhibitors ............................................................................ 3-51
Proppants ................................................................................................ 3-53
Resin-Coated Sand ............................................................................ 3-54
Ceramics ............................................................................................ 3-55
Sintered Bauxite ................................................................................. 3-56
Proppant Calculations ........................................................................ 3-57
Proppant Data Tables ........................................................................ 3-61
Sand and Gel Required for 1 bbl of Slurry ......................................... 3-64
Density of Sand Slurry ....................................................................... 3-66
Miscellaneous Fluid Information Tables .................................................. 3-67
Maximum Density of Common Completion Brines ............................. 3-67
Sodium Chloride Solution Properties ................................................. 3-67
Calcium Chloride Solution Properties ................................................ 3-68
Ammonium Chloride Solution Properties ........................................... 3-68
Potassium Chloride Solution Properties ............................................. 3-69
Fracturing Fluid Systems ................................................................... 3-69
Hydraulics and Friction Pressure Losses ................................................ 3-71
Pressure Losses in Liquids ................................................................ 3-72
Pressure Losses in Gases ................................................................. 3-75
Pressure Losses in Foams ................................................................. 3-75
Pressure Losses in Multiphase Fluids ................................................ 3-75
Nomenclature ..................................................................................... 3-76
References ......................................................................................... 3-76
Tables of Friction Pressure Losses in Coiled Tubing ......................... 3-77
v
Maximum Anticipated Working Pressure (MAWP) ............................ 4-6
Well Control Barriers .......................................................................... 4-6
Minimum Pressure Control Requirements ......................................... 4-7
Special Applications: Pressure Control Requirements ...................... 4-8
Lubricators and Risers ....................................................................... 4-9
Definitions .......................................................................................... 4-9
Flowback Control Equipment ............................................................. 4-10
Function and Pressure Test Requirements for All Pressure
Control Equipment ............................................................................. 4-13
BHA Pressure Control Equipment ..................................................... 4-14
Emergency Responses and Contingency Planning ................................. 4-15
Emergency Well Control Operation ................................................... 4-15
Contingency Plans ............................................................................. 4-15
Power Pack Failure ............................................................................ 4-16
Leaking Stripper Assembly ................................................................ 4-16
Collapsed Coiled Tubing .................................................................... 4-17
Coiled Tubing Stuck in the Hole ......................................................... 4-19
Leak in the Riser or Connections Below the Well-Control Stack ....... 4-20
Coiled Tubing Parted Between the Reel and Injector ........................ 4-21
Coiled Tubing Parted Downhole ........................................................ 4-21
Coiled Tubing Parted between Injector and Stripper Assembly ......... 4-22
A Hole in the Coiled Tubing Above the Stripper (Run in the Hole) .... 4-22
A Hole in the Coiled Tubing Above the Stripper ................................ 4-23
A Hole in the Coiled Tubing Downhole .............................................. 4-23
Coiled Tubing Buckled between the Stripper and Injector ................. 4-23
Uncontrolled Descent of Coiled Tubing into the Well ......................... 4-23
Uncontrolled Ascent Out of the Well .................................................. 4-24
Crane Operations ............................................................................... 4-25
Guy Lines and Base Support ................................................................... 4-26
Free-standing (Injector Supported by Telescopic Legs) / Crane ....... 4-26
Support Structure (Track Stack or Injector Stand) ............................. 4-27
Guy Lines ........................................................................................... 4-28
Anchors .............................................................................................. 4-32
Foundations (Well Location) for Support Structures and
Crane Outriggers ............................................................................... 4-33
Working Near Power Lines ................................................................ 4-35
Guy Line Placement ........................................................................... 4-36
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 104-in. Flange, 72-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor . 4-37
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 104-in. Flange, 72-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-37
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 128-in. Flange, 72-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-38
vi
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 128-in. Flange, 80-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-38
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 142-in. Flange, 84-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-39
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 148-in. Flange, 84-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-39
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 996.15954, 128-in. Flange,
80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-40
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 996.16074, 118-in. Flange,
72-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-40
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 997.02400, 128-in. Flange,
80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-41
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 997.02407, 138-in. Flange,
80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-41
References ......................................................................................... 4-42
vii
Section 6—Well Control Equipment
Summary of Well Control Equipment ...................................................... 6-1
Blowout Preventer (BOP) Systems .................................................... 6-2
Stripper Packer Systems .................................................................... 6-7
Hydraulic Quick-Latches/Connectors ................................................. 6-9
Coiled Tubing Drilling/Workover Equipment ...................................... 6-11
Work Window ..................................................................................... 6-13
Specialty Equipment .......................................................................... 6-13
Adapters/Spools/Lubricators/Flow Cross/Hand Unions ..................... 6-14
Blowout Preventers (BOPs) ..................................................................... 6-14
Features ............................................................................................. 6-15
Options ............................................................................................... 6-16
Operation ........................................................................................... 6-16
Preparation ......................................................................................... 6-16
Closing and Locking the Rams .......................................................... 6-17
Unlocking and Opening the Rams ..................................................... 6-17
Blind Ram Assembly .......................................................................... 6-17
Pipe Ram Assembly ........................................................................... 6-18
Slip Ram Assembly ............................................................................ 6-19
Shear Ram Assembly ........................................................................ 6-20
Shear Seal Rams ............................................................................... 6-24
Pipe Slip Rams ................................................................................... 6-25
BOP Field Testing .............................................................................. 6-25
BOP Specifications ............................................................................ 6-26
Stripper Packers ...................................................................................... 6-32
Operation ........................................................................................... 6-33
Top Loading Stripper Packer ............................................................. 6-34
Side Door Stripper Packer ................................................................. 6-35
Sidewinder Stripper Packer ................................................................ 6-36
Anti-Buckling Device .......................................................................... 6-37
Inhibitor Injection ................................................................................ 6-37
Test Pressure ..................................................................................... 6-37
Test Procedure ................................................................................... 6-37
Specifications ..................................................................................... 6-38
Quick-latches ........................................................................................... 6-41
Hydraconn Connectors ...................................................................... 6-41
Injector Connectors ............................................................................ 6-42
Operation ........................................................................................... 6-42
Hydraulic Releasing Connector .......................................................... 6-43
viii
Unions and Flanges ................................................................................. 6-43
CB Unions .......................................................................................... 6-44
CH, CQ Unions .................................................................................. 6-45
CO Unions ......................................................................................... 6-46
Flange Dimensions ............................................................................ 6-47
Maintenance and Field Inspection ............................................................ 6-49
Suggested Maintenance Schedule .................................................... 6-49
Field Inspections ................................................................................ 6-49
ix
Fishing Tools ........................................................................................... 7-48
Up/Down Hydraulic Jar ...................................................................... 7-48
Up/Down Accelerator ......................................................................... 7-50
GS Hydraulically Activated Pulling Tool ............................................. 7-52
Flow-Releasing GS Pulling Tool ........................................................ 7-54
Flow-Through Stem ............................................................................ 7-56
Hydra-Blast, CoilSweep, and Pulsonix Tools .......................................... 7-58
Hydra-Blast Pro™ Rotating Tool ........................................................ 7-58
Hydra-Blast™ Indexing Tool .............................................................. 7-60
CT Downhole Inline Filter ................................................................... 7-63
CT Surface Inline Filters ..................................................................... 7-64
CoilSweep™ Sand Cleaning Tool ...................................................... 7-65
Pulsonix™ Oscillating Tool ................................................................ 7-66
Setting Tools and Downhole Force Generator ........................................ 7-68
Hydraulic Setting Tools ...................................................................... 7-68
PressureSetPro™ Tool ...................................................................... 7-70
Pressure-Activated Firing Head with Wireline .................................... 7-72
Setting Tools ...................................................................................... 7-72
X-Line® Hydraulically Activated Running Tool .................................... 7-74
Downhole Force Generator ................................................................ 7-76
Logging and Perforating .......................................................................... 7-78
Coiled Tubing Mechanical-Release Cablehead ................................. 7-78
Coiled Tubing Flow-Releasing Cablehead ......................................... 7-80
Deployment Bars ................................................................................ 7-82
Surface Termination Assembly .......................................................... 7-83
Depth Measuring Heads .................................................................... 7-84
DepthPro™ Collar Locator Equipment .................................................... 7-86
DepthPro™ Coiled Tubing Collar Locator .......................................... 7-86
Surface Computer Package ............................................................... 7-87
Features and Benefits ........................................................................ 7-87
Warrior Software ................................................................................ 7-90
Universal Logging Kit ......................................................................... 7-91
Inflatable Straddle Packer ....................................................................... 7-93
Pin-Point Stimulation ............................................................................... 7-95
Coiled Tubing Connectors .................................................................. 7-95
Shear Disconnect ............................................................................... 7-97
Splined Quick-Connect ...................................................................... 7-99
Centralizers ........................................................................................ 7-100
x
Features and Benefits ........................................................................ 7-100
Knuckle Joint ...................................................................................... 7-101
Blast Joints ......................................................................................... 7-102
Ported Subs ....................................................................................... 7-103
Top Cup Packers ............................................................................... 7-104
RR4-EV Packers ................................................................................ 7-106
SurgiFrac™ Jetting Tools ................................................................... 7-108
Ball Subs ............................................................................................ 7-110
CT Thread Selection ................................................................................ 7-111
Dimensional Data for Recommended CT Tool Threads .......................... 7-112
Coiled Tubing Thread Strengths and Recommended Makeup Torque ... 7-113
Commonly Used CT Threads Recognition .............................................. 7-114
1.7 - 10 Stub Acme ........................................................................... 7-114
Stub Acme .......................................................................................... 7-114
Ammt with O-ring Groove ................................................................... 7-115
1 1/4-in. Ammt .................................................................................... 7-115
API Regular with O-ring Groove ......................................................... 7-116
PAC .................................................................................................... 7-116
External Fishing Necks ............................................................................ 7-117
Internal Fishneck Reference Table for CT Flow Activated "GS" ............. 7-118
Guidelines for Selection of Seals and O-rings ......................................... 7-119
O-ring Selections ................................................................................ 7-120
Quality Checks ................................................................................... 7-121
xi
80K Injector ........................................................................................ 8-12
V95HP Injector ................................................................................... 8-14
100K Injector ...................................................................................... 8-15
V135HP Injector ................................................................................ 8-17
Injector Chains and Gripper Blocks .................................................... 8-18
Two Hole Gripper Blocks: V-Blocks® .................................................. 8-21
Minimum Linear Beam Pressure for Injectors with V-Blocks ............. 8-23
Maximum Linear Beam Pressure for Injectors with V-Blocks ............ 8-25
Tubing Guide Arches ............................................................................... 8-39
Overview ............................................................................................ 8-39
Selection and Job Considerations ...................................................... 8-39
48-in. Fixed-Radius Guide Arch ......................................................... 8-41
72-in. Fixed-Radius Guide Arch ......................................................... 8-41
72-in. Fixed-Radius Special Guide Arch ............................................ 8-42
96-in. Fixed-Radius Guide Arch ......................................................... 8-43
120-in. Fixed-Radius Special Guide Arch .......................................... 8-43
52-96 in. Progressive-Radius Guide Arch .......................................... 8-44
72-120 in. Progressive-Radius Guide Arch ........................................ 8-45
72-120 in. Segmented-Guide Arch ..................................................... 8-46
Coiled Tubing Reels ................................................................................ 8-47
Shaft-Type Reel Assemblies .............................................................. 8-48
Shaftless Type Reel Assemblies ........................................................ 8-49
Reel Swivels ....................................................................................... 8-53
Halliburton Reel Capacities ................................................................ 8-54
Reel Capacity Calculation .................................................................. 8-55
Shipping Spools ................................................................................. 8-56
Additional Reel Equipment ...................................................................... 8-57
Yard Spooling Device ......................................................................... 8-57
Coiled Tubing Embedded Reel Stand ................................................ 8-58
Bump Guard for Embedded Reel Stand ............................................ 8-58
Coiled Tubing Spreader/Lifter Bar with Slings and Shackles ............. 8-59
Coiled Tubing Hydraulic Power Packs .................................................... 8-60
Standard 30K Hydraulic Coiled Tubing Power Pack .......................... 8-60
Universal High-Pressure Coiled Tubing Power Pack ......................... 8-61
Zone 2 Universal High-Pressure Coiled Tubing Power Pack
(Detroit Diesel 8V92TA) ..................................................................... 8-62
Zone 2 Universal High-Pressure Coiled Tubing Power Pack
(CAT 3406/CI5) .................................................................................. 8-64
xii
Coiled Tubing Operator Houses ............................................................... 8-65
Trucks and Trailers ................................................................................... 8-69
Large Load Capacity Coiled Tubing Crane Truck .............................. 8-69
QMC 6070 High-Capacity Crane Trailer ............................................ 8-70
Standard Drop-Deck Coiled Tubing Reel Trailer ............................... 8-71
3-Axle International (Canada) Embedded Reel Trailer ...................... 8-72
4-Axle Embedded Reel Trailer ........................................................... 8-72
Offshore Skid Units .................................................................................. 8-73
Standard 60K Offshore Skid Unit ....................................................... 8-74
Certified 60K Offshore Skid Unit ........................................................ 8-78
Halliburton Fluid Pumps ........................................................................... 8-82
HT-150 (Coyote) ................................................................................ 8-82
HT-400 ............................................................................................... 8-83
HT-1200 (Bearcat) ............................................................................. 8-85
HT-2000 ............................................................................................. 8-86
HQ-2000 (Grizzly) .............................................................................. 8-87
Complete Pump Units ........................................................................ 8-88
General Statistics ............................................................................... 8-88
Unit Performance ............................................................................... 8-89
Centrifugal Pumps ............................................................................. 8-90
xiii
Commingled Fluids with Nitrogen ............................................................ 9-14
Terminology ....................................................................................... 9-14
Applications of Commingled Fluids .................................................... 9-14
Hydrajetting with Nitrogen .................................................................. 9-14
Nitrogen in Workover Fluids ............................................................... 9-14
Placing Corrosion Inhibitors with Nitrogen ......................................... 9-15
Nitrogen in Drilling Muds Ahead of Cement Jobs .............................. 9-15
Freeing Differentially Stuck Drillpipe .................................................. 9-15
Jetting with Nitrogen ........................................................................... 9-15
Nitrogen-Assisted Unloading .............................................................. 9-15
Nitrogen with Fracturing and Acidizing Services ................................ 9-16
Density Control with Nitrogen ............................................................. 9-16
Nitrogen Foams and Foam Cleanouts ..................................................... 9-17
Introduction ........................................................................................ 9-17
What is foam? .................................................................................... 9-17
When Should Foam Be Used for a Cleanout? ................................... 9-17
Foam Behavior During Circulation ..................................................... 9-18
Temperature ....................................................................................... 9-19
Reservoir Liquid Influxes .................................................................... 9-19
Base Fluid .......................................................................................... 9-20
Foam Generators ............................................................................... 9-20
What Affects the Fluid Loss During a Cleanout? ............................... 9-21
How to Change Velocities and Downhole Circulating Pressures ....... 9-21
Miscellaneous Guidelines .................................................................. 9-22
Nitrogen Equipment ................................................................................. 9-23
Terminology ....................................................................................... 9-23
Nitrogen Converter Performance Summary ....................................... 9-23
MPU-60A Nitrogen-Converter Truck .................................................. 9-24
MPU-90A Nitrogen-Converter Truck .................................................. 9-25
MPU-660A Nitrogen-Converter Truck ................................................ 9-26
TPU-300A Nitrogen-Converter Trailer ................................................ 9-27
TPU-340FA Nitrogen-Converter Trailer ............................................. 9-28
TPU-660 Nitrogen-Converter Trailer .................................................. 9-29
SPU-60B Nitrogen-Converter Skid ..................................................... 9-30
S120-15F Nitrogen-Converter Skid .................................................... 9-31
SPU-180F (Wellnite Design) and NCS-180F (ISO-compatible)
Offshore Nitrogen-Converter Skids .................................................... 9-32
SPU-340F Nitrogen-Converter Skid ................................................... 9-33
BLT-3700 Nitrogen Transport Truck .................................................. 9-34
xiv
TLT-2000 Nitrogen "PUP" Trailer ....................................................... 9-35
ST-72-LNSM MVE/LOX Liquid Nitrogen Trailer ................................. 9-36
TRS-74-P-85 CRYENCO Pressure-Off Liquid Nitrogen Trailer ......... 9-37
Offshore Skid Tanks ........................................................................... 9-38
NTS-2150, -3000, and -5000 ISO-Framed Offshore Nitrogen Tanks 9-39
Nitrogen Purge Tube Trailer ............................................................... 9-40
Nitrogen Losses ................................................................................. 9-41
High-Pressure N2 Tank vs. Low-Pressure N2 Tank and Boost Pump:
Which is best? .................................................................................... 9-44
Membrane and PSA Nitrogen Generating Equipment -
Non-Cryogenic Production of Nitrogen .............................................. 9-46
Tank Contents Gauge Charts ............................................................ 9-47
xv
xvi
Section 1 General Information
i
Pipe Displacement ............................................................................. 1-32
ID ........................................................................................................ 1-32
Area of Tubing Wall ............................................................................ 1-32
Tubing Weight Per Foot (Wall Thickness Unknown) .......................... 1-32
Tubing Weight Per Foot ..................................................................... 1-32
Buoyancy Factor ................................................................................ 1-32
Weight of Tubing in Fluid .................................................................... 1-32
Load Capacity at Minimum Yield ........................................................ 1-32
Pressure Capacity .............................................................................. 1-32
Pipe Capacity in Barrels Per Linear Foot ........................................... 1-33
Annular Volume in Barrels Per Linear Foot ........................................ 1-33
Annular Velocity, ft/min ....................................................................... 1-33
Time to Displace ................................................................................. 1-33
Fluid Pressure Gradient ..................................................................... 1-33
Hydrostatic Pressure .......................................................................... 1-33
Bottomhole Pressure .......................................................................... 1-33
Kill Fluid Weight .................................................................................. 1-33
Stretch Due to Weight in Hole, ft ........................................................ 1-33
"Free Point" for Stuck Tubing or the Length of Free Pipe .................. 1-33
Elongation Due to Temperature, ft ..................................................... 1-34
Specific Gravity of Oil from API .......................................................... 1-34
Thermal Gradient, °F / ft ..................................................................... 1-34
KCL in lb for % Needed ...................................................................... 1-34
Rate of Travel with Coiled Tubing ...................................................... 1-34
Pump Rate ......................................................................................... 1-34
Physical Constants ............................................................................. 1-35
Coiled Tubing Glossary ........................................................................... 1-36
Coiled Tubing Cable Installation System ................................................. 1-43
Cables and Slickline Information ............................................................. 1-46
Slicklines - Minimum Breaking Loads ................................................. 1-46
Swablines - Minimum Breaking Loads ............................................... 1-46
GD Stainless and Special Alloy Wirelines .......................................... 1-46
Camesa, Inc.™ Cable Type Designation ........................................... 1-47
Commonly Used Cables: Electric Lines ............................................. 1-48
VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................................................... 1-49
1 9/16-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ...................................... 1-49
2-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-49
2 1/2-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-50
2 3/4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-50
2 7/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-51
ii
2 7/8-in. Heavy Wall Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ..................... 1-51
3 3/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-51
4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-53
4 5/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-54
4 3/4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-56
5-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-57
5 1/8-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-58
5 3/4-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-59
6-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-59
6 1/2-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ........................................ 1-59
6 1/2-in. High-Pressure Premium VannGun™ Assemblies ................ 1-60
7-in. Premium VannGun™ Assemblies .............................................. 1-60
Gun Washover/Fishing Specifications ................................................ 1-61
O-ring Dimensions ................................................................................... 1-62
Displacing Fluid from Coiled Tubing with Nitrogen .................................. 1-64
Procedure ........................................................................................... 1-64
Using Nitrogen Bottles for Purging Coiled Tubing .............................. 1-67
Coiled Tubing and Corrosion ................................................................... 1-69
Procedures to Minimize CT Corrosion ............................................... 1-69
Corrosive fluids ................................................................................... 1-70
Coiled Tubing Storage Guidelines ...................................................... 1-72
Pre-Job Guidelines ............................................................................. 1-76
Post-Job Guidelines ........................................................................... 1-76
Maintenance Recommendations, Special Cases ............................... 1-79
References ......................................................................................... 1-80
iii
iv
Section 1
General Information
Unit Conversions
Acceleration Preface
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.03281 ft/second/second
0.036 kilometers/hour/second
centimeters/second/second
0.01 meters/second/second
0.02237 miles/hour/second
30.48 centimeters/second/second
1.097 kms/hour/second
ft/second/second
0.3048 meters/second/second
0.6818 miles/hour/second
27.78 centimeters/hour/second
0.9113 foot/second/second
kilometers/hour/second
0.2778 meters/second/second
0.6214 miles/hour/second
100 centimeters/second/second
3.281 foot/second/second
meters/second/second
3.6 kilometers/hour/second
2.237 miles/hour/second
44.7 centimeters/second/second
1.467 ft/second/second
miles/hour/second
1.609 kilometers/hour/second
0.447 meters/second/second
572.9578 revolutions/minute/minute
radians/second/second 9.549 revolutions/minute/second
0.1592 revolutions/second/second
1.75E-03 radians/second/second
revolutions/minute/minute 0.01667 revolutions/minute/minute
2.78E-04 revolutions/second/second
6.283 radians/second/second
revolutions/second/second 3600 revolutions/minute/minute
60 revolutions/minute/second
Angular
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.01111 quadrants
degrees (angle) 0.01745 radians
3600 seconds
ft/100 ft 1 percent grade
1.85E-04 quadrants
2.91E-04 radians
minutes (angles)
0.01667 degrees
60 seconds
1.571 radians
90 degrees
quadrants (angle)
5400 minutes
3.24E+05 seconds
57.29578 degrees
radians 3438 minutes
2.06E+05 seconds
3.09E-06 quadrants
4.85E-06 radians
seconds (angle)
2.78E-04 degrees
0.01666667 minutes
Area
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.4047 hectare or square hectometer
10 square chain (Gunter's)
acre
100000 square links (Gunter's)
160 square rods
43560 cubic ft
acre-ft
325900 gal
43560 square ft
4047 square meters
acres
0.001562 square miles
4840 square yards
centares (centiares) 1 square meters
5.07E-06 square centimeters
circular mils 7.85E-07 square in.
0.7854 square mils
2.471 acres
hectares
107600 square ft
Area (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
1.97E+05 circular mils
3.86E-11 square miles
100 square millimeters
square centimeters 1.20E-04 square yards
1.08E-03 square ft
0.155 square in.
0.0001 square meters
2.30E-05 acres
1.83E+08 circular mils
929 square centimeters
144 square in.
square ft
0.0929 square meters
3.59E-08 square miles
9.29E+04 square millimeters
0.1111 square yards
1.27E+06 circular mils
6.452 square centimeters
6.94E-03 square ft
square in.
645.2 square millimeters
1.00E+06 square mils
7.72E-04 square yards
247.1 Inch acres
1.00E+10 square centimeters
1.08E+07 square ft
square kilometers 1.55E+09 square in.
1.00E+06 square meters
0.3861 square miles
1.20E+06 square yards
2.47E-04 acres
1.00E+04 square centimeters
10.76 square ft
square meters 1550 square in.
3.86E-07 square miles
1.00E+06 square millimeters
1.196 square yards
640 acres
2.79E+07 square ft
square miles 2.59 square kilometers
2.59E+06 square meters
3.10E+06 square yards
1973 circular mils
0.01 square centimeters
square millimeters
1.08E-05 square ft
1.55E-03 square in.
Area (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
1.273 circular mils
square mils 6.45E-06 square centimeters
1.00E-06 square in.
2.07E-04 acres
8361 square centimeters
9 square ft
square yards 1296 square in.
0.8361 square meters
3.23E-07 square miles
8.36E+05 square millimeters
Density
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
grains/imp. gallon 14.286 parts/million
17.118 parts/million
grains/US gallon
142.86 lb/million gallon
62.43 lb/cubic ft
grams/cubic centimeter 0.03613 lb/cubic inch
3.41E-07 lb/mil-foot
grams/liter 58.417 grains/gallon
grams/liter 8.345 lb/1000 gallon
grams/liter 0.062427 lb/cubic foot
62.43 lb/cubic foot
grams/cubic centimeter 0.03613 lb/cubic inch
3.41E-07 lb/mil-foot
0.001 grams/cubic centimeter
0.06243 pound/cubic foot
3.61E-05 lb/cubic inch
3.41E-10 lb/mil-foot
kilograms/cubic meter
3.28E-03 ft of water
2.90E-03 in. of mercury
0.2048 lb/square foot
1.42E-03 lb/square inch
0.01602 grams/cubic centimeter
16.02 kilograms/cubic meter
5.79E-04 lb/cubic inch
5.46E-09 lb/mil-foot
0.13368 lb/gallon
lb/cubic foot
27.68 gms/cubic centimeter
2.77E+04 kilograms/cubic meter
1728 lb/cubic foot
9.43E-06 lb/mil-foot
231 lb/gallon
Density (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
7.48052 lb/cubic foot
lb/gallon
0.004329 lb/cubic inch
lb/mil-foot 2.31E+06 gms/cubic centimeter
0.07016 grains/imperial gallon
parts/million 0.0584 grains/U.S. gallon
8.345 lb/million gallon
Electrical
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
3.00E+09 statcoulombs
coulombs
1.04E-05 faradays
64.52 coulombs/square inch
coulombs/square centimeter
10000 coulombs/square meter
0.155 coulombs/square centimeter
coulombs/square inch
1550 coulombs/square meter
0.0001 coulombs/square centimeter
coulombs/square meter
0.0006452 coulombs/square inch
faraday/second 96500 ampere (absolute)
26.8 ampere-hours
faradays
96490 coulombs
farads 1000000 microfarads
international ampere 0.9998 ampere (absolute)
96540 joules
International volt
1.59E-19 joules (absolute)
1.00E+12 microhms
megohms
1.00E+06 ohms
microfarad 1.00E-06 farads
microhms 1.00E-06 ohms
ohm (international) 1.0005 ohm (absolute)
1.00E-06 megohms
ohms
1.00E+06 microhms
Energy/Torque/Power
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
1.06E+10 ergs
778.3 foot-lbs
252 gram-calories
0.0003931 horsepower-hours
Btu
1054.8 joules
0.252 kilogram-calories
107.5 kilogram-meters
0.0002928 kilowatt-hours
Energy/Torque/Power (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.2162 foot-lb/second
0.07 gram-cal/second
Btu/hour
0.0003929 horsepower-hours
0.2931 watts
12.96 foot-lbs/second
0.02356 horsepower
Btu/minute
0.01757 kilowatts
17.57 watts
Btu/square ft/minute 0.1221 watts/square inch
1.56E-06 horsepower-hour
1.58E-06 horsepower-hour (metric)
calorie
4.1868 joule
1.16E-06 kilowatt-hour
calorie, gram (mean) 0.00396832 Btu (mean)
dynes/square centimeter 0.000001 bars
9.48E-11 Btu
1 dyne-centimeters
7.37E-08 foot-lb
2.39E-08 gram-calories
0.00102 grams-centimeters
ergs 3.73E-14 horsepower-hours
0.0000001 joules
2.39E-11 kg-calories
1.02E-08 kg-meters
2.78E-14 kilowatt-hours
2.78E-11 watt-hours
5.69E-06 Btu/minute
1 dyne-centimeter/second
4.43E-06 foot-lbs/minute
ergs/second 7.38E-08 foot-lbs/second
1.34E-10 horsepower
1.43E-09 kg-calories/minute
1.00E-10 kilowatts
0.001286 Btu
1.36E+07 ergs
0.3238 gram-calories
5.05E-07 hp-hours
foot-lb
1.356 joules
0.000324 kg-calories
0.1383 kg-meters
3.77E-07 kilowatt-hours
0.001286 Btu/minute
0.01667 foot-lb/second
foot-lb/minute 0.0000303 horsepower
0.000324 kg-calories/minute
0.0000226 kilowatts
Energy/Torque/Power (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
4.6263 Btu/hour
0.07717 Btu/minute
foot-lb/second 8.18E-04 horsepower
1.01945 kg-calories/minute
0.001356 kilowatts
0.0039683 Btu
9.30E-08 Btu
4.19E-07 ergs
gram-calories 3.088 foot-lb
1.56E-06 horsepower-hours
1.16E-06 kilowatt-hours
0.001163 watt-hours
gram-calories/second 14.286 Btu/hour
980.7 ergs
980700 joules
gram-centimeters
2.34E+08 kg-cal
100000 kg-meters
grams/square centimeter 2.0481 lb/square foot
hectowatts 100 watts
42.44 Btu/minute
33000 foot-lbs/minute
550 foot-lbs/second
horsepower
10.68 kg-calories/minute
0.7457 kilowatts
745.7 watts
33479 Btu/hour
horsepower (boiler)
9.803 kilowatts
horsepower (metric) 0.9863 horsepower
2547 Btu
2.68E+13 ergs
1980000 foot-lbs
641190 gram-calories
horsepower-hours
2684000 joules
641.1 kg-calories
273700 kg-meters
0.7457 kilowatt-hours
9.48E-04 Btu
10000000 ergs
0.7376 foot-lb
joules
0.0002389 kg-calories
0.102 kg-meters
0.0002778 watt-hours
Energy/Torque/Power (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
9.29E-03 Btu
9.80E+07 ergs
7.233 foot-lb
kilogram-meters
9.804 joules
2.34E-03 kg-calories
2.72E-06 kilowatt-hours
3413 Btu
3.60E+13 ergs
2.66E+06 foot-lbs
859850 gram-calories
1.341 horsepower-hours
kilowatt-hours
3.60E+06 joules
860.5 kg-calories
3.67E+05 kg-meters
22.75 lbs of water from 62°-212°F
3.53 lbs of water evap. at 212°F
56.92 Btu/minute
4.43E+04 foot-lbs/minute
737.6 foot-lbs/second
kilowatts
1.341 horsepower
14.34 kg-calories/minute
1000 watts
9.81E+07 centimeter-dynes
meter-kilograms 1.00E+05 centimeter-grams
7.233 lb-ft
1.36E+07 centimeter-dynes
lb-ft 13825 centimeter-grams
0.1383 meter-kilograms
lb/foot 1.488 kilograms/meter
lb/inch 178.6 gms/centimeter
watt (international) 1.0002 watt (absolute)
centigrams 0.01 grams
0.00102 centimeter-grams
centimeter-dynes 1.02E-08 meter-kilograms
7.38E-08 lb-ft
centimeter-grams 980.7 centimeter-dynes
centimeter-grams 0.00001 meter-kilograms
centimeter-grams 0.07233 lb-ft
3.413 Btu
3.60E+10 ergs
2656 foot-lb
859.85 gram-calories
watt-hours
1.34E-03 horsepower-hours
0.8605 kilogram-calories
367.2 kilogram-meters
0.001 kilowatt-hours
Energy/Torque/Power (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
3.4129 Btu/hour
0.05688 Btu/minute
107 erg/second
44.27 foot-lbs/minute
watts 0.7378 foot-lbs/second
1.34E-03 horsepower
1.36E-03 horsepower (metric)
0.01433 kg-calories/minute
0.001 kilowatts
0.056884 Btu (mean)/minute
watts (absolute)
1 joules/second
Flow Rate
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
472 cubic centimeters/second
0.1247 gal/second
cubic ft/minute 0.472 liters/second
62.43 lb of water/minute
.028317 cubic meters/minute
448.831 gal/minute
cubic ft/second
0.646317 million gal/day
0.45 cubic ft/second
cubic yards/minute 3.367 gal/second
12.74 liters/second
cubic meters/minute 35.314 cubic ft/minute
8.0208 cubic ft/hour
gal/minute 0.002228 cubic foot/second
0.6308 liters/second
5.89E-04 cubic foot/second
liters/minute
4.40E-03 gal/second
million gal/day 1.54723 cubic foot/second
lb of water/minute 2.67E-04 cubic foot/second
Force/Mass/Weight
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.1 grams
decigrams
10 grams
drams 27.3437 grains
drams 1.7718 grams
drams 0.0625 ounces
0.125 ounces (troy)
drams(apoth. or troy)
0.1371429 ounces(avoirdupois)
Force/Mass/Weight (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.00102 grams
0.0000001 joules/centimeter
0.00001 joules/meter (newtons)
dynes
1.02E-06 kilograms
7.23E-05 poundals
2.25E-06 lb
grains 0.03657143 drams (avoirdupois)
1 grains (avoirdupois)
0.0648 grams
grains (troy)
0.0020833 ounces (avoirdupois)
0.04167 pennyweight (troy)
5 carat(metric)
0.56438339 dram
980.7 dynes
15.43 grains
9.81E-05 joules/centimeter
9.81E-03 joules/meter (newtons)
grams
0.001 kilograms
1000 milligrams
0.032150747 ounces (troy)
0.035273962 ounces(avoirdupois)
0.07093 poundals
0.002204623 lb
grams/centimeter 0.0056 lb/inch
hectograms 100 grams
112 lb
hundredweights (long)
0.05 tons (long)
1600 ounces (avoirdupois)
100 lb
hundredweights (short)
0.0446429 tons (long)
0.0453592 tons (metric)
joules 723.3 poundals
joules 22.48 lb
10000000 dynes
joules/centimeter 10200 grams
100 joules/meter (newton)
980665 dynes
1000 grams
0.09807 joules/centimeter
9.807 joules/meter (newtons)
kilograms
70.93 poundals
2.205 lb
9.84E-04 tons (long)
1.10E-03 tons (short)
kilograms/meter 0.672 lb/foot
kilograms/square centimeter 980665 dynes
micrograms 1.00E-06 grams
Force/Mass/Weight (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
milliers 1000 kilograms
0.01543236 grains
milligrams
0.001 grams
1.00E+05 dynes
newton
.2248 pound
16 drams
437.5 grains
28.349523 grams
ounces 0.9115 ounces (troy)
0.0625 lb
2.79E-05 tons (long)
2.84E-05 Tons (metric)
24 grains
1.55517 grams
pennyweights (troy)
0.05 ounces (troy)
4.17E-03 lb (troy)
poise 1 gram/centimeter second
13826 dynes
14.1 grams
1.38E-03 joules/centimeter
poundals
0.1383 joules/meter (newtons)
0.0141 kilograms
0.03108 lb
256 drams
4.45E+05 dynes
7000 grains
453.5924 grams
0.04448 joules/centimeter
4.448 joules/meter (newtons)
lb 0.4536 kilograms
16 ounces
14.5833 ounces (troy)
32.17 poundals
1.21528 lb (troy)
0.07142857 stones (British)
0.0005 tons (short)
5760 grains
373.24177 grams
13.1657 ounces (avoirdupois)
12 ounces (troy)
lb (troy) 240 pennyweights (troy)
0.822857 lb (avoirdupois)
3.67E-04 tons (long)
3.73E-04 tons (metric)
4.11E-04 tons (short)
scruples 20 grains
Force/Mass/Weight (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
slug 14.59 kilogram
slug 32.17 lb
stone (British) 14 pound (avoirdupois)
teaspoons (US) 4.93 cubic centimeters
1016 kilograms
tons (long) 2240 lb
1.12 tons (short)
1000 kilograms
tons (metric) 907.1848 kilograms
2205 lb
32000 ounces
29166.66 ounces (troy)
2000 lb
tons (short)
2430.56 lb (troy)
0.89287 tons (long)
0.9078 tons (metric)
Length
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.01 in.
caliber
0.254 millimeters
0.03281 ft
0.3937 in.
0.00001 kilometers
0.01 meters
centimeters
6.21E-06 miles
10 millimeters
393.7 mils
0.01094 yards
792 in.
chain
20.12 meters
chain (surveyor's or Gunter's) 22 yards
circumference 6.283 radians
decimeters 0.1 meters
dekameters 10 meters
114.3 centimeter
ell
45 in.
0.167 inch
em (pica)
0.4233 centimeter
fathoms 1.828804 meter
fathoms 6 ft
Length (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
30.48 centimeters
0.0003048 kilometers
0.3048 meters
ft 0.0001645 miles (naut.)
0.0001894 miles (stat.)
304.8 millimeters
12000 mils
0.125 miles (US)
furlongs 40 rods
660 ft
hand 10.16 centimeter
hectometers 100 meters
2.54 centimeters
0.08333333 ft
0.0254 meters
in. 0.00001578 miles
25.4 millimeters
1000 mils
0.027777778 yards
6.68E-09 Astronomical unit
1.00E+05 centimeters
3280.84 ft
3.94E+04 in.
kilometers 1.06E-13 light year
1000 meters
0.6214 miles
1.00E+06 millimeters
1094 yards
league 3 miles (approx.)
63239.7 astronomical unit
light-year 5.90E+12 miles
9.46E+12 kilometers
links (engineer's) 12 in.
links (surveyor's) 7.92 in.
100 centimeters
3.281 ft
39.37 in.
0.001 kilometers
meters
5.40E-04 miles (nautical)
6.21E-04 miles (statute)
1000 millimeters
1.094 yards
microns 1.00E-06 meters
Length (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
6080.27 ft
1.853 kilometers
miles (nautical) 1853 meters
1.1516 miles (statute)
2027 yards
1.61E+05 centimeters
5280 ft
6.34E+04 in.
miles (statute) 1.609 kilometers
1609 meters
0.8684 miles (nautical)
1760 yards
0.1 centimeters
3.28E-03 ft
0.03937 in.
1.00E-06 kilometers
millimeters
0.001 meters
6.21E-07 miles
39.37 mils
1.09E-03 yards
millmicrons 1.00E-09 meters
2.54E-03 centimeters
8.33E-05 ft
mils 0.001 in.
2.54E-03 kilometers
2.78E-05 yards
1.90E+13 miles
parsec
3.08E+13 kilometers
0.25 chain (Gunter's)
rod 5.029 meters
16.5 ft
rods (surveyor's meas.) 5.5 yards
span 9 inch
91.44 centimeters
0.5 fathom
3 foot
36 in.
yards 9.14E-04 kilometers
0.9144 meters
4.93E-04 miles (nautical)
5.68E-04 miles (statute)
914.4 millimeters
Pressure
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.007348 ton/square inch
76 centimeters of mercury
33.9 foot. of water (at 4°C)
29.92 in. of mercury (at 0°C)
atmospheres
1.0333 kilograms/square centimeter
10332 kilograms/square meter
14.7 lb/square inch
1.058 tons/square foot
0.9869 atmospheres
1000000 dynes/square centimeter
bars 10200 kilograms/square meter
2089 lb/square foot
14.5 lb/square inch
0.01316 atmospheres
0.4461 ft of water
centimeters of mercury 136 kilograms/square meter
27.85 lb/square foot
0.1934 lb/square inch
dyne/centimeter 0.01 erg/square millimeter
9.87E-07 atmospheres
dyne/square centimeter 2.95E-05 in. of mercury at 0°C
0.0004015 in. of water at 4°C
0.0295 amospheres
0.8826 in. of mercury
0.03048 kilograms/square centimeter
ft of water
304.8 kilograms/square meter
62.43 lb/square foot
0.4335 lb/square inch
0.03342 atmospheres
1.133 ft of water
0.03453 kilograms/square centimeter
in. of mercury
345.3 kilograms/square meter
70.73 lb/square foot.
0.4912 lb/square inch
0.002458 atmospheres
0.07355 in. of mercury
0.00254 kilograms/square centimeter
in. of water (at 4°C)
0.5781 ounces/square inch
5.204 lb/square foot
0.03613 lb/square inch
3.968 Btu
3088 foot-lb
1.56E-03 hp-hours
kilogram-calories 4186 joules
426.9 kg-meters
4.186 kilojoules
1.16E-03 kilowatt-hours
Pressure (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.9678 atmospheres
32.81 ft of water
kilograms/square centimeter 28.96 in. of mercury
2048 lb/square foot
14.22 lb/square inch
9.68E-05 atmospheres
kilograms/square meter
9.81E-05 bars
kilograms/square mm 1.00E+06 kilograms/square meter
newton/square meter 1.0 pound
4309 dynes/square centimeter
ounces/square inch
0.0625 lb/square inch
4.73E-04 atmospheres
0.01602 ft of water
lb/square foot 0.01414 in. of mercury
4.882 kilograms/square meter
6.94E-03 lb/square inch
0.06804 atmospheres
2.307 ft of water
2.036 in. of mercury
lb/square inch 703.1 kilograms/square meter
144 lb/square foot
6.8947 kilopascals
.0068947 megapascals
9765 kilograms/square meter
tons (short)/square foot
2000 lb/square inch
83.333 lb of water/hour
tons of water/24 hours 0.16643 gal/minute
1.3349 cubic foot/hour
Rotation
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.01745 radians/second
degrees/second 0.1667 revolutions/minute
0.002778 revolutions/second
57.29578 degrees/second
radians/second 9.549 revolutions/minute
0.1592 revolutions/second
360 degrees
revolutions 4 quadrants
6.283 radians
revolutions/minute 6 degrees/second
revolutions/minute 0.1047 radians/second
revolutions/minute 0.01667 revolutions/second
360 degrees/second
revolutions/second 6.283 radians/second
60 revolutions/minute
Time
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
days 86400 seconds
0.04166667 days
hours (mean solar)
0.005952381 weeks
7 day
168 hour
week 10080 minute (time)
0.2299795 month
6.05E+05 second
365.25 day
8766 hour
year (mean of 4 year period) 5.26E+05 minute (time)
3.16E+07 second (time)
52.17857 week
Velocity
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
1.9685 ft/minute
0.03281 ft/second
0.036 kilometers/hour
centimeters/second 0.1943 knots
0.6 meters/minute
0.02237 miles/hour
0.0003728 miles/minute
0.508 centimeters/second
0.01667 ft/second
ft/minute 0.01829 kms/kr
0.3048 meters/minute
0.01136 miles/hour
30.48 centimeters/second
1.097 kms/hour
0.5921 knots
ft/second
18.29 meters/minute
0.6818 miles/hour
0.01136 miles/minute
27.78 centimeters/second
54.68 ft/minute
0.9113 ft/second
kilometers/hour
0.5396 knots
16.67 meters/minute
0.6214 miles/hour
Velocity (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
6080 ft/hour
1.8532 kilometers/hour
1 nautical miles/hour
knots
1.151 statute miles/hour
2027 yards/hour
1.689 ft/second
1.667 centimeters/second
3.281 ft/minute
0.05468 ft/second
meters/minute
0.06 kms/hour
0.03238 knots
0.03728 miles/hour
196.8 ft/minute
3.281 ft/second
3.6 kilometers/hour
meters/second
0.06 kilometers/minute
2.237 miles/hour
0.03728 miles/minute
44.7 centimeters/second
88 ft/minute
1.467 ft/second
1.609 kms/hour
miles/hour
0.02682 kms/minute
0.8684 knots
26.82 meters/minute
0.1667 miles/minute
2682 centimeters/second
88 ft/second
miles/minute 1.609 kms/minute
0.8684 knots/minute
60 miles/hour
Volume
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
barrels (oil) 42 gal (oil)
7056 cubic in.
barrels (US dry)
105 quarts (dry)
barrels (US, liquid) 31.5 gal
1.2445 cubic foot
2150.4 cubic inch
0.03524 cubic meters
bushels 35.24 liters
4 pecks
64 pint (dry)
32 quarts (dry)
Volume (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
0.3382 ounce fluid (US)
0.6103 cubic inch
centiliter
2.705 drams
0.01 liters
cord ft 16 cubic ft
cords 8 cord ft
3.53E-05 cubic foot
0.06102374 cubic inch
0.000001 cubic meter
1000 cubic millimeter
1.31E-06 cubic yard
0.2815606 drachm (Brit. fluid)
cubic centimeter
0.2705122 Dram (U.S. fluid)
2.20E-04 gallon (Brit liquid)
2.64E-04 gallon (US liquid)
0.001 liter
0.002113 pint (US liquid)
0.001057 quart (US liquid)
0.8036 bushels (dry)
28320 cubic centimeters
1728 cubic in.
0.02832 cubic meters
0.037037037 cubic yards
cubic ft
7.48052 gal (US liquid)
28.32 liters
59.84 pints (US liquid)
29.92 quarts (US liquid)
1 sack
16.39 cubic centimeters
0.0005787 cubic ft
1.64E-05 cubic meters
2.14E-05 cubic yards
cubic in.
0.004329 gal
106100 mil-ft
0.03463 pints (US liquid)
0.01732 quarts (US liquid)
28.38 bushels (dry)
1000000 cubic centimeters
35.31 cubic ft
61023 cubic in.
cubic meters 1.307951 cubic yards
264.2 gal (US liquid)
1000 liters
2113 pints (US liquid)
1057 quarts (US liquid)
Volume (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
764600 cubic centimeters
27 cubic ft
46656 cubic in.
0.7646 cubic meters
cubic yards
202 gal (US liquid)
764.6 liters
1615.9 pints (US liquid)
807.9 quarts (US liquid)
cups 236.588 cubic centimeters
deciliters 0.1 liters
dekaliters 10 liters
drams (US fluid or apoth.) 3.6967 cubic centimeter
drops 0.01666 teaspoons
3785.412 cubic centimeters
0.1337 cubic ft
231 cubic in.
gal
0.003785 cubic meters
0.004951 cubic yards
3.785 liters
gal (liquid British imp.) 1.20095 gal (US liquid)
gal (US) 0.83267 gal (imperial)
gal of water 8.3453 lb of water
hectoliters 100 liters
hogsheads (British) 10.114 cubic ft
8.42184 cubic ft
hogsheads (U.S.)
63 gal (U.S.)
kiloliters 1000 liters
0.02838 bushels (U.S. dry)
1000 cubic centimeter
0.03531 cubic ft
61.02 cubic in.
liters 0.001 cubic meters
1.31E-03 cubic yards
0.2642 gal (U.S. liquid)
2.113 pints (U.S. liquid)
1.057 quarts (U.S. liquid)
microliters 1.00E-06 liters
mil-ft 9.43E-06 cubic in.
milliliters 0.001 liters
minims (British) 0.059192 cubic centimeter
minims (US fluid) 0.061612 cubic centimeter
1.805 cubic in.
ounces (fluid)
0.02957 liters
Volume (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
480 grains
31.103481 grams
ounces (troy) 1.09714 ounces (avoirdupois)
20 pennyweights (troy)
0.08333 lb (troy)
554.6 cubic in.
pecks (British)
9.091901 liters
0.25 bushels
537.605 cubic in.
pecks (US)
8.809582 liters
8 quarts (dry)
568.26125 cubic centimeters
34.67743 cubic in.
0.125 gal (Brit.)
4 gills (Brit.)
pints (Brit.) 0.56826125 liters
568.26125 milliliters
20 ounces (Brit. fluid)
1.032057 pints (US dry)
1.20095 pints (US liquid)
550.6105 cubic centimeters
33.6003125 cubic in.
0.5506105 liters
pints (US dry) 550.6105 milliters
0.0625 peck (US)
0.968939 pint (Brit. dry)
0.5 quarts (US dry)
473.1765 cubic centimeter
0.01671 cubic ft
28.875 cubic in.
4.73E-04 cubic meters
6.19E-04 cubic yards
0.125 gal (US)
pints (US liquid)
4 gills (US)
0.4731765 liters
473.1765 milliliters
16 ounce (US fluid)
0.8326742 pints (Brit. liquid)
0.5 quarts (liquid)
0.01602 cubic ft
lb of water 27.68 cubic in.
0.1198 gal
quarts (dry) 67.2 cubic in.
Volume (Continued)
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
946.4 cubic centimeters
0.03342 cubic ft
57.75 cubic in.
quarts (liquid) 9.46E-04 cubic meters
1.24E-03 cubic yards
0.25 gal
0.9463 liters
sack 1 cubic ft
tablespoons (metric) 15 milliliter
tablespoons (US) 14.79 milliliter
teaspoons (metric) 5 milliliter
Decimal Decimal
Fraction mm Fraction mm
Equivalent Equivalent
1/64 0.015625 0.397 33/64 0.515625 13.097
1/32 0.031250 0.794 17/32 0.531250 13.494
3/64 0.046875 1.191 35/64 0.546875 13.891
1/16 0.062500 1.588 9/16 0.562500 14.288
5/64 0.078125 1.984 37/64 0.578125 14.684
3/32 0.093750 2.381 19/32 0.593750 15.081
7/64 0.109375 2.778 39/64 0.609375 15.478
1/8 0.125000 3.175 5/8 0.625000 15.875
9/64 0.140625 3.572 41/64 0.640625 16.272
5/32 0.156250 3.969 21/32 0.656250 16.669
11/64 0.171875 4.366 43/64 0.671875 17.066
3/16 0.187500 4.763 11/16 0.687500 17.463
13/64 0.203125 5.159 45/64 0.703125 17.859
7/32 0.218750 5.556 23/32 0.718750 18.256
15/64 0.234375 5.953 47/64 0.734375 18.653
1/4 0.250000 6.350 3/4 0.750000 19.050
17/64 0.265625 6.747 49/64 0.765625 19.447
9/32 0.281250 7.144 25/32 0.781250 19.844
19/64 0.296875 7.541 51/64 0.796875 20.241
5/16 0.312500 7.938 13/16 0.812500 20.638
21/64 0.328125 8.334 53/64 0.828125 21.034
11/32 0.343750 8.731 27/32 0.843750 21.431
23/64 0.359375 9.128 55/64 0.859375 21.828
3/8 0.375000 9.525 7/8 0.875000 22.225
25/64 0.390625 9.922 57/64 0.890625 22.622
13/32 0.406250 10.319 29/32 0.906250 23.019
27/64 0.421875 10.716 59/64 0.921875 23.416
7/16 0.437500 11.113 15/16 0.937500 23.813
29/64 0.453125 11.509 61/64 0.953125 24.209
15/32 0.468750 11.906 31/32 0.968750 24.606
31/64 0.484375 12.303 63/64 0.984375 25.003
1/2 0.500000 12.700 1 1.000000 25.400
Temperature Conversions
5
ºC = (º F - 32) or º F = 9 ׺ C + 32
9 5
K = Kelvin (Absolute Temperature). This scale uses the same size unit as the Celsius scale but the degree
symbol (º) is not used. Since the Kelvin scale starts at zero there can never be a negative Kelvin
temperature.
Fluid Density
Buoyancy Buoyancy Buoyancy
lb/gal kg/m3 Factor
lb/gal kg/m3 Factor
lb/gal kg/m3 Factor
6.0 718.96 0.9083 9.7 1162.32 0.8518 13.5 1617.66 0.7937
6.1 730.94 0.9068 9.8 1174.3 0.8502 13.6 1629.64 0.7922
6.2 742.92 0.9053 9.9 1186.28 0.8487 13.7 1641.62 0.7906
6.3 754.91 0.9037 10 1198.26 0.8472 13.8 1653.6 0.7891
6.4 766.89 0.9022 10.1 1210.25 0.8457 13.9 1665.59 0.7876
6.5 778.87 0.9007 10.2 1222.23 0.8441 14 1677.57 0.7861
6.6 790.85 0.8991 10.3 1234.21 0.8426 14.1 1689.55 0.7845
6.7 802.84 0.8976 10.4 1246.19 0.8411 14.2 1701.53 0.783
6.8 814.82 0.8961 10.5 1258.18 0.8395 14.3 1713.52 0.7815
6.9 826.80 0.8946 10.6 1270.16 0.838 14.4 1725.5 0.78
7.0 838.78 0.8930 10.7 1282.14 0.8365 14.5 1737.48 0.7784
7.1 850.77 0.8915 10.8 1294.13 0.835 14.6 1749.47 0.7769
7.2 862.75 0.8900 10.9 1306.11 0.8334 14.7 1761.45 0.7754
7.3 874.73 0.8884 11 1318.09 0.8319 14.8 1773.43 0.7738
7.4 886.72 0.8869 11.1 1330.07 0.8304 14.9 1785.41 0.7723
7.5 898.70 0.8854 11.2 1342.06 0.8289 15 1797.4 0.7708
7.6 910.68 0.8839 11.3 1354.04 0.8273 15.1 1809.38 0.7693
7.7 922.66 0.8823 11.4 1366.02 0.8258 15.2 1821.36 0.7677
7.8 934.65 0.8808 11.5 1378 0.8243 15.3 1833.34 0.7662
7.9 946.63 0.8793 11.6 1389.99 0.8227 15.4 1845.33 0.7647
8.0 958.61 0.8778 11.7 1401.97 0.8212 15.5 1857.31 0.7631
8.1 970.59 0.8762 11.8 1413.95 0.8197 15.6 1869.29 0.7616
8.2 982.58 0.8747 11.9 1425.93 0.8182 15.7 1881.27 0.7601
8.3 994.56 0.8732 12 1437.92 0.8166 15.8 1893.26 0.7586
8.33 998.15 0.8727 12.1 1449.9 0.8151 15.9 1905.24 0.757
8.4 1006.54 0.8716 12.2 1461.88 0.8136 16 1917.22 0.7555
8.5 1018.52 0.8701 12.3 1473.86 0.812 16.1 1929.21 0.754
8.6 1030.51 0.8686 12.4 1485.85 0.8105 16.2 1941.19 0.7524
8.7 1042.49 0.8671 12.5 1497.83 0.809 16.3 1953.17 0.7509
8.8 1054.47 0.8655 12.6 1509.81 0.8075 16.4 1965.15 0.7494
8.9 1066.45 0.8640 12.7 1521.8 0.8059 16.5 1977.14 0.7479
9.0 1078.44 0.8625 12.8 1533.78 0.8044 16.6 1989.12 0.7463
9.1 1090.42 0.8609 12.9 1545.76 0.8029 16.7 2001.1 0.7448
9.2 1102.40 0.8594 13 1557.74 0.8013 16.8 2013.08 0.7433
9.3 1114.39 0.8579 13.1 1569.73 0.7998 16.9 2025.07 0.7417
9.4 1126.37 0.8564 13.2 1581.71 0.7983 17 2037.05 0.7402
9.5 1138.35 0.8548 13.3 1593.69 0.7968 17.1 2049.03 0.7387
9.6 1150.33 0.8533 13.4 1605.67 0.7952 17.2 2061.01 0.7372
Ultimate Shear
Material Type or Description
Strength (psi)
Yellow Brass 1/2 Hard Rockwell B 70 40,500
Aluminum 2024 - T4 41,000
Naval Brass
1/4 Hard Rockwell B 80 43,000
(Tobin Bronze)
Mild Steel 1018 58,000
Low Fuming Bronze Type RCUZN-C Rockwell B 82 Anaconda welding Rod No. 997 58,000
Low Fuming Bronze Type RCUZN-C Rockwell B 80 Airco welding Rod No. 27 60,000
Drill Rod Oil hardening, polished, annealed - Rockwell C 10 81,000
The above gas law shows that the gas pressure is related to the gas volume.
If gas is not allowed to expand during a kick, then the gas bubble would maintain the bottomhole pressure
(BHP) as it migrated to the surface. This could apply BHP near the surface, which could cause one of the
following
• Underground blowout
• Lost circulation Depth Gas Volume Bubble Pressure
• Surface blowout 10,000 1 5,200
If the gas is allowed to expand as it migrates to surface 5,000 2 2,600
then the volume and pressure relationships are 2,500 4 1,300
demonstrated in the following table. 1,250 8 650
625 16 325
Any units can be applied to the following table but the 312 32 162
pressure assumes 10ppg fluid in the wellbore.
P1 × V1 P2 × V2
=
T1 T2
Pipe Bouyancy
Pipe Buoyancy - when tubulars are run in a well displacing fluid, a buoyancy effect is created on the
tubulars. When the volume of steel in the tubulars displaces the same volume of fluid in the well a
buoyancy effect is created due to the difference in densities between the steel and fluid.
The buoyancy factor can be determined if the density or weight per unit volume of the fluid and solid are
known. The formula is:
B = (Ds - Df) ÷ Ds
Steel has a density of 65.5 lb/gal.To figure pipe weight if the I.D. is dry and the annular is wet, use the
following calculation:
Dry String = Steel weight in air - Displaced fluid weight - Snub force
• To figure pipe weight if the I.D. has a different fluid then the annulus, use the following calculation:
Wet String with different fluids = Steel weight in air - Displaced fluid weight - snub force +
inside fluid weight.
Nozzle Calculations
Flow Rate
Fluid Velocity through a nozzle (ft/sec) =
3.117 × Nozzle Area
Where: Flow Rate in gpm
Nozzle Area in in.2
Useful Formulas
Temperature Conversions
• Temperature Centigrade = 5/9 (Temp. °F - 32)
• Temperature Fahrenheit = 9/5 (Temp. °C) + 32
• Temperature Absolute C = Temp. °C + 273
• Temperature Absolute F = Temp. °F + 460
Velocity
• Feet per minute = 1029.42 (bbl per minute) ÷ (ID in in.)2
• Meter per minute = 1273240 (m3 per minute) ÷ (ID in mm)2
• Feet per second = gal per minute (0.4085) ÷(ID in in.)2
• Meters per second = 76394400 (m3 per minute) ÷ (ID in mm)2
Hydraulics
• Horsepower = work per time = (force × distance) ÷ time
• Heat (BTU / hr) = pressure (psi. across relief) × flow rate (gpm discharge) × 1.4848 work
(foot-lb) = force (lbs) × distance (ft)
• Power = pressure × flow or 1 HP = psi. × gpm ÷ 1713.6
• Hydraulic HP = 0.000584 (gal per minute) × (pressure, psi.)
• Hydraulic HP = 0.02448 (barrels per minute) × (pressure, psi.)
• Hydraulic HP = (barrels per minute) × (pressure, psi.) ÷40.8
• Hydraulic HP = (brake HP) × (efficiency of power train to pump) × (pump efficiency)
Volumes
• Bbl/ft in round tank = (diameter, in ft)2 ÷ 7.14
• Bbl/in. in round tank = (diameter, in ft)2 ÷ 85.7
• Bbl/in. in square tank = 0.0143 × length, ft × width, ft
• Cubic ft per inch in square tank = 0.0833 × length, ft × width, ft
• m3 per M in round tank = 0.7854 × (diameter, in meters)2
• m3 per centimeter in round tank = 0.007854 × (diameter, in meters)2
• m3 per centimeter in square tank = length (m) × width (m) × 0.01
Pipe Displacement
(Metal only w/coupling)
ID
• OD - (2 × wall)
eg. 1.75 - (2 × 0.156) = 1.438 in
Buoyancy Factor
• ( 65.447 - Fluid Weight, lb/gal ) / 65.447
eg. ( 65.447 - 8.33 ) / 65.447 = .873
Pressure Capacity
• 2 × ( wall - 0.005 ) × yield / OD (where 0.005 is the manufacturers tolerance on wall thickness)
eg. 2 × (0.156 - 0.005 ) × 80,000 / 1.75 = 13,806 psi
Time to Displace
• Total volume, bbl ÷ pump rate, bbl/min = minutes
or
• Total volume, gal ÷ pump rate, gal/min = minutes
Hydrostatic Pressure
• Weight, lb/gal × 0.05195 × depth
eg. 9.6 × 0.05195 × 11,200 = 5,591 psi
Bottomhole Pressure
• Wellhead pressure + hydrostatic pressure
eg. 2,200 + ((9.6 × .05195 × 11,200)) = 7785.664 psi
Example:
CT OD = 1.5
CT ID = 1.76
Thermal Gradient, °F / ft
(bottomhole temperature - surface temperature) / depth
• eg. ( 195 - 60 ) / 9800 = 0.00138 °F / ft
– or 0.138 °F / 100 ft
– or 1.38 °F / 1000 ft
Pump Rate
• (Bore2 × 0.7854 × stroke × number of plungers)
eg. 42 × 0.7854 × 8 × 3 = 301.6 in.3
= 301.6 in3 × (1 gal ÷ 231 in.3) × (1 bbl ÷ 42 gal)
= 0.0312 bbl/rev
= 1 ÷ .0312 = 32.05 rev/bbl
• Assume operating range in the 80 to 90% efficiency range
• 32.05 rev/bbl × 85% = 27.2 rev/bbl
• 2 bbl/min × 27.2 rev/bbl = 54.4 strokes/min
Physical Constants
• Viscosity of water at 70ºF = 1 centipoise
• API gravity of water = 10 Deg. API
• Fresh water n' and k' = 1.0 and .00002
• Fresh water weighs 8.33 lb/gal
• 1 ft3 = 7.4805 gal
• Water weighs 8.33 × 7.4805 = 62.312565 lb/ft3
• 1 ft3 = 12 in. × 12 in. × 12 in. = 1,728 in.3
• Pressure = force / area
• 62.312565 lb / 144 in.2 = 0.4327261458 lbf / in.2 / ft or psi/ft
• 0.4327261458 psi/ft / 8.33 lb/gal = .05194791666 (0.05195) thus the constant born 0.052
• 1 bbl = 5.615 ft3 = 42 gal
• 1 gal of liquid (cryogenic) N2 expands to 93.11 SCF
• N2 expands 697 times (more exact: 696.4 times)
Accumulator—A pressure vessel charged with nitrogen gas used to store hydraulic fluid under pressure
for operation of pressure control equipment (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition,
December 1996).
Actuation Test, well control component—The closing and opening of a well control component to
assure mechanical functioning (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Annulus—The annulus is the area between the CT and the well tubulars.
Axial load—Force applied along the length of the CT string. Tension is positive. Compression is
negative.
Axial stress—The axial load at a given point in the CT divided by the cross-sectional area of the CT. The
axial stress is part of the Von Mises Stress.
Azimuth—The azimuth in well survey data is the angle from North, in degrees, of the well axis at a given
point. For example, a section of a well that goes East, has an azimuth of 90 degrees.
-B-
BHA—Bottomhole assembly
Bingham Plastic—Bingham plastic is the model for a fluid which does not flow until a specific yield
point is reached. Cement and some drilling muds are often modeled as Bingham plastics.
Blind rams—The rams in a well control stack which are designed to seal against each other to effectively
close the wellbore when there are no tools or pipe through the well control stack. The blind rams are not
intended to seal against coiled tubing (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December
1996).
Blowout—An uncontrolled flow of pressurized wellbore fluids and/or formation fluids out of the
wellbore or into lower pressured subsurface zones (underground blowout) (as per API Recommended
Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
-C-
Check valve—A valve that allows flow through it in one direction only. This device is installed at the
coiled tubing connector and allows fluid to be circulated down the string but prevents backflow. This
device may be a ball-and-seat type or flapper type (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition,
December 1996).
Choke—A device with either a fixed or a variable aperture used to control the rate of flow of liquids
and/or gas (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Christmas tree—A term applied to the combination of valves and fittings assembled above the top of
the tubing spool on a completed well to contain well pressure and control the flow of hydrocarbons and
other fluids (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Closing ratio—The ratio of the wellhead pressure to the hydraulic actuation pressure required to close
the well control component (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Collapse—Flattening of the coiled tubing due to external pressure or external pressure combined with
either tension or bending (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Continuous taper—Varying wall thickness of a section of CT linearly from one end of the section to the
other.
Critical buckling—The point where a section of CT begins to form a sinusoidal curve in the hole.
Critical bucking does not mean that your tubing cannot go further into the hole. Usually called sinusoidal
buckling.
-D-
Derate—To manually lower the used life of a string to the derating factor. You derate welds and zones.
Derating factor—The amount the used life of a weld or zone is reduced to. For example, a zone with a
derating factor of 85% means that it has 85% of the life it would normally have.
Depth—The distance from the zero depth datum at the top of the well to the point in question. Depth can
be measured from the downhole end of a string, but depth is not related to string position.
Drawdown—The difference between the bottomhole pressure at the reservoir and the reservoir pressure.
The change in pressure causes the fluid in a reservoir to flow into the well. In a killed well, there is no
drawdown because the bottomhole pressure is equal to the reservoir pressure.
-E-
E-line capable—A work reel that is e-line capable has connections for an electrical cable installed inside
the CT string.
Effective wall—The effective wall of a CT string is the minimum wall minus the wall reduction. It
represents the worst case for the actual wall thickness used in tubing life and strength calculations.
Effective well—The effective well is what is used in force and hydraulics calculations. In general, the
effective well follows the innermost tubulars (tubing, casing, liners, and open hole).
-F-
Failure criterion—The point which the fatigue simulator software uses as 100% used life for a string.
Failure can be defined in two ways: as crack initiation, or as fracture. In crack initiation the beginnings
of a crack appears on the CT. In fracture, the crack has propagated through the wall of the CT and the CT
cannot hold pressure.
Foam quality—The ratio of the volume of gas over the total volume of the fluid. Foam with a quality of
1 is all gas. A foam with a quality of 0 is all liquid. Foam quality is dependent on temperature, as
temperature affects the volume of gas.
Freeboard—The distance from the top of the last wrap of coiled tubing to the outside of the flange of
the reel. For safety reasons, the reel is never completely filled with coiled tubing. Some operators
recommend a different freeboard for each coiled tubing diameter. The more freeboard, the less the reel
capacity.
-G-
Gate valve—A valve which employs a sliding gate to open or close the flow passage. The valve may or
may not be full-opening (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Gauge pressure—The pressure indicated by a pressure gauge. (0 psi gauge pressure = atmospheric
pressure) Gauge pressure plus atmospheric pressure equals absolute pressure. Note that it is possible to
have a negative gauge pressure.
-H-
Helical buckling—The point where a section of CT begins to form a helix in the well casing. In a vertical
well, helical buckling begins as soon as any compressive load is applied. The helix introduces additional
bending stresses and friction, which can lead to lockup.
Hoop stress—The stress around the circumference of the CT due to inner and outer pressure. The hoop
stress is part of the Von Mises stress.
-I-
Inclination—The inclination in well survey data is the angle, in degrees, between the well axis and the
vertical axis at a given depth. A vertical section of well has an inclination of 0 degrees. A horizontal
section of well has an inclination of 90 degrees.
-K-
Kill line—A high-pressure line between the pumps and some point below a well control component. This
line allows fluids to be pumped into the well or annulus with the well control component closed (as per
API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
-L-
Lockup depth—The depth, if any, at which the increased drag due to helical buckling causes the
downhole end of the tubing to stop moving into the well, even though tubing may still be entering the
well at the surface. If this occurs, the bottom of the well cannot be reached and the job cannot be
performed with the existing configuration.
-M-
Measured depth—The current depth of the tubing following the trajectory of the well as indicated by
the depth counter at the surface. The actual depth may be slightly less due to buckling. Note that
measured depth is different from True Vertical Depth.
Minimum wall—The minimum wall is the smallest allowable thickness for a given nominal wall
according to the manufacturer's specifications. Although the actual wall thickness will in most cases be
greater, for critical calculation purposes, the minimum wall thickness is used to ensure that a worst-case
scenario is considered.
-N-
Newtonian fluid—Newtonian is the model for fluids exhibiting a linear relationship between shear stress
and shear rate. Few oil field fluids are truly Newtonian, but the Newtonian model is the best known and
easiest to understand. Fresh water can be modeled as a Newtonian fluid.
Nominal wall—The nominal wall is the target wall thickness sold by the manufacturer and commonly
referred to by users. The actual wall size may vary within the plus and minus specifications quoted by
the manufacturer.
-P-
Pipe ram—The rams in a well control stack which are designed to seal around coiled tubing to close and
isolate pressure in the annular space below the rams (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First
Edition, December 1996).
Pipe/slip ram—The rams in a well control stack which are designed to provide the functions of both a
pipe ram and a slip ram in one ram body (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition,
December 1996).
Plug valve—A valve whose mechanism consists of a plug with a hole through it on the same axis as the
direction of fluid flow. Turning the plug 90 degrees opens or closes the valve. The valve may or may not
be full-opening (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Position—Position on a string is the distance measured from the reel core end to the point in question.
The reel core end is at position zero. Position is not related to depth, although depth is measured from the
free end of a string.
Power fluid—Pressurized hydraulic fluid dedicated to the direct operation of functions (as per API
Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Power Law fluid—Power Law is the model for fluids exhibiting a non-linear relationship between shear
stress and shear rate. Many oil field fluids, both water-based muds and hydrocarbons, are modeled using
the Power Law.
Precharge—An initial nitrogen charge in an accumulator which is further compressed when the
hydraulic fluid is pumped into the accumulator storing potential energy (as per API Recommended
Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Pressure Test, well control component—The process of performing an internal pressure test on the
well control component or well control stack (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition,
December 1996).
Primary barrier—The primary barrier is the means which allows the coiled tubing service to be
performed in underbalanced conditions. Since coiled tubing service units are designed to operate with
surface well pressure present, the primary barrier is the stripper packer.
-R-
Radial stress—The stress through the CT wall due to inner and outer pressure. The radial stress is part
of the Von Mises stress.
Reel back tension—The tension maintained at the reel to insure that the tubing on the reel does not
uncoil or become slack. Reel back tension only affects the surface weight calculation, not the downhole
forces, since the tubing is held at the injector.
Regulator (pressure)—A hydraulic device that reduces upstream supply pressure to a desired
(regulated) pressure. It may be manual or remotely operated and, once set, will automatically maintain
the regulated output pressure unless reset to a different pressure.
RTKB—RTKB (rotary table Kelly bushing) is the depth reference typically used by conventional
drilling rigs when they drill a well.
-S-
Secondary barrier—The secondary barrier is the means which provides a contingency for maintaining
well control in the event the primary barrier is unable to function properly. For coiled tubing service units,
the secondary barrier may include additional surface well control components, such as BOPs or kill
weight fluids.
Section—A CT string is divided into sections which have different physical properties, such as different
wall sizes.
Shear ram—The rams in a well control stack which are designed to shear the coiled tubing located
directly across the ram position (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Shear/blind ram—The rams in a well control stack which are designed to provide the functions of both
a shear ram and a blind ram in one ram body (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition,
December 1996).
Shipping spool—A shipping spool is a spool used to hold a CT string for shipping purposes only, and is
not used for a job like a work reel.
Shut-off valve—A valve that closes a hydraulic or pneumatic supply line (as per API Recommended
Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Sinusoidal buckling—The CT snaking back and forth in the form of a sine wave. Also called snake
buckling. Sinusoidal buckling is not critical and does not affect tubing forces calculations.
Sinusoidal buckling load—The compressive axial force at which the CT begins sinusoidal buckling.
Slip ram—The rams in a well control stack which are equipped with tubing slips that, when engaged,
prevent movement of the coiled tubing but do not isolate pressure or control flow (as per API
Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Snubbing—Condition for working coiled tubing through an energized stripper, where wellbore pressure
applied against the cross-sectional area of the tube creates an upward acting force greater than the weight
of the tubing in the wellbore. In this condition mechanical assistance is required to apply thrust to the
tubing while injecting or to maintain control of the tubing when extracting. This condition is commonly
called pipe-light operations (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Stored hydraulic fluid volume—The fluid volume recoverable from the accumulator system between
the maximum designed accumulator operating pressure and the precharge pressure (as per API
Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
String—The makeup of a specific length of coiled tubing used for well intervention (as per API
Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Stripper—A device with a resilient elastomeric element used to effect a seal in the annulus. This device
is used primarily to isolate well pressure from the atmosphere when injecting or extracting the coiled
tubing in pressurized wellbores (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December 1996).
Stripper friction—The frictional force caused by the compression of the stripper packing elements on
the tubing. This friction always acts in the opposite direction of the tubing movement. Although variable,
it is usually assumed to lie in the range of 300 to 1,000 lb of force.
Surface weight—The weight measured at the surface as the CT is run into and out of the well.
System pressure test—The integrity test used to verify the ability of the pipe and pressure containment
equipment in the service to maintain a pressure seal (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First
Edition, December 1996).
-T-
Target depth—Most hydraulics calculations are performed with a particular CT depth in mind. This
depth is the target depth.
Tensile strength—The maximum tensile stresses which a material is capable of sustaining. Tensile
strength is calculated from the maximum load during a tension test carried to rupture and the original
cross-sectional area of the specimen (as per API Recommended Practice 5C7, First Edition, December
1996).
Trip—One trip is the string running into and out of the hole.
True vertical depth—The vertical distance from the surface to a point in the well.
-U-
Used life—Used life of a work string comes from accumulated fatigue and derating. The used life of a
work string is represented by a percentage. A new string has 0% used life. A work string should be retired
or repaired before it reaches too high a used life.
-V-
Von Mises stress—The Von Mises stress ( vm) is a common method for describing the yielding of steel
under combined states of stress. It includes the influences of axial stress ( a), radial stress ( r), and hoop
stress ( h).
σ vm =
1
[(σ a − σ r )2 + (σ a − σ h )2 + (σ r − σ h )2 ]
2
-W-
Wall reduction—The reduction in wall thickness due to exposure to service conditions such as acid jobs
and sand abrasion.
Work reel—A work reel is a reel you use for an actual job, as opposed to a shipping spool, which is only
used for shipping or storage.
Work string—A work string is a CT string which is actively used in coiled tubing operations. When a
work string accumulates too much fatigue, it may be retired and used for other purposes.
-Y-
Yield strength—The stress at which a material exceeds its elastic limits and the material begins to
deform permanently.
-Z-
Zero depth datum—The point from which depth is measured at the wellsite (depth = 0). This may be
the Master Valve, ground level, RTKB, at the reel, or any other user specified position.
Zone—You use zones to flag portions of a CT string and to manually derate fatigue life.
The system uses a capstan wheel inside a high-pressure housing. The cable enters the housing through a
wireline pressure control head. After 6 wraps around the wheel, the cable exits the cable injector housing
and enters the CT. A hydraulic motor drives the capstan wheel which pulls the cable through the pressure
control head. Water pumped at a high flow rate through the CT flushes the cable through. Typical cable
installation rates are 100 to 200 ft/min.
These cable injection systems are skid mounted for ease of transport offshore (Figure 1.2). This allows
lifting a CT string onto a platform without the cable inside, reducing the total weight of lift. The cable
can then be installed before and removed after a job.
The cable feeds off of the wireline spooling unit vertically to a sheave wheel, down to another sheave,
and then to the cable injector (Figure 1.3). This allows the cable spool to rotate around the vertical axis
removing any cable torque before the cable enters the cable injector. When a cable is being removed from
a reel of CT, a levelwind on the cable spooling unit allows the cable to spool neatly on the reel (Figure
1.4).
Example
1 N 32 P P
Number of Electrical Conductors
Armor Package
(Number Inner Wires/Number Outer Wires)
B - 12/24 J - 24/24
C - 18/24 K - 15/15
E - 12/15 L - 12/12
F - 11/15 N - 12/18
G - 10/16 O - other
H - 18/18
P - Propylene Copolymer
T - FEP™*
Z - ETFE (Tetzel)™*
X - Camiane
A - PFA™*
E - PTFE
*Dupont trademark
Wire
Cable No Nom. Min
Nom. Max Break Nom Max
Cable Size Break Wgt Armour Stretch Sheave Nom Res
Dia. Temp Strength Cap Volt
Type (in.) Strength* (lb/kft) Wires Coe Dia. (ohm/kft)
(in.) (°F) (lb) (pf/ft) (DC)
(lb) (In/Out) (ft/kft/klb) (in.)
(In/Out)
1K22PP 7/32 .224 300 5,200 94 15/15 139/280 2.2 14 4.0 60 1000
1K22PZ 7/32 .224 500 5,200 96 15/15 139/280 2.3 14 4.0 69 1000
1N22PP 7/32 .224 300 5,200 94 12/18 212/212 2.5 12 4.1 58 1000
1N22PZ 7/32 .224 500 5,200 96 12/18 212/212 2.6 12 4.1 68 1000
1N32PP 5/16 .322 300 11,000 188 12/18 434/434 1.2 18 2.9 46 1500
1N32PTZ 5/16 .322 500 11,000 192 12/18 434/434 1.3 18 2.9 45 1500
1N29PTZ 9/32 .288 500 9,100 159 12/18 351/351 1.6 16 3.5 55 1500
7H38RP 3/8 .378 300 13,000 240 18/18 300/580 .95 21 9.8 64 1000
7H42RP 7/16 .428 300 18,500 310 18/18 401/750 .80 24 9.8 53 1000
7H42RZ 7/16 .428 500 18,500 319 18/18 401/750 .73 24 9.8 62 1000
7J46RP 15/32 .464 300 18,500 321 24/24 338/535 .82 20 9.8 40 1200
7J46RTZ 15/32 .464 500 18,000 341 24/24 338/535 .82 20 9.8 39 1200
7H47RP Slammer .476 300 22,000 377 18/18 460/910 .61 26 9.8 46 1000
7H47RTZ Slammer .476 500 22,000 392 18/18 460/910 .61 26 9.8 46 1000
*Maximum working tension = 1/2 breaking strength
VannGun™ Assemblies
This information is provided for quick reference only. Important information should be checked for
current validity before use.
O-ring Dimensions
Size *ASA Part Size *ASA Part
OD (in.) ID (in.) Cross-section (in.) No. OD (in.) ID (in.) Cross-section (in.) No.
7/16 5/16 1/16 568-011 3 1/2 3 1/4 1/8 568-236
3/4 5/8 1/16 568-016 3 5/8 3 3/8 1/8 568-237
15/16 13/16 1/16 568-019 3 3/4 3 1/2 1/8 568-238
1 1/16 15/16 1/16 568-021 3 7/8 3 5/8 1/8 568-239
1 1/4 1 1/8 1/16 568-024 4 3 3/4 1/8 568-240
1 7/8 1 3/4 1/16 568-031 4 1/8 3 7/8 1/8 568-241
2 1/2 2 3/8 1/16 568-036 4 1/4 4 1/8 568-242
3 3/8 3 1/4 1/16 568-042 4 3/8 4 1/8 1/8 568-243
9/16 3/8 3/32 568-110 4 1/2 4 1/4 1/8 568-244
1 1/16 1/2 3/32 568-112 4 5/8 4 3/8 1/8 568-245
3/4 9/16 3/32 568-113 4 3/4 4 1/2 1/8 568-246
13/16 5/8 3/32 568-114 4 7/8 4 5/8 1/8 568-247
7/8 1 1/16 3/32 568-115 5 4 3/4 1/8 568-248
15/16 3/4 3/32 568-116 5 1/8 4 7/8 1/8 568-249
2 7/16 2 1/4 3/32 568-140 5 1/4 5 1/8 568-250
2 11/16 2 1/2 3/32 568-144 5 3/8 5 1/8 1/8 568-251
2 3/4 2 9/16 3/32 568-145 5 1/2 5 1/4 1/8 568-252
3 7/16 3 1/4 3/32 568-152 5 5/8 5 3/8 1/8 568-253
1 3/4 1/8 568-210 5 3/4 5 1/2 1/8 568-254
1 1/16 13/16 1/8 568-211 5 7/8 5 5/8 1/8 568-255
1 1/8 7/8 1/8 568-212 6 5 3/4 1/8 568-256
1 3/16 15/16 1/8 568-213 6 1/8 5 7/8 1/8 568-257
1 1/4 1 1/8 568-214 6 1/4 6 1/8 568-258
1 5/16 1 1/16 1/8 568-215 6 1/2 6 1/4 1/8 568-259
1 3/8 1 1/8 1/8 568-216 6 3/4 6 1/2 1/8 568-260
1 7/16 1 3/16 1/8 568-217 7 6 3/4 1/8 568-261
1 1/2 1 1/4 1/8 568-218 7 1/4 7 1/8 568-262
1 9/16 1 5/16 1/8 568-219 7 1/2 7 1/4 1/8 568-263
1 5/8 1 3/8 1/8 568-220 7 3/4 7 1/2 1/8 568-264
1 11/16 1 7/16 1/8 568-221 8 7 3/4 1/8 568-265
1 3/4 1 1/2 1/8 568-222 8 1/4 8 1/8 568-266
1 7/8 1 5/8 1/8 568-223 8 1/2 8 1/4 1/8 568-267
2 1 3/4 1/8 568-224 8 3/4 8 1/2 1/8 568-268
2 1/8 1 7/8 1/8 568-225 9 8 3/4 1/8 568-269
2 1/4 2 1/8 568-226 9 1/4 9 1/8 568-270
2 3/8 2 1/8 1/8 568-227 9 1/2 9 1/4 1/8 568-271
2 1/2 2 1/4 1/8 568-228 9 3/4 9 1/2 1/8 568-272
2 5/8 2 3/8 1/8 568-229 10 9 3/4 1/8 568-273
2 3/4 2 1/2 1/8 568-230 10 1/4 10 1/8 568-274
2 7/8 2 5/8 1/8 568-231 11 1/4 11 1/8 568-276
3 2 3/4 1/8 568-232 1 7/8 1 1/2 3/16 568-325
3 1/8 2 7/8 1/8 568-233 2 1 5/8 3/16 568-326
3 1/4 3 1/8 568-234 2 1/8 1 3/4 3/16 568-327
3 3/8 3 1/8 1/8 568-235 2 1/4 1 7/8 3/16 568-328
*American Standards Association
Volume of nitrogen required is a function of tubing volume. Each barrel of tubing volume requires 1000
scf of nitrogen to displace and dry the pipe. An example would be displacing a reel that has 10 bbls of
fluid. Volume of nitrogen required would be 10 x 1000 = 10,000 scf. Initial rate would be 400 to 1000
scf/min. When nitrogen breaks through decrease the rate to 100 to 400 scf/min. larger size tubing will
require the higher range of rates while smaller tubing will require the lower rate.
Procedure
This procedure should be performed at the wellsite while the CT unit is still connected to the wellhead
and return equipment. If the operation is to be done off site or at the services center, provisions must be
made to safely collect and contain all fluids for disposal. Flow lines connecting the end of the CT to
disposal tanks or pits should be properly secured and should not contain rubber hoses.
Customers are responsible for properly disposing of hazardous materials pumped through the CT. This
includes any material left in the tubing after operations are complete. Halliburton supervisors/operators
should confirm that the customer has the proper fluid or gas on location to purge the CT before moving
off site. If hazardous fluids are to be disposed of off site, all requirements for containment, manifesting
and placards should be met as required by the Department of Transport or other regulatory agencies.
1. Displace the CT with the best available water source. Treat the CT at this time to prevent corro-
sion. (see Best Practices Series "Coiled Tubing and Corrosion").
2. Start pumping nitrogen at higher suggested rates listed (Table 1.1, Page 1-65). Do not exceed
3000 psi.(21.0 mPa / 210 bar) pump pressure.
3. When nitrogen breaks out at the end of the tubing, reduce the nitrogen rate to the lower suggested
rate and pump the remaining volume (Table 1.2, Page 1-66).
Since nitrogen bottles come in many different sizes and pressure ratings the volume of gas that a
particular nitrogen bottle can store can be found using Boyles Law. When temperature is constant the
formula is:
P1 x V1
P1 × V1 = P2 × V2 or V2 =
P2
For example using a common N2 bottle size. How much gas does a 50Liter, 2,400psi bottle hold.
As a guide for purging most of the fluids from a CT string we need to calculate the volume of gas required
based on pressuring up the CT string to 200 psi.
For example, 15,000 ft of 1.5-in. OD, 0.109 wall has a total volume of 24 bbls or 135 ft3. Using the bottles
mentioned above how many bottles are required to purge the fluids from the CT?
Using boyles law again but substituting atmospheric pressure for a CT pressure of 200 psi. We can come
up with the following equation:
P2 x V2
V1 =
P1
If absolutely necessary it is possible to calculate using a CT pressure of 100 psi, but this obviously leaves
more fluid behind.
Good storage, pre-job and post-job tubing maintenance practices are required to minimize CT corrosion
and ensure safe and successful completion of CT services, as well as maximizing service life of the
tubing. Taking the proper steps to minimize corrosion will reduce the probability of unexpected failures
and reduce risk to personnel safety as well as to the customer's well. It should be recognized that different
locations may require different procedures but these basic guidelines and recommendations should be
followed where possible to maximize service life of the CT string. Coiled tubing can be attacked by
corrosion externally and internally, either of which can cause premature and unexpected problems and
failures. For example, exposure of unprotected CT to humid atmospheric conditions will produce iron
oxide (rust) which can interfere with proper functioning of the injector gripper blocks and well head
stripper as well as promote pitting of the CT. Internal pitting corrosion can be due to untreated aqueous
fluids left in the tubing after a job. Taking proper maintenance steps to mitigate corrosion will aid in
performance of consistent and successful CT jobs.
Underutilized pipe can also create unexpected problems if the pipe is not properly protected during
storage. Operations should have realistic inventory plans to insure that there is not excessive tubing in
storage. The longer the tubing sits, the more potential there is for corrosion related problems. In addition
to these guidelines, the operator must be aware of the nature of the downhole conditions and take
precautions where appropriate. For example, if H2S is expected, the use of QT-1000 may be prohibited
or stress cracking inhibitors may be required.
Coiled tubing corrosion considerations that operations should be aware of are described below for
informational purposes. These various forms of corrosion can have several specific detrimental effects
on CT, such as reduced strength, reduced pressure integrity (collapse and burst), reduced fatigue life as
well as an increase in susceptibility to sudden, unexpected premature failures.
General Corrosion
The result of general corrosion is uniform wall thinning of the CT. General corrosion is not a common
mechanism but may occur when galvanic corrosion (see below) is operative downhole.
Pitting Corrosion
Pitting can represent a more severe form of corrosion than uniform metal loss. This is due to extensive
localized loss of wall thickness which compromises the integrity of the entire string. Low pH (acidic) and
higher temperature environments tend to initiate pitting corrosion. Pitting corrosion also occurs in aerated
brines under atmospheric conditions. This type of corrosion is a common form of CT damage and is
particularly insidious because pitting creates stress concentration when the tubing is being worked,
promoting development of fatigue cracking that could quickly lead to a pinhole leak or, worse, complete
tubular failure. Since pitting is difficult to detect, effective inhibition and care of CT is essential.
Galvanic Corrosion
Galvanic corrosion is not usually a problem when CT is used in wells containing low alloy steel
components. However, in corrosive wells, downhole tubulars may be made of duplex stainless steels,
nickel based superalloys or titanium alloys. In contact with an electrolytic fluid, the CT will become the
anode and accelerated corrosion (wall thinning) of the CT may occur. The effects of general corrosion
may be minimized by using chemical inhibition, limiting the exposure time or using thicker wall CT
Sulfur compounds are the major cause of increased corrosion rates in industrial areas. Corrosion will be
accelerated in areas of high humidity and warmer temperatures. Timeof- wetness is also a critical
variable. Wetness is greater inside the wraps than on top. Water which condenses and is trapped within
the tubing wraps as the pipe “breathes” with temperature changes can result in permanent wetness in the
wraps. Condensation also occur inside the CT itself and collect in bottom wraps.
Marine Corrosion
Corrosion of CT occurs through contact with marine salts, primarily sodium chloride but also potassium,
magnesium, calcium and sulfate ions. Chloride salts are hygroscopic and the chloride ion promotes
pitting in CT steels. Once pitting is established, penetration can occur at accelerated rates. It has been
found that steel will corrode 12 times faster when located 80 ft from the coastline than when it is located
800 ft from the coastline, due to the level of marine salts present at the two locations. However, sea salt
can be found a great distances from the sea (often as much as 100 miles inland) and can come down both
as dry dust and in rainfall. Time-of-wetness is a critical variable in determining the level of corrosion and
salt tends to increase time-of-wetness by absorbing water at lower humidity.
Filiform Corrosion
Filiform corrosion is localized corrosion in the form of randomly distributed filaments or streaks of sharp
and long, narrow pits. It can be caused by condensing water solutions containing carbon dioxide,
chlorides, sulfates or sulfides. Warm temperatures usually worsen the situation. Elimination of aqueous
fluids from the tubing ID will eliminate filiform corrosion.
Corrosive fluids
Production Fluids
Production fluids can be corrosive to CT if they contain the acid gases H2S and/or CO2. These gases
lower pH of the aqueous phase. Also, production water containing brines increase the overall corrosivity
of the production fluids. H2S in brine with or without CO2 is more corrosive than H2S in oil. Risk of
corrosion or cracking in dry gas wells containing H2S is low. An expert software (CLI International's
Predict, a program for evaluation and determination of corrosion in steels) is available for use in
predicting the extent of corrosion losses from exposure to reservoir fluids (contact Terry McCoy,
memoid ENGZ101).
Completion Fluids
Brines used in workovers and completions increase in corrosivity as temperature increases and as the
specific gravity of the brine increases. Aerated brines are also more corrosive than deaerated brines.
Acidizing Fluids
Acid corrosion inhibitor systems are designed to protect CT from pitting and unacceptable wall thickness
loss under downhole conditions. However, corrosion inhibitors do not impede the ability of the acid to
dissolve rust. When the acidized tubing is exposed air (oxygen) back on the surface, then the freshly
cleaned surface now has a significantly increased susceptibility to atmospheric corrosion (rusting),
particularly in marine environments. Research has shown that alternate exposure of CT to inhibited acid,
then air, then inhibited acid, etc. can cause corrosion rates to increase by up to 5 to 7 times the corrosion
rate if exposed only to inhibited acid.
Spent Acid
Because of the depletion and/or dilution of acid inhibitors, spent acid can be more corrosive than properly
inhibited live acid. Flowback acid from sandstone reservoirs may not be totally spent. Most of the
corrosion inhibitor may be lost to the tubing or formation leaving highly corrosive acid. Also, corrosion
inhibitors are blends of components, some of which will adsorb in the formation more easily than others.
The result is that the inhibitor composition in flowback fluids may not be the same as that originally
pumped and its effectiveness may be compromised.
In addition, if the well is underbalanced during acidizing operations, inflow of reservoir fluids is possible.
Formation brine may dilute both the acid and the inhibitor concentration. For example, properly inhibited
15% HCl is not as corrosive as 5% HCl with 1/3 the original inhibitor concentration, under most
conditions. Also, the produced reservoir fluid and/or gases (such as H2S) may themselves be quite
corrosive and reduce the effectiveness of normal acid corrosion inhibitors.
Nitrogen
Nitrogen generating units (excluding cryogenic nitrogen) can also generate oxygen which will increase
corrosion downhole. Membrane generated nitrogen typically contains 2% to 6% oxygen at typical
pumping rates. Presence of dissolved oxygen in water is a major factor influencing corrosion rates on CT.
Even at a temperature of 75°F, water equilibrated with air will contain 7 to 8 ppm oxygen and corrosion
rates up to 600 mils per year have been measured under turbulent conditions. The effects of oxygen on
corrosion is magnified by highly erosive environments.
Coiled tubing strength can be reduced by exposure to wet H2S. This occurs when aqueous fluids
containing H2S corrode the tubing. The corrosion reaction releases atomic hydrogen which enters the
steel matrix potentially causing hydrogen embrittlement of the CT. The potential for cracking and related
problems depends on several factors, such as partial pressure of the H2S, duration of exposure,
metallurgy of the CT (chemistry, strength, pre-existing mechanical damage, type of welds, etc.), severity
of applied stresses and condition of tubing.
QT-700 and QT-800 are suitable for H2S service. Due to its higher strength and hardness, QT-1000 is
not usually recommended for sour service as it is more susceptible to hydrogen cracking in wet H2S
environments than QT-700 or QT-800. However, it should be noted that QT-1000 has been used in some
low H2S sour service situations. Also, use of CT with butt welds in wet H2S fluids should be avoided if
possible as butt welds are more susceptible to cracking than bias welds. Also, end connectors which are
designed to induce mechanical damage (dimpling, for instance) cause the CT to be more susceptible to
failure.
When H2S is present in the reservoir, then some judgment must be exercised. For instance, the use of new
(or relatively new) tubing may be in order. Also, chemical inhibition may be required where
underbalanced conditions may exist and inflow of H2S is possible. As an example, in Canada, one
location's general practice is to use an inhibitor whenever H2S concentration is 10% or more and contact
time is over 8 hours. It may also be advisable to use an inhibitor for lower concentrations of H2S,
especially if extended time downhole is a possibility. In these cases, various inhibitors would be used
depending on the type of fluid being pumped. The inhibitor concentrations listed in Table 1.3 would be
circulated from the start of the job to protect tubing OD.
In cases where only nitrogen was being pumped, the inhibitor would be periodically injected into the reel
at rates of 1 to 4 liters/hour. CoilGard (replacement for Crack Chek-97) is an inhibitor that is particularly
effective for preventing corrosion and sulfide stress cracking of high strength carbon steel in sour brine
waters.
Note Never use CoilGard or Crack Chek-97 in acid solutions. SCA-130 inhibitor was
developed for use in acid solutions.
Local conditions must be taken into account when determining the amount of maintenance required to
prevent external CT corrosion while tubing is being stored. In warm climates with high humidity,
damaging corrosion can occur within a short time and can be especially severe near coastal areas. In dry
climates, storage protection requirements may be minimal. Changing conditions during day and night
hasten corrosion when temperature of CT falls below the dew point. Moisture may be trapped for
extended periods between the tubing wraps and if chlorides are present, pitting corrosion will be
accelerated. For long-term storage, it may be necessary to store the CT inside and out of the weather.
Application of a corrosion inhibitor is still recommended if environmental conditions (temperature and
relative humidity) are not controlled and can be damaging. Infrequently used CT is also subject to internal
corrosion and is usually attributed to aqueous solutions remaining is the tubing for extended period of
times.
Covers
Use of weather resistant covers may be helpful in minimizing amount of water and contaminants (such
as chlorides from salt spray at sea or in some coastal areas) that the CT is exposed to and in preventing
previously applied inhibitors from being washed off. Unfortunately, covers can also be detrimental to the
tubing since they act to trap moisture (condensation) and do not let the tubing “breathe,” even if the
bottom of the cover is open. Covers are not the answer to external CT corrosion problems but may be
useful in some limited situations.
Freeze Protection
Although the tubing should be free of water during storage, there is always the possibility of unintended
residual moisture in the tubing string. If the tubing is to be stored at a location where temperature is
expected to drop below the freezing point, then it may be advisable to pump an antifreeze (ethylene
glycol) mixture through the string. Commercially available antifreeze has the added advantage of
containing corrosion inhibitors. See Table 1.4 for expected lowest temperatures and recommended
concentrations in water.
Bedwrap Protection
Initial external protection of the bed wrap tubing is recommended when CT is used in warm, humid
coastal areas. The inhibitors listed in Table 1.5 are recommended in the order of their expected
performance. Other inhibitors may be satisfactory.
Note No Halliburton part numbers have been assigned to these products but may be
assigned in the future if usage warrants.
On storage or shipping reels, the inhibitor could be applied when the tubing is spooled onto the working
reel. Quality Tubing expects that Rust Ban 343 is a suitable inhibitor to protect CT during shipments to
North America locations with expectations that tubing would not be stored over 30 days. VCI-386 is
thought to be suitable for export shipments. No significant loss in injector force capabilities is expected
when using the above inhibitors; however, it should be cautioned that no field trials have been conducted
at this time on the Isotrol/Isoguard or VCI-381. Rust Ban 343 has a proven field record for internal
storage conditions. To date, only lab tests have been run on the other inhibitors.
Tubing OD Protection
When required (also see paragraph 6), apply a corrosion inhibitor to the tubing OD after each job.
Inhibitor should be applied to the tubing by wiping to ensure complete coverage of the tubing.
Recommended corrosion inhibitors are shown in Table 1.6 in the order of their expected performance.
Other inhibitors may be satisfactory. The tubing should be as clean as possible for maximum
effectiveness of the inhibitor.
Note No Halliburton part numbers have been assigned to these products, but numbers may
be assigned in the future if usage warrants.
Note Wireline Spray 782 is the only environmentally friendly, completely biodegradable
corrosion inhibitor listed in Table 1.6. Corrosion testing seemed to indicate that the
inhibitor would perform well for a few weeks then performance would decrease at a
more rapid rate with time.
Tubing ID Protection
• Option 1—Use dry nitrogen to displace specific volume of 10% CT-Armor (1 part CT-Armor and 9
parts fresh water) through the tubing to achieve a 3-mil coating thickness. Inhibitor should be
pumped behind wiper ball(s) if another fluid is being displaced (see note 1). The solution must be
continually mixed as the fluid is pumped into the tubing as CT-Armor is water dispersible but not
water soluble. See Table 1.8 (Page 1-79) for the recommended volume of inhibitor needed to coat
the tubing ID.
Seal ends of tubing to prevent loss of inhibitor or air ingression (see Note 2, Page 1-76).
• Option 2—Pump fresh water that has been adjusted to a pH 8 to 9 using sodium bicarbonate and that
is also treated with 0.2% Anhib II (HES Part No. 516.00854). Displacing volume should be a
minimum of 2 times tubing volume. If chlorides are to be removed, then displacing volume should
be 5 times tubing volume. Proper mixing is required to insure that Anhib II is well dispersed in the
fluid.
Purge with nitrogen until dry and seal ends (see Notes 2 and 3, Page 1-76).
• Option 3—Fill tubing with diesel fuel. A good grade of diesel fuel (such as No. 2 automotive diesel)
should be used to avoid possibility of water contamination. If residual water is in the tubing prior to
filling with diesel, it may get mixed in with the diesel (causing a cloudy appearance) and will separate
out in the tubing causing corrosion to occur. If diesel fuel is used, it is recommended that at least one
(1) quart of API 30 wt. motor oil be used per 100 gal of diesel. The oil has alkalinity as well as
corrosion inhibitors that will help protect the CT.
Note 1 Wiper Balls—Whenever displacing tubing containing fluid(s), a tight polyurethane
wiper ball or dart should precede the pumped fluid. The wiper ball aids in the
effectiveness of its “chaser” by (1) separating the different fluids preventing
intermixing, and (2) wiping the tubing walls from the preceding fluid. If gas is being
used to push a fluid through the CT, use at least 2 wiper balls. Table 1.7 provides
guidelines for choosing the proper size wiper ball.
Wiper balls can be purchased from Laser Plastics, 903 Hodgkins, Suite #103, Houston, TX. 77032 (Tel:
281-590-0566; Fax: 281-590-8174). If standard wiper balls are not available, a tightly made wad of foam
rubber (seat-cushion type material) may be used.
Note 2 Sealing Ends of Pipe—When using nitrogen in tubing to prevent corrosion, the ends
of the tubing must be sealed such that a slight positive pressure (say, 5 to 10 psig) is
maintained to prevent air ingression. For information purposes, Quality Tubing’s
present procedure is to place a Drilltec thread protector on the male half of 1502
fittings on all nitrogen purged strings. On the free end, a plastic or metal cap is placed
on the tubing and taped. Quality Tubing also offers a system to install a ball valve on
each end of tubing with a pressure gauge to monitor internal pressure. This systems
requires fittings on both ends of tubing.
Note 3 Purging Water from Coiled Tubing with Nitrogen—Displacement of fluids, such as
water from a coil tubing reel after a job, is critical to the life of the pipe and the safe
operation of the unit. In general, displacement with nitrogen to remove water takes
two steps.
(1) Remove the free water. This is accomplished by pumping nitrogen at a high rate
to mobilize and remove all free water. Use of wiper balls to remove the water is
recommended (see Note 1, Page 1-75).
(2) Dry the film of fluid that remains. Drying works best at low pressure. This means
pumping as slow as possible to keep the friction pressure down. Volume of nitrogen
required is a function of tubing volume. Each barrel of tubing volume requires 1,000
scf of nitrogen to displace and dry the pipe.
Pre-Job Guidelines
If unsure of the condition of the tubing ID, flush coil tubing with fresh water. If the water in the exit
stream is clear, then the coiled tubing ID probably has been sufficiently protected during previous storage
and no further fluid maintenance work is required. If significant rust is present in the initial portion of the
exit stream then the condition of the tubing ID should be questioned. If necessary, the ID can be pickling
with 5 % HCl + 0.1 % HAI-81M + 2 % Ferchek.
Post-Job Guidelines
Tubing OD
Tubing ID
This section covers treating options for tubing ID following its use with the following types of fluids:
acid, workover/completion fluids, and H2S.
Acid
After acid jobs, the tubing should be treated as per one of the options listed below. Research indicates
that CT does not undergo excessive corrosion when exposed to properly inhibited acid being pumped
at treatment velocities. However, laboratory tests on tubing exposed to inhibited acid and air indicate
that oxygen is a secondary corrosive agent and can cause corrosion rates to increase 5 to 7 times that
in acid alone. Aeration occurs between jobs so it is important that the tubing be cleaned and protected
with a corrosion inhibitor as soon as possible after an acid job.
– Option 1
1. Flush with fresh water (or seawater when necessary). Continue flush until pH of exit stream
is approximately 7.
2. Displace with water adjusted to pH 8 to 9 using 1% K-34 (sodium bicarbonate, HES Part No.
70.15186) and 0.20% Anhib II (HES Part No. 516.00854).
3. Purge with nitrogen (see Note 3, Page 1-76) until tubing is dry, then seal ends.
– Option 2
1. Neutralize/flush acid remaining in tubing using 1% K-34 (sodium bicarbonate, HES Part No.
70.15186).
2. Flush with fresh water.
3. Displace fresh water with 10% CT-Armor. Use dry nitrogen to push the inhibitor mixture
through the tubing. See Table 1.8 (Page 1-79) for recommended volumes for specific tubing
sizes.
4. Seal ends of tubing to prevent inhibitor loss or air ingression.
– Option 3, MB TechServ
This is a specialized process used by Quality Tubing’s service center in Aberdeen. This process
has not been utilized in other locations. For further information, contact MB TechServ at
44-1224-879696.
1. Flush—Remove debris, acid, brine, etc. by flushing CT with fresh water (onshore) or seawa-
ter (offshore) immediately after use. If available, purge with nitrogen to displace excess
water.
2. Clean (onshore)—Flush with fresh water to remove seawater and any corrosive contami-
nants. Pig with wiper ball(s) and purge with nitrogen to remove residual water.
3. Dry (onshore)—Connect MBT injection unit (see note below) with 120 psi compressed and
filtered air supply to the CT. Establish constant flow of dry air through coil to remove resid-
ual moisture. Allow coil to depressurize fully to atmosphere.
4. Preserve (onshore)—Charge MBT with VCI 609 powder. Release charge to the CT until fog
emission is detected. Allow coil to depressurize fully then seal ends.
– Option 1
1. Flush with fresh water.
2. Displace with water adjusted to pH 8 to 9 using 1% K-34 (sodium bicarbonate, HES part
number 70.15186) and 0.20% Anhib II (HES part number 516.00854).
3. Purge with nitrogen until tubing is dry, then seal ends.
– Option 2
1. Flush with fresh water.
2. Displace fresh water with 10% CT-Armor. Use dry nitrogen to push the inhibitor mixture
through the tubing. See Table 1.8 (Page 1-79) for recommended volumes for specific tubing
sizes.
3. Seal ends of tubing to prevent inhibitor loss or air ingression.
– Option 3, MB TechServ
See “Option 3, MB TechServ” on Page 1-77.
H2 S
If the tubing contains iron sulfide scale, pickling with 5% HCl + 0.40 - 2.0% SCA-130 (concentration
of SCA-130 dependent on the amount of FeS in the tubing) may be necessary to clean the tubing.
Tubing being used daily in non-corrosive service (considering both atmospheric as well as downhole and
pumped fluids) probably does not need to be treated daily with corrosion inhibitors.
Tubing stored or not expected to be used for 1 week or longer should be suitably protected on the ID and
OD.
Tubing used in acid service should be treated immediately upon job completion.
References
PermaStopRust (America), Inc. Exxon Company USA
2911 Dixwell Avenue P.O. Box 2180
Hamden, CT 06518 Houston, TX 77252-2180
Tel: (800) 611-7713 Tel: (713) 656-5949
(203) 287-3700
Fax: (203) 407-3840
i
ii
Section 2
The Pipe Body Yield Load is defined as the axial tension load (in the absence of pressures or torque) that
produces a stress in the tube equal to the specified minimum yield strength (SMYS) in tension;
Fy = p × (D - t) × t × SMYS
Where:
Inside Diameter is equal to the CT OD, minus twice the specified WT:
d = D - 2t in.
Aw = π (D - t) t in.2
The Weight per foot of CT length is calculated by specified OD, specified WT, and applying steel density
of 0.2833 lb/in3
W =10.68 (D - t) t lb/ft
Internal Volume Capacity of 1,000 ft long non-tapered CT string (at constant WT and OD) is defined as
Internal Volume Capacity of 1,000 ft long tru-tapered CT segment is defined as the volume of a frustum
cone
0.9714262 2
Vi = (d1 + d1d 2 + d 2 ) bbl/1,000 ft
3
External Volume Capacity of 1,000 ft long CT string is defined as a volume for 1000 ft long solid
cylinder with diameter D
Vo = 5.45415 D2 ft3/1,000 ft
Vo = 40.7999 D2 gal/1,000 ft
Vo = 0.971426 D2 bbl/1,000 ft
where D = CT OD in in.
V = Vo - Vi
Yield Pressure, Load, and Torque Capacities and CP are defined using:
Yield Internal Pressure Capacity is a pressure, Py, which induces combined stress on inner surface of
the CT equal to the specified minimum yield strength, σy. It is assumed that the pressure does not produce
axial tensile load (“open end” tubing).
σy
Py =
2
4M − 2M + 1
Yield Load Capacity is an axial force, Fy, which induces a stress in the CT cross-section equal to the
specified minimum yield strength, σy
Yield Torque Capacity is the torque, Ty, which produces shear stress on the CT outer surface equal to
the specified minimum yield strength in shear,
Ty = σy /√3
CP is a function of CT ovality (Ov = (Dmax - Dmin)/D), applied internal pressure, Pi, applied axial force,
F, and D/t-ratio. The condition of the CT in service cannot be considered as "perfectly round". Therefore,
CT should always be considered as oval, with minimum ovality of 0.02 (2%).
CP for CT with ovality Ov = 0 (round tubing), = 0.02, and = 0.05 is in the Coiled Tubing Collapse
Pressures Table for various CT sizes and material grades. For ovalilty 2% and 5% CP is tabulated at zero
axial force (Fa = 0) and at axial force equal to one half of yield load capacity (Fa = Fy / 2).
In general, if external pressure is combined with internal pressure, Pi, and/ or with axial force, F, and CT
ovality is other than in the Coiled Tubing Collapse Pressures Table, then CP should be calculated using
formulas
Pco = 2
g− g −f
where
σ y Ky Pce
g= + ( 2 + 3 • α • Ov )
4M 4
σ y K y Pce
f=
2M
The stretch or elongation of oil well tubular material resulting from an applied pulling force is a
commonly required determination. Robert Hooke (1635-1702) discovered the law (Hooke’s law) that
strain or distortion is proportional to stress or force if the elastic limit of the material is not exceeded.
(The elastic limit of the material is the maximum stress that can be developed within it without causing
permanent deformation or permanent stretch in oil field terms.)
The amount of stretch that will occur when a pull force is applied varies with the amount of pull, the
length of the material being stretched, the elasticity of the material and its cross-sectional area, provided
the elastic limit is not exceeded.
Note It is a common misconception that the amount of stretch for oilfield tubular material
is affected by the grade of steel (J-55, N-80, etc.). This is not true because the modulus
of elasticity remains the same.
Higher grades of steel have greater elastic limits and can therefore be stretched farther before reaching
their elastic limits than can the lower grades. The only factors that affect the amount of stretch are those
shown in the preceding general stretch formula.
Example:
15,000 ft of 1.50-in. × .095-in. coiled tubing with 20,000 lb overpull would stretch how many inches?
20,000 lb × 180,000 in.
S =
0.419 sq in × 30,000,000 psi
= 286 in.
Collapse Pressure
The collapse pressure in the absence of axial stress, P, for new, as manufactured coiled tubing is
calculated using the appropriate formula of API Bul 5C3 for Yield Strength, Plastic or Transition
Collapse pressure, but using the specified wall thickness (t).
For coiled tubing in service, the condition of the tube cannot be considered perfectly round.. Coiled
tubing should always be considered as oval, with a minimum ovality of 0.02 (2%). For standard coiled
tubing sizes and material grades, collapse pressures at ovalities of 0.02 and 0.05 are calculated and listed
in the following tables. When actual ovality is other than 0.02 or 0.05, these equations should be used.
Input:
Evaluation:
α =
DD α = 14.519 Ratio
tt
M = α2 M = 3.898 CT constant
4 × (α −1)
2 ⋅ M ⋅ Pi ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ Pi ⎞⎟ 2
1 F Pi ⎟
− ⋅ ⎜⎜
3 ⎜ F
Ky = + + 1 − ⋅ +
σy 2 ⎜ Fy σ y ⎟⎟ 4 ⎜⎜ Fy σ y ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
⎛
⎜
⎞
Pce = 0 .7125 ⎜
C ⎟ +P
⎜ 2 ⎟ i
⎝ σ ⋅ (σ −1) ⎠
σy ⋅K y
Pyo =
2⋅ M
σy ⋅K y
g = + (2 + 3 × Ov × α) Pce
4⋅ M 4
g = 30231 Factor
σ y ⋅ K y ⋅ Pce
f =
2⋅ M
f = 153161456 Factor
Pco = g - 2
g −f
Nomenclature
DD = D + 0.01 in.
d = D - 2t
d1 = D - 2t1
d2 = D - 2t2
f = σ y K y Pce
2M
g = σy Ky P
+ (2 + 3⋅ α ⋅ Ov) ⋅ ce
4M 4
⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
P 3 ⎜ F Pi ⎟ 2 1 ⎜ F Pi ⎟
K y = 2M i + SF 2 − ⎜ + − +
σy 4 ⎜ Fy σ y ⎟⎟ 2 ⎜⎜ Fy σ y ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
M CT factor, defined as
2
M= α
4 (α −1)
Ov CT ovality,
Pco = g - 2
g −f
Pyo = σ y K y
2M
Fy = σy π(DD - tt) tt
tt = t-0.005 in.
V=Vo-Vi
W CT weight, lb/ft
W = 10.68 (D - t) t lb/ft
Abbreviations
CT - coiled tubing
CP - collapse pressure
ID - inside diameter
OD - outside diameter
WT - wall thickness
UF - utilization factor
References
1. American Petroleum Institute, BULLETIN ON FORMULAS AND CALCULATIONS FOR
CASING, TUBING, DRILLPIPE AND LINE PIPE PROPERTIES. API Bulletin 5C3, Sixth
Edition, October 1, 1994; 47 [CONTAINS ISO 10400:1993, PETROLEUM AND NATURAL
GAS INDUSTRIES - FORMULAE AND CALCULATIONS FOR CASING, TUBING, DRILL
PIPE, AND LINE PIPE PROPERTIES]
2. Timoshenko, S. STRENGTH OF MATERIALS. PART II - ADVANCED THEORY AND
PROBLEMS. 2nd Ed., N.Y., Van Nostrand, 1954; 510
3. Timoshenko, S. WORKING STRESSES FOR COLOMNS AND THIN-WALLED STRUC-
TURES. Trans. ASME, Applied Mechanics, Vol. 1, 1993; 173-183
4. Avakov, V. and Fowler, H. COMPUTING COLLAPSE PRESSURE FOR COILED TUBING.
SPE 36340, 1st North American Coiled Tubing Roundtable, Proceedings; Montgomery, TX;
SPE/ICoTA, 1996; 7
5. Avakov, V.A. EQUATIONS SHORTEN PIPE COLLAPSE CALCULATIONS. Oil & Gas
Journal, Vol. 93, NO. 15, Apr. 10, 1995; 53-55
6. Avakov, V.A. and Taliaferro, W. EQUATIONS DETERMINE COILED TUBING COLLAPSE
PRESSURE. Oil & Gas Journal, Vol. 93, No. 390, July 24, 19095; 36-39.
(D max - D min )
Ovality =
D
The actual calculated stress factor at any time for any part of the coiled tubing string should never exceed
the maximum allowable stress factor.
The maximum allowable stress factor is dependant solely on the amount of fatigue (utilisation) on the
coiled tubing string at the point in question. Table 2.1 shows the maximum allowable stress factor for
different amounts of fatigue.
Note The decrease in maximum allowable stress factor is due to the Baushinger effect that
causes the coiled tubing to lose strength as it work-softens.
The relationship between tubing utilization and maximum allowable stress factor is determined from the
following equation where UF is the tubing utilization entered as a fraction and not a percentage.
1.5
SFmax = 0.8 × 0.8 UF
Using the procedure below, the actual stress factor in the CT sections under various combined loading
conditions can be evaluated. Common load combinations and stress factor expressions are listed in the
following table. The load combinations include:
• Internal pressure acting simultaneously with tensile load or with drilling torque.
Condition against yielding should be evaluated.
• External pressure is acting simultaneously with tensile load or compressive load.
Resistance against collapse should be evaluated.
When internal pressure and external pressure are acting simultaneously, then equivalent pressure, P,
should be used as it is explained below for two design occasions:
1. Internal pressure, Pi, is dominating pressure, and Pi is greater than outside pressure, Po. Then,
equivalent internal pressure is the differential pressure, P=Pi-Po.
2. If external pressure is greater than internal pressure and CT collapse might take place, then
equivalent external pressure P=Po-0.8Pi should be used. The external equivalent pressure is
NOT a differential pressure but higher than arithmetic difference.
The stress factor expressions in Table 2.2 (Page 2-13) could be resolved for maximum allowable internal
pressure, external pressure, hoisting load or torque when other loading components and maximum
allowable stress factor are known.
The procedure is applicable to steel CT of any size, including tapered strings. Calculation results are
applicable for operations with either open end or closed end CT.
CT yield capacities (load Fy, pressure Py, torque Ty) are listed in tables within this handbook. The data is
listed for all CT sizes and strengths currently available.
CT collapse pressure data is also listed in these tables and is shown in five separate columns. These
collapse pressures are defined for:
• Perfectly round CT without any axial load (Fa=0) as it is prescribed by API Bul 5C3
• Oval CT with ovality (Dmax-Dmin)/D=0.02 (2%) when axial load is not applied (Fa=0).
• Oval CT with ovality of 2% when axial load is applied, and it is a half of the yield load capacity
(Fa=Fy/2).
• Oval CT with ovality of 5% when axial load is not applied (Fa=0).
• Oval CT with ovality of 5% when axial load is applied, and it is a half of the yield load capacity
(Fa=Fy/2).
For any operations it is recommended to use CT collapse pressure at ovality no less than 2%. If external
pressure is high and collapse is in question during an oncoming job then make measurements of
maximum and minimum diameters in two or three sections in the vicinity of the working area. Make SF
evaluation by this procedure using maximum measured ovality.
If measured ovality is less than or equal to 0.02, then use ovality of 2% and Collapse Pressure from the
tables corresponding to this. If measured ovality is higher than 0.02 but less than 0.05 then use the
collapse pressure from the column titled Ovality = 5%.
If ovality is greater than 5% or more accuracy is required then the collapse pressure should be calculated
using the method outlined earlier in this section or by using the applicable spreadsheet or software.
When all loading conditions are present, the Actual Stress Factor is defined as follows:
SF = K
⎛F K +P A −P A
⎜ ov o o i i
2 2 ⎛ 2
⎡ ( )
⎟ + ⎛⎜ Pi − Po ⎞⎟ + ⎜ T ⎟ + ⎢ H Pe Pe α (α − 1) ⎥
⎞ ⎞ ⎤2
(1)
OV ⎜⎜ Fy ⎟⎟ ⎜ P ⎟ ⎜⎜ T ⎟⎟ ⎢
C ⎥
⎝ ⎠ ⎝ max ⎠ ⎝ y⎠ ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥
α − 2 psi
Pe = Po − Pi
α
and H(Pe) is Heaviside step function, it returns 1 if Pe ≥ 0, otherwise, returns 0. That is, only positive
values of the excess pressure will be taken into the account, otherwise, the last term of Eq. 1 disappears.
where Ke is collapse factor, shown in the chart at the end of this section. The graph is plotted at arbitrary
defined location and scale parameters L=S=500 psi.
Ovality factor:
K OV = 1 + 1.5 ⋅ α ⋅ Ov ⋅ K e
Nomenclature:
In all equations/evaluations, CT capacities are defined using production maximum OD and production
minimum WT.
2E
C- material elastic constant, C = = 58,810,460
1 − μ2
α- D/t - ratio
parameter, M =
Ao α2
M- =
At 4(α − 1)
2
Ao - OD cross-section area, A = πD
o 4
A
At - wall cross-section area, A = π t (D − t ) = o
t M
L- location parameter to proper define collapsing condition, L=500 psi is used in this
procedure
F- axial load in CT body; for closed-end CT it is load that can be detected by load cell
plus pump pressure times ID cross-section area at section of evaluation. For
open-end CT it is a load that can be detected by load cell at specified location.
σy
Pmax - maximum pressure capacity,
Pmax =
M 3
S- scale parameter to define collapsing condition, S=500 psi is used in this procedure
Catastrophic Buckling
It is possible for catastrophic buckling of the CT to occur in the unsupported length between the bottom
of the injector chains and the top of the stripper when snubbing into a well as shown in Figure 2.3.
The Catastrophic Buckling tables are used to calculate the amount of axial compressive load that can
safely be applied to the CT in this unsupported length.
1. Measure the unsupported length, defined as the vertical length from the top of the stripper guide
to the centerline of the lower chain sprockets.
2. Look up the value from the table in the appropriate unsupported length column for the CT size
of interest.
3. Multiply the value from the table by the yield strength of the CT material. For the English units
table the yield strength must be in psi. For the Metric units table the yield strength must be in
MPa. The result is the maximum safe axial compressive load (including a 50% safety factor) in
the unsupported section in lb for the English units and Newtons for the Metric table.
Example
The unsupported length is 14 in. for 1.5-in. diameter, 0.109-in. wall CT with a yield strength of 80,000
psi. The value from the English units table is 0.1381. 80,000 × 0.1381 = 11,048 lb.
In Metric the unsupported length is 350 mm for 38.10-mm diameter, 2.77 mm-wall CT with a yield
strength of 552 MPa. The value from the Metric units table is 90.3. 552 × 90.3 = 49,845 Newtons.
Equations
1
rg = r 2 + ri 2
2 o
ξ = L/rg
Pb A
=
σ y 1+ (0.03ξ02
Nomenclature
Pb = buckling load
ζ = slenderness ratio
References
Newman, K., Aasen, J.: "Catastrophic Buckling of Coiled Tubing in the Injector," SPE 46007,
SPE/ICoTA Coiled Tubing Roundtable, Houston, Texas, 15-16 April 1998.
• CT diameter
• CT material
• CT wall thickness
• pressure in the CT while it is being bent
• welds in the CT
• radius of bending at the reel
• radius of bending at the guide arch
• tension in the CT while bending
• rotation of the CT between bends
• CT surface finish, internal and external
• previous fatigue history
Calculating the fatigue life is very complex, and thus must be done with computer modeling.
Three major “fatigue models” have been developed to determine the fatigue life of CT.
The model developed by Tipton is used in the CTES Cerberus™ (non-Halliburton) software and the
Schlumberger Dowell software. The Avakov model is used in the CTES Cerberus™ (Halliburton),
Maurer and Medco software. The BJ/Nowsco model is exclusive to BJ.
This section includes a series of graphs produced using the Avakov model in the CTES Cerberus™
(Halliburton) software. These graphs show the number of “trips” to “failure.” In a trip, the section of CT
of interest experiences the 3 bending and 3 unbending events listed above.
These graphs provide a qualitative understanding of the fatigue life and how it varies as the various
parameters are varied. In actual field operations, the pressure is not constant for the entire life of the CT.
Thus these graphs cannot be used to determine the actual life of a section of CT used in the field. The
computer models must be used to determine the actual fatigue life.
All these graphs assume a 95% reliability factor and it is important to note that no safety factor
(application factor = 1) has been included in these graphs.
The application factor is simply a safety factor applied to fatigue calculations only. eg. a coiled tubing
string with an AF = 2 will show twice as much fatigue as one with an AF = 1. In operations, an AF
between 1.6 and 2.5 can be estimated using a spreadsheet that takes into account factors such as string
management practices, typical string life, corrosion protection practice, associated risk, and string length.
More information regarding application factors can be found in the Data Acquisition Section of this
handbook.
All fatigue calculations have been calculated using CTES Cerberus™ (Halliburton Version) Fatigue
Calculator Version 7.0.003.
Grade 80
Coiled Tubing Performance Data, Grade 80
80,000 psi Yield Strength - English Units
Specified Nominal Collapse Pressure
Yield Yield Yield
Wall Ovality = 0% Ovality = 2% Ovality = 5%
OD Load Pressure Torque
Thickness Fy (lb) Py (psi) Ty (ft-lb) Fa = 0 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2
D (in.)
t (in.) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
1.000 0.087 19,130 12,770 395 11,935 7,937 5,360 5,585 3,778
1.000 0.095 20,810 13,970 424 12,987 9,051 6,057 6,480 4,351
1.000 0.102 22,260 15,010 447 13,891 10,002 6,656 7,269 4,856
1.000 0.109 23,680 16,040 469 14,779 10,934 7,245 8,059 5,362
1.250 0.080 22,340 9,440 601 8,957 4,770 3,387 3,232 2,262
1.250 0.087 24,280 10,300 646 9,735 5,593 3,901 3,815 2,640
1.250 0.095 26,460 11,280 696 10,612 6,528 4,482 4,501 3,082
1.250 0.102 28,350 12,130 737 11,369 7,335 4,984 5,115 3,476
1.250 0.109 30,220 12,980 777 12,116 8,129 5,480 5,737 3,875
1.250 0.118 32,570 14,060 826 13,062 9,130 6,107 6,545 4,393
1.250 0.125 34,380 14,890 863 13,787 9,893 6,588 7,178 4,798
1.250 0.134 36,670 15,950 907 14,704 10,855 7,195 7,992 5,319
1.250 0.145 39,410 17,230 959 15,802 12,003 7,924 8,986 5,956
1.250 0.156 42,090 18,490 1,007 16,877 13,120 8,636 9,975 6,591
1.250 0.175 46,570 20,610 1,082 18,675 14,984 9,830 11,662 7,675
1.500 0.095 32,120 9,450 1,036 8,968 4,782 3,395 3,240 2,268
1.500 0.102 34,450 10,170 1,101 9,618 5,469 3,823 3,725 2,582
1.500 0.109 36,750 10,890 1,164 10,261 6,153 4,249 4,223 2,903
1.500 0.118 39,670 11,800 1,242 11,077 7,024 4,790 4,876 3,323
1.500 0.125 41,920 12,510 1,300 11,705 7,692 5,206 5,392 3,654
1.500 0.134 44,770 13,420 1,372 12,501 8,537 5,735 6,063 4,084
1.500 0.145 48,200 14,510 1,456 13,459 9,548 6,370 6,890 4,614
1.500 0.156 51,570 15,600 1,536 14,400 10,537 6,994 7,720 5,145
1.500 0.175 57,250 17,440 1,664 15,985 12,193 8,045 9,153 6,063
1.500 0.188 61,030 18,680 1,745 17,041 13,290 8,745 10,127 6,688
1.500 0.203 65,290 20,080 1,831 18,229 14,523 9,534 11,240 7,404
1.750 0.109 43,280 9,370 1,629 8,896 4,706 3,347 3,188 2,233
1.750 0.118 46,770 10,170 1,742 9,613 5,464 3,820 3,722 2,580
1.750 0.125 49,460 10,780 1,828 10,165 6,051 4,185 4,148 2,855
1.750 0.134 52,880 11,570 1,935 10,868 6,800 4,651 4,706 3,214
1.750 0.145 57,000 12,520 2,060 11,715 7,703 5,213 5,401 3,660
1.750 0.156 61,060 13,470 2,180 12,550 8,588 5,767 6,105 4,111
1.750 0.175 67,930 15,090 2,374 13,962 10,077 6,704 7,332 4,896
1.750 0.188 72,530 16,180 2,499 14,907 11,067 7,330 8,174 5,436
1.750 0.203 77,730 17,430 2,634 15,975 12,182 8,038 9,144 6,057
2.000 0.109 49,820 8,220 2,173 7,850 3,629 2,666 2,457 1,755
2.000 0.118 53,870 8,920 2,329 8,489 4,282 3,081 2,897 2,043
2.000 0.125 57,000 9,470 2,447 8,982 4,796 3,404 3,251 2,274
2.000 0.134 60,980 10,160 2,595 9,610 5,460 3,818 3,719 2,578
2.000 0.145 65,800 11,010 2,769 10,368 6,267 4,320 4,307 2,957
2.000 0.156 70,550 11,850 2,937 11,117 7,066 4,816 4,908 3,344
2.000 0.175 78,620 13,290 3,213 12,388 8,417 5,660 5,967 4,022
Grade 90
Grade 100
Coiled Tubing Performance Data, Grade 100
100,000 psi Yield Strength - English Units
Specified Nominal Collapse Pressure
Yield Yield Yield
Wall Ovality = 0% Ovality = 2% Ovality = 5%
OD Load Pressure Torque
Thickness Fy (lb) Py (psi) Ty (ft-lb) Fa = 0 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2
D (in.)
t (in.) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
1.000 0.087 23,910 15,970 494 14,919 9,647 6,591 6,792 4,640
1.000 0.095 26,010 17,460 529 16,234 11,078 7,479 7,922 5,363
1.000 0.102 27,820 18,760 559 17,363 12,298 8,240 8,919 5,999
1.000 0.109 29,600 20,040 586 18,473 13,489 8,986 9,918 6,637
1.250 0.08 27,920 11,800 752 11,196 5,584 4,070 3,838 2,735
1.250 0.087 30,350 12,880 808 12,169 6,633 4,727 4,565 3,208
1.250 0.095 33,080 14,100 870 13,265 7,833 5,470 5,426 3,764
1.250 0.102 35,440 15,170 922 14,212 8,871 6,111 6,199 4,260
1.250 0.109 37,770 16,220 971 15,145 9,894 6,744 6,984 4,763
1.250 0.118 40,720 17,570 1,033 16,328 11,180 7,542 8,005 5,416
1.250 0.125 42,980 18,610 1,078 17,234 12,159 8,152 8,804 5,926
1.250 0.134 45,840 19,940 1,134 18,380 13,389 8,923 9,833 6,583
1.250 0.145 49,260 21,530 1,198 19,753 14,851 9,844 11,090 7,385
1.250 0.156 52,610 23,110 1,258 21,096 16,271 10,744 12,339 8,184
1.250 0.175 58,210 25,760 1,353 23,343 18,631 12,247 14,468 9,548
1.500 0.095 40,150 11,810 1,295 11,210 5,599 4,080 3,849 2,741
1.500 0.102 43,060 12,710 1,376 12,022 6,473 4,628 4,453 3,135
1.500 0.109 45,940 13,610 1,455 12,826 7,351 5,172 5,076 3,539
1.500 0.118 49,590 14,750 1,552 13,847 8,471 5,864 5,898 4,067
1.500 0.125 52,400 15,640 1,625 14,631 9,331 6,396 6,549 4,485
1.500 0.134 55,970 16,770 1,715 15,626 10,418 7,069 7,396 5,027
1.500 0.145 60,260 18,140 1,821 16,824 11,717 7,876 8,440 5,694
1.500 0.156 64,470 19,500 1,920 18,000 12,982 8,668 9,490 6,364
1.500 0.175 71,570 21,800 2,080 19,982 15,093 9,997 11,301 7,520
1.500 0.188 76,290 23,350 2,181 21,301 16,487 10,881 12,531 8,307
1.500 0.203 81,610 25,100 2,289 22,786 18,048 11,875 13,936 9,207
1.750 0.109 54,110 11,710 2,036 11,120 5,503 4,019 3,783 2,698
1.750 0.118 58,470 12,710 2,178 12,016 6,467 4,624 4,449 3,132
1.750 0.125 61,830 13,480 2,285 12,707 7,220 5,091 4,982 3,478
1.750 0.134 66,100 14,460 2,418 13,585 8,183 5,687 5,684 3,930
1.750 0.145 71,250 15,650 2,575 14,644 9,345 6,404 6,559 4,492
1.750 0.156 76,330 16,840 2,725 15,687 10,484 7,110 7,448 5,060
1.750 0.175 84,920 18,860 2,968 17,452 12,394 8,299 8,999 6,050
1.750 0.188 90,660 20,230 3,123 18,633 13,659 9,093 10,063 6,730
1.750 0.203 97,160 21,790 3,292 19,969 15,079 9,989 11,289 7,513
2.000 0.109 62,270 10,280 2,716 9,813 4,155 3,153 2,880 2,101
2.000 0.118 67,340 11,150 2,911 10,612 4,968 3,680 3,422 2,461
2.000 0.125 71,250 11,830 3,058 11,227 5,617 4,091 3,861 2,749
2.000 0.134 76,230 12,700 3,243 12,012 6,462 4,621 4,445 3,130
2.000 0.145 82,250 13,760 3,461 12,960 7,498 5,263 5,182 3,607
2.000 0.156 88,190 14,810 3,672 13,896 8,525 5,898 5,938 4,093
2.000 0.175 98,270 16,610 4,016 15,485 10,264 6,973 7,274 4,949
Grade 110
Coiled Tubing Performance Data, Grade 110
110,000 psi Yield Strength - English Units
Specified Nominal Collapse Pressure
Yield Yield Yield
Wall Ovality = 0% Ovality = 2% Ovality = 5%
OD Load Pressure Torque
Thickness Fy (lb) Py (psi) Ty (ft-lb) Fa = 0 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2
D (in.)
t (in.) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
1.000 0.087 26,300 17,560 544 16,411 10,457 7,189 7,368 5,060
1.000 0.095 28,610 19,210 582 17,857 12,053 8,174 8,617 5,858
1.000 0.102 30,600 20,640 614 19,100 13,412 9,018 9,719 6,560
1.000 0.109 32,560 22,050 645 20,321 14,736 9,845 10,824 7,265
1.250 0.080 30,710 12,980 827 12,316 5,941 4,387 4,116 2,958
1.250 0.087 33,380 14,160 889 13,386 7,100 5,116 4,913 3,479
1.250 0.095 36,390 15,510 957 14,592 8,434 5,943 5,861 4,092
1.250 0.102 38,980 16,680 1,014 15,633 9,592 6,656 6,713 4,640
1.250 0.109 41,550 17,850 1,069 16,660 10,732 7,358 7,580 5,195
1.250 0.118 44,790 19,330 1,136 17,961 12,167 8,245 8,708 5,916
1.250 0.125 47,270 20,470 1,186 18,957 13,257 8,921 9,592 6,479
1.250 0.134 50,420 21,930 1,247 20,218 14,625 9,775 10,730 7,205
1.250 0.145 54,190 23,690 1,318 21,728 16,249 10,795 12,120 8,091
1.250 0.156 57,870 25,420 1,384 23,205 17,824 11,789 13,501 8,972
1.250 0.175 64,040 28,340 1,488 25,678 20,439 13,450 15,854 10,477
1.500 0.095 44,160 12,990 1,424 12,331 5,957 4,398 4,127 2,965
1.500 0.102 47,360 13,980 1,514 13,225 6,924 5,006 4,791 3,399
1.500 0.109 50,530 14,970 1,600 14,109 7,898 5,612 5,476 3,844
1.500 0.118 54,550 16,230 1,707 15,232 9,145 6,381 6,381 4,427
1.500 0.125 57,640 17,200 1,787 16,094 10,104 6,972 7,099 4,888
1.500 0.134 61,560 18,450 1,887 17,189 11,317 7,719 8,035 5,486
1.500 0.145 66,280 19,950 2,003 18,506 12,765 8,616 9,190 6,223
1.500 0.156 70,920 21,450 2,112 19,800 14,173 9,492 10,351 6,963
1.500 0.175 78,720 23,980 2,288 21,980 16,518 10,964 12,353 8,240
1.500 0.188 83,920 25,680 2,399 23,431 18,064 11,941 13,714 9,108
1.500 0.203 89,770 27,610 2,518 25,065 19,793 13,038 15,267 10,101
1.750 0.109 59,520 12,890 2,240 12,232 5,851 4,331 4,056 2,918
1.750 0.118 64,320 13,980 2,396 13,218 6,917 5,002 4,786 3,396
1.750 0.125 68,010 14,820 2,514 13,977 7,752 5,521 5,372 3,777
1.750 0.134 72,710 15,910 2,660 14,943 8,825 6,184 6,145 4,275
1.750 0.145 78,380 17,220 2,832 16,108 10,120 6,981 7,111 4,895
1.750 0.156 83,960 18,520 2,997 17,256 11,391 7,765 8,092 5,523
1.750 0.175 93,410 20,750 3,265 19,197 13,519 9,084 9,807 6,616
1.750 0.188 99,730 22,250 3,436 20,497 14,926 9,963 10,985 7,367
1.750 0.203 106,880 23,960 3,622 21,966 16,503 10,954 12,340 8,231
2.000 0.109 68,500 11,310 2,987 10,794 4,376 3,371 3,069 2,262
2.000 0.118 74,080 12,270 3,202 11,673 5,264 3,954 3,660 2,657
2.000 0.125 78,380 13,020 3,364 12,350 5,977 4,411 4,141 2,974
2.000 0.134 83,850 13,970 3,568 13,213 6,911 4,998 4,782 3,394
2.000 0.145 90,470 15,140 3,808 14,256 8,061 5,713 5,592 3,919
2.000 0.156 97,010 16,290 4,039 15,286 9,206 6,418 6,426 4,456
2.000 0.175 108,100 18,270 4,417 17,033 11,145 7,613 7,900 5,400
Grade 120
Coiled Tubing Performance Data, Grade 120
120,000 psi Yield Strength - English Units
Specified Nominal Collapse Pressure
Yield Yield Yield
Wall Ovality = 0% Ovality = 2% Ovality = 5%
OD Load Pressure Torque
Thickness Fy (lb) Py (psi) Ty (ft-lb) Fa = 0 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2 Fa = 0 Fa = Fy/2
D (in.)
t (in.) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
1.000 0.087 28,690 19,160 593 17,903 11,236 7,774 7,926 5,471
1.000 0.095 31,210 20,960 635 19,480 13,001 8,860 9,294 6,345
1.000 0.102 33,390 22,510 670 20,836 14,502 9,788 10,503 7,114
1.000 0.109 35,520 24,050 704 22,168 15,963 10,696 11,715 7,886
1.250 0.080 33,510 14,160 902 13,435 6,267 4,688 4,378 3,173
1.250 0.087 36,420 15,450 969 14,603 7,535 5,490 5,245 3,742
1.250 0.095 39,700 16,920 1,044 15,918 9,002 6,401 6,278 4,412
1.250 0.102 42,530 18,200 1,106 17,054 10,280 7,188 7,209 5,012
1.250 0.109 45,320 19,470 1,166 18,174 11,540 7,961 8,158 5,619
1.250 0.118 48,860 21,090 1,239 19,593 13,127 8,937 9,394 6,408
1.250 0.125 51,570 22,330 1,294 20,680 14,331 9,681 10,363 7,025
1.250 0.134 55,000 23,920 1,361 22,056 15,841 10,619 11,611 7,820
1.250 0.145 59,110 25,840 1,438 23,704 17,631 11,738 13,135 8,790
1.250 0.156 63,130 27,730 1,510 25,315 19,364 12,829 14,650 9,755
1.250 0.175 69,860 30,910 1,623 28,012 22,235 14,648 17,230 11,402
1.500 0.095 48,180 14,180 1,554 13,452 6,284 4,700 4,390 3,181
1.500 0.102 51,670 15,260 1,651 14,427 7,341 5,369 5,111 3,655
1.500 0.109 55,130 16,330 1,746 15,391 8,411 6,036 5,858 4,140
1.500 0.118 59,510 17,710 1,862 16,616 9,787 6,885 6,847 4,779
1.500 0.125 62,880 18,770 1,950 17,557 10,847 7,535 7,632 5,283
1.500 0.134 67,160 20,130 2,058 18,752 12,187 8,359 8,657 5,938
1.500 0.145 72,310 21,770 2,185 20,189 13,787 9,345 9,922 6,745
1.500 0.156 77,360 23,400 2,304 21,600 15,342 10,309 11,195 7,555
1.500 0.175 85,880 26,160 2,496 23,978 17,927 11,924 13,391 8,953
1.500 0.188 91,550 28,020 2,617 25,561 19,627 12,995 14,883 9,904
1.500 0.203 97,930 30,120 2,747 27,344 21,526 14,197 16,585 10,991
1.750 0.109 64,930 14,060 2,443 13,344 6,169 4,626 4,313 3,130
1.750 0.118 70,160 15,250 2,614 14,420 7,333 5,364 5,106 3,651
1.750 0.125 74,190 16,170 2,742 15,248 8,251 5,937 5,745 4,067
1.750 0.134 79,320 17,350 2,902 16,302 9,433 6,667 6,589 4,613
1.750 0.145 85,500 18,790 3,090 17,572 10,864 7,546 7,645 5,291
1.750 0.156 91,590 20,210 3,270 18,824 12,269 8,409 8,720 5,978
1.750 0.175 101,900 22,640 3,561 20,943 14,620 9,860 10,599 7,176
1.750 0.188 108,800 24,280 3,748 22,360 16,172 10,826 11,891 7,998
1.750 0.203 116,590 26,140 3,951 23,963 17,910 11,914 13,377 8,944
2.000 0.109 74,730 12,330 3,259 11,775 4,573 3,575 3,246 2,415
2.000 0.118 80,810 13,380 3,493 12,734 5,531 4,212 3,884 2,845
2.000 0.125 85,500 14,200 3,670 13,473 6,307 4,714 4,405 3,191
2.000 0.134 91,480 15,240 3,892 14,414 7,327 5,361 5,102 3,649
2.000 0.145 98,700 16,510 4,154 15,552 8,591 6,148 5,985 4,223
2.000 0.156 105,820 17,770 4,406 16,675 9,854 6,926 6,895 4,810
2.000 0.175 117,920 19,930 4,819 18,582 11,997 8,242 8,509 5,843
2-52
English Units
Specified
Calculated Plain Pipe Metal Plastic Internal Displacement
Nominal Calculated Flow
ID with End Cross- Stretch Capacity per
Wall ID Area External per Wall (Ext-Int)
OD Flash Weight sectional ft/1,000 ft 1,000 ft
Thickness d (in.) (in.2) 1,000 ft per 1,000 ft
D (in.) dmin (in.) w (lb/ft) Area, A (in.2) per 1,000 lb
t (in.) gal bbl gal bbl gal bbl
1.000 0.087 0.826 0.739 0.849 0.250 0.134 0.536 27.837 0.6628 40.800 0.9714 12.963 0.3086
Coiled Tubing Handbook
1.000 0.095 0.810 0.720 0.919 0.270 0.123 0.515 26.769 0.6374 40.800 0.9714 14.031 0.3341
1.000 0.102 0.796 0.706 0.979 0.288 0.116 0.498 25.852 0.6155 40.800 0.9714 14.948 0.3559
1.000 0.109 0.782 0.692 1.038 0.305 0.109 0.480 24.950 0.5941 40.800 0.9714 15.850 0.3774
1.250 0.080 1.090 1.000 1.001 0.294 0.113 0.933 48.474 1.1542 63.750 1.5179 15.276 0.3637
1.250 0.087 1.076 0.989 1.082 0.318 0.105 0.909 47.237 1.1247 63.750 1.5179 16.513 0.3932
1.250 0.095 1.060 0.970 1.173 0.345 0.097 0.882 45.843 1.0915 63.750 1.5179 17.907 0.4264
1.250 0.102 1.046 0.956 1.252 0.368 0.091 0.859 44.640 1.0629 63.750 1.5179 19.110 0.4550
1.500 0.125 1.250 1.160 1.837 0.540 0.062 1.227 63.750 1.5179 91.800 2.1857 28.050 0.6679
1.500 0.134 1.232 1.142 1.957 0.575 0.058 1.192 61.927 1.4745 91.800 2.1857 29.873 0.7113
1.500 0.145 1.210 1.120 2.100 0.617 0.054 1.150 59.735 1.4223 91.800 2.1857 32.065 0.7634
1.500 0.156 1.188 1.098 2.241 0.659 0.051 1.108 57.583 1.3710 91.800 2.1857 34.217 0.8147
1.500 0.175 1.150 1.060 2.479 0.728 0.046 1.039 53.958 1.2847 91.800 2.1857 37.842 0.9010
1.500 0.188 1.124 1.034 2.637 0.775 0.043 0.992 51.546 1.2273 91.800 2.1857 40.254 0.9584
1.500 0.203 1.094 1.004 2.815 0.827 0.040 0.940 48.831 1.1626 91.800 2.1857 42.969 1.0231
1.750 0.109 1.532 1.442 1.912 0.562 0.059 1.843 95.759 2.2800 124.950 2.9750 29.191 0.6950
1.750 0.118 1.514 1.424 2.059 0.605 0.055 1.800 93.522 2.2267 124.950 2.9750 31.428 0.7483
1.750 0.125 1.500 1.410 2.171 0.638 0.052 1.767 91.800 2.1857 124.950 2.9750 33.150 0.7893
1.750 0.134 1.482 1.392 2.315 0.680 0.049 1.725 89.610 2.1336 124.950 2.9750 35.340 0.8414
1.750 0.145 1.460 1.370 2.488 0.731 0.046 1.674 86.969 2.0707 124.950 2.9750 37.981 0.9043
1.750 0.156 1.438 1.348 2.658 0.781 0.043 1.624 84.368 2.0088 124.950 2.9750 40.582 0.9662
1.750 0.175 1.400 1.310 2.946 0.866 0.038 1.539 79.968 1.9040 124.950 2.9750 44.982 1.0710
1.750 0.188 1.374 1.284 3.139 0.923 0.036 1.483 77.025 1.8339 124.950 2.9750 47.925 1.1411
1.750 0.203 1.344 1.255 3.357 0.987 0.034 1.419 73.699 1.7547 124.950 2.9750 51.251 1.2203
September 2005
Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements
English Units
Specified
September 2005
Calculated Plain Pipe Metal Plastic Internal Displacement
Nominal Calculated Flow
ID with End Cross- Stretch Capacity per
Wall ID Area External per Wall (Ext-Int)
OD Flash Weight sectional ft/1,000 ft 1,000 ft
Thickness d (in.) (in.2) 1,000 ft per 1,000 ft
D (in.) dmin (in.) w (lb/ft) Area, A (in.2) per 1,000 lb
t (in.) gal bbl gal bbl gal bbl
2.000 0.109 1.782 1.692 2.203 0.648 0.051 2.494 129.561 3.0848 163.200 3.8857 33.639 0.8009
2.000 0.118 1.764 1.674 2.374 0.698 0.048 2.444 126.957 3.0228 163.200 3.8857 36.243 0.8629
2.000 0.125 1.750 1.660 2.505 0.736 0.045 2.405 124.950 2.9750 163.200 3.8857 38.250 0.9107
2.000 0.134 1.732 1.642 2.673 0.786 0.042 2.356 122.393 2.9141 163.200 3.8857 40.807 0.9716
2.000 0.145 1.710 1.620 2.875 0.845 0.039 2.297 119.303 2.8406 163.200 3.8857 43.897 1.0452
2.000 0.156 1.688 1.598 3.075 0.904 0.037 2.238 116.253 2.7679 163.200 3.8857 46.947 1.1178
2.000 0.175 1.650 1.560 3.414 1.003 0.033 2.138 111.078 2.6447 163.200 3.8857 52.122 1.2410
2.000 0.188 1.624 1.534 3.642 1.070 0.031 2.071 107.605 2.5620 163.200 3.8857 55.595 1.3237
2.000 0.203 1.594 1.504 3.900 1.146 0.029 1.996 103.666 2.4682 163.200 3.8857 59.534 1.4175
2.375 0.109 2.157 2.067 2.640 0.776 0.043 3.654 189.828 4.5197 230.138 5.4795 40.309 0.9597
2.375 0.118 2.139 2.049 2.847 0.837 0.040 3.593 186.673 4.4446 230.138 5.4795 43.464 1.0349
2.375 0.125 2.125 2.035 3.007 0.884 0.038 3.547 184.238 4.3866 230.138 5.4795 45.900 1.0929
2.375 0.134 2.107 2.017 3.210 0.943 0.035 3.487 181.130 4.3126 230.138 5.4795 49.008 1.1669
2.375 0.145 2.085 1.995 3.457 1.016 0.033 3.414 177.367 4.2230 230.138 5.4795 52.771 1.2564
2.375 0.156 2.063 1.973 3.700 1.088 0.031 3.343 173.644 4.1344 230.138 5.4795 56.494 1.3451
2.375 0.175 2.025 1.935 4.116 1.210 0.028 3.221 167.306 3.9835 230.138 5.4795 62.832 1.4960
2.375 0.188 1.999 1.909 4.395 1.292 0.026 3.138 163.037 3.8818 230.138 5.4795 67.101 1.5976
2.375 0.203 1.969 1.879 4.713 1.385 0.024 3.045 158.180 3.7662 230.138 5.4795 71.957 1.7133
2.875 0.125 2.625 2.535 3.675 1.080 0.031 5.412 281.138 6.6938 337.238 8.0295 56.100 1.3357
2.875 0.134 2.607 2.517 3.926 1.154 0.029 5.338 277.295 6.6023 337.238 8.0295 59.942 1.4272
2.875 0.145 2.585 2.495 4.232 1.244 0.027 5.248 272.635 6.4913 337.238 8.0295 64.603 1.5382
2.875 0.156 2.563 2.473 4.534 1.333 0.025 5.159 268.014 6.3813 337.238 8.0295 69.224 1.6482
2.875 0.175 2.525 2.435 5.051 1.484 0.022 5.007 260.126 6.1935 337.238 8.0295 77.112 1.8360
2.875 0.188 2.499 2.409 5.400 1.587 0.021 4.905 254.796 6.0666 337.238 8.0295 82.441 1.9629
2.875 0.203 2.469 2.379 5.798 1.704 0.020 4.788 248.715 5.9218 337.238 8.0295 88.522 2.1077
3.500 0.134 3.232 3.142 4.822 1.417 0.024 8.204 426.190 10.1474 499.800 11.9000 73.610 1.7526
3.500 0.145 3.210 3.120 5.200 1.528 0.022 8.093 420.407 10.0097 499.800 11.9000 79.393 1.8903
3.500 0.156 3.188 3.098 5.577 1.639 0.020 7.982 414.664 9.8730 499.800 11.9000 85.136 2.0270
2-53
Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements
2-54
Metric Units
Specified Nominal Pipe Metal Displacement
Calculated Plastic Specified External
Calculated Plain End Cross- Internal
Wall ID with Stretch Nominal Cross- Wall
OD ID Weight sectional
Thickness Flash Area, A m / 1000 m Flow Area Capacity sectional External (Ext - Int)
Dm (mm) d (mm) W m (kg/m) m (litre/m) (litre/m)
t (mm) dmin (mm) per 1000 kg A (mm2) Area (mm2) (litre/m)
(mm2)
Coiled Tubing Handbook
25.40 2.21 20.98 18.77 1.26 161.0 0.294 345.7 0.3457 506.71 0.5067 0.1610
25.40 2.41 20.57 18.29 1.37 174.3 0.272 332.5 0.3325 506.71 0.5067 0.1742
25.40 2.59 20.22 17.93 1.46 185.6 0.255 321.1 0.3211 506.71 0.5067 0.1856
25.40 2.77 19.86 17.58 1.55 196.8 0.241 309.9 0.3099 506.71 0.5067 0.1968
31.75 2.03 27.69 25.40 1.49 189.7 0.250 602.0 0.6020 791.73 0.7917 0.1897
31.75 2.21 27.33 25.12 1.61 205.1 0.231 586.7 0.5867 791.73 0.7917 0.2050
31.75 2.41 26.92 24.64 1.74 222.4 0.213 569.3 0.5693 791.73 0.7917 0.2224
September 2005
Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements
Metric Units
Specified Nominal Pipe Metal Displacement
September 2005
Calculated Plastic Specified External
Calculated Plain End Cross- Internal
Wall ID with Stretch Nominal Cross- Wall
OD ID Weight sectional
Thickness Flash Area, Am m / 1000 m Flow Area Capacity sectional External (Ext - Int)
Dm (mm) d (mm) Wm (kg/m) (litre/m) (litre/m)
t (mm) dmin (mm) per 1000 kg A (mm2) Area (mm2) (litre/m)
(mm2)
50.80 2.77 45.26 42.98 3.28 417.8 0.113 1609.1 1.6091 2026.83 2.0268 0.4177
50.80 3.00 44.81 42.52 3.54 450.1 0.105 1576.7 1.5767 2026.83 2.0268 0.4501
50.80 3.18 44.45 42.16 3.73 475.0 0.100 1551.8 1.5518 2026.83 2.0268 0.4750
50.80 3.40 43.99 41.71 3.97 506.8 0.094 1520.0 1.5200 2026.83 2.0268 0.5068
50.80 3.68 43.43 41.15 4.28 545.2 0.087 1481.7 1.4817 2026.83 2.0268 0.5451
50.80 3.96 42.88 40.59 4.57 583.0 0.081 1443.8 1.4438 2026.83 2.0268 0.5830
50.80 4.45 41.91 39.62 5.09 647.3 0.073 1379.5 1.3795 2026.83 2.0268 0.6473
50.80 4.78 41.25 38.96 5.42 690.5 0.069 1336.4 1.3364 2026.83 2.0268 0.6904
50.80 5.16 40.49 38.20 5.81 739.4 0.064 1287.5 1.2875 2026.83 2.0268 0.7393
60.33 2.77 54.79 52.50 3.93 500.6 0.095 2357.5 2.3575 2858.63 2.8586 0.5011
60.33 3.00 54.33 52.04 4.24 539.8 0.088 2318.4 2.3184 2858.63 2.8586 0.5402
60.33 3.18 53.98 51.69 4.48 570.0 0.083 2288.1 2.2881 2858.63 2.8586 0.5705
60.33 3.40 53.52 51.23 4.77 608.6 0.078 2249.5 2.2495 2858.63 2.8586 0.6091
60.33 3.68 52.96 50.67 5.14 655.4 0.072 2202.8 2.2028 2858.63 2.8586 0.6558
60.33 3.96 52.40 50.11 5.51 701.6 0.068 2156.5 2.1565 2858.63 2.8586 0.7021
60.33 4.45 51.44 49.15 6.13 780.3 0.061 2077.8 2.0778 2858.63 2.8586 0.7808
60.33 4.78 50.77 48.49 6.55 833.3 0.057 2024.8 2.0248 2858.63 2.8586 0.8338
60.33 5.16 50.01 47.73 7.02 893.7 0.053 1964.5 1.9645 2858.63 2.8586 0.8941
73.03 3.18 66.68 64.39 5.48 696.7 0.068 3491.5 3.4915 4188.84 4.1888 0.6973
73.03 3.40 66.22 63.93 5.84 744.4 0.064 3443.8 3.4438 4188.84 4.1888 0.7450
73.03 3.68 65.66 63.37 6.29 802.3 0.059 3385.9 3.3859 4188.84 4.1888 0.8029
73.03 3.96 65.10 62.81 6.75 859.7 0.055 3328.6 3.3286 4188.84 4.1888 0.8602
73.03 4.45 64.14 61.85 7.53 957.7 0.050 3230.6 3.2306 4188.84 4.1888 0.9582
73.03 4.78 63.47 61.19 8.05 1023.9 0.046 3164.4 3.1644 4188.84 4.1888 1.0244
73.03 5.16 62.71 60.43 8.64 1099.4 0.043 3088.9 3.0889 4188.84 4.1888 1.0999
88.90 3.40 82.09 79.81 7.17 914.2 0.052 5293.0 5.2930 6207.18 6.2072 0.9142
88.90 3.68 81.53 79.25 7.73 986.0 0.048 5221.2 5.2212 6207.18 6.2072 0.9860
88.90 3.96 80.98 78.69 8.30 1057.3 0.045 5149.9 5.1499 6207.18 6.2072 1.0573
2-55
Tubing Sizes, Volumes & Displacements
English Units
2-56
Weight Wall Wall Internal Drift Internal Volume per External Displacement
OD ID Thickness Area Area Diameter 1,000 ft per 1,000 ft
NU EU IJ
in. in.
lb/ft lb/ft lb/ft in. in.² in.² in. ft3 gal bbls ft3 gal bbls
1.050 1.14 1.20 1.20 0.824 0.113 0.333 0.533 0.730 3.70 27.70 0.66 6.01 44.98 1.07
1.50 1.50 0.742 0.154 0.433 0.432 3.00 22.46 0.53 6.01 44.98 1.07
1.315 1.70 1.80 1.80 1.049 0.133 0.494 0.864 0.955 6.00 44.90 1.07 9.43 70.55 1.68
2.25 0.957 0.179 0.639 0.719 0.848 5.00 37.37 0.89 9.43 70.55 1.68
Coiled Tubing Handbook
2.10 1.410 0.125 0.603 1.561 1.286 10.84 81.11 1.93 15.03 112.43 2.68
1.660 2.30 2.40 2.40 1.380 0.140 0.669 1.496 1.286 10.39 77.70 1.85 15.03 112.43 2.68
3.02 1.280 0.191 0.883 1.287 1.184 8.94 66.85 1.59 15.07 112.70 2.68
2.40 1.650 0.125 0.697 2.138 1.516 14.85 111.08 2.64 19.69 147.29 3.51
1.900 2.75 2.90 2.90 1.610 0.145 0.799 2.036 1.516 14.14 105.76 2.52 19.69 147.29 3.51
3.64 1.500 0.200 1.068 1.767 1.406 12.27 91.80 2.19 19.69 147.29 3.51
2.000 3.40 1.670 0.165 0.951 2.190 15.21 113.79 2.71 21.82 163.20 3.89
11.00 2.065 0.405 3.143 3.349 1.971 23.26 173.98 4.14 45.08 337.24 8.03
11.65 1.995 0.440 3.366 3.126 21.71 162.38 3.87 45.08 337.24 8.03
7.70 3.068 0.216 2.228 7.393 2.943 51.34 384.03 9.14 66.81 499.80 11.90
9.20 9.30 9.30 2.992 0.254 2.590 7.031 2.867 48.83 365.24 8.70 66.81 499.80 11.90
10.20 10.30 2.922 0.289 2.915 6.706 2.797 46.57 348.35 8.29 66.81 499.80 11.90
3.500 12.80 2.764 0.368 3.621 6.000 2.639 41.67 311.70 7.42 66.81 499.80 11.90
12.70 12.95 12.95 2.750 0.375 3.682 5.940 2.625 41.25 308.55 7.35 66.81 499.80 11.90
15.80 2.548 0.476 4.522 5.099 2.423 35.41 264.89 6.31 66.81 499.80 11.90
16.70 2.480 0.510 4.791 4.831 2.355 33.55 250.94 5.97 66.81 499.80 11.90
9.50 3.548 0.226 2.680 9.887 3.423 68.66 513.60 12.23 87.27 652.80 15.54
4.000 11.00 11.00 3.476 0.262 3.077 9.490 3.351 65.90 492.97 11.74 87.27 652.80 15.54
11.60 3.428 0.286 3.337 9.229 3.303 64.09 479.45 11.41 87.27 652.80 15.54
13.40 3.340 0.330 3.805 8.762 3.215 60.84 455.15 10.84 87.27 652.80 15.54
12.60 12.75 12.75 3.958 0.271 3.600 12.304 3.833 85.44 639.16 15.22 110.45 826.20 19.67
4.500 13.50 3.920 0.290 3.836 12.069 3.795 83.81 626.95 14.93 110.45 826.20 19.67
15.50 3.826 0.337 4.407 11.497 3.701 79.84 597.24 14.22 110.45 826.20 19.67
September 2005
19.20 3.640 0.430 5.498 10.406 3.515 72.27 540.58 12.87 110.45 826.20 19.67
Coiled Tubing Handbook
September 2005
1.050 26.670 1.14 1.70 1.20 1.79 1.20 1.79
1.50 2.23 1.50 2.23
1.315 33.401 1.70 2.53 1.80 2.68 1.80 2.68 0.051
2.25 3.35
2.10 3.12 0.500 0.216
1.900 48.260 2.30 3.42 2.40 3.57 2.40 3.57 0.458 0.173
3.02 4.49 0.323 0.038
2.40 3.57 0.872 0.587 0.239
1.900 48.260 2.75 4.09 2.90 4.32 2.90 4.32 0.806 0.521 0.173
3.64 5.42 0.633 0.348
2.000 50.800 3.40 5.06 0.906 0.621 0.273
2.063 52.400 3.25 4.84 1.046 0.761 0.413 0.002
4.00 5.95 1.603 1.318 0.970 0.559 0.084
4.60 6.84 4.70 6.99 4.70 6.99 1.509 1.224 0.876 0.465
5.30 7.89 1.398 1.113 0.765 0.353
2.375 60.325 5.80 8.63 5.95 8.85 1.259 0.974 0.626 0.214
6.20 9.23 1.232 0.948 0.599 0.188
7.70 11.46 0.962 0.677 0.329
6.40 9.52 6.50 9.67 6.50 9.67 2.511 2.226 1.878 1.467 0.992 0.161
2.226 1.942 1.593 1.182 0.707
8.60 12.80 8.70 12.95 8.70 12.95 2.078 1.793 1.445 1.033 0.559
2.875 73.025 9.50 14.14 1.934 1.649 1.301 0.889 0.414
10.70 15.92 1.708 1.423 1.075 0.663 0.189
11.00 16.37 1.653 1.368 1.020 0.609 0.134
11.00 16.37 1.509 1.224 0.876 0.465
7.70 11.46 4.260 3.976 3.627 3.216 2.741 1.910 1.277 0.581
9.20 13.69 9.30 13.84 9.30 13.84 4.027 3.742 3.394 2.983 2.508 1.677 1.044 0.348
10.20 15.18 10.30 15.33 3.818 3.533 3.184 2.773 2.298 1.467 0.834 0.138
3.500 88.900 12.80 19.05 3.363 3.078 2.730 2.318 1.843 1.012 0.379
12.70 18.90 12.95 19.27 12.95 19.27 3.323 3.039 2.690 2.279 1.804 0.973 0.340
15.80 23.51 2.781 2.497 2.148 1.737 1.262 0.431
16.70 24.85 2.608 2.323 1.975 1.564 1.089 0.258
9.50 14.14 5.869 5.584 5.236 4.824 4.349 3.519 2.885 2.189 0.171
2-69
15.50 23.06 6.907 6.622 6.274 5.862 5.388 4.557 3.924 3.227 1.210
19.20 28.57 6.204 5.919 5.571 5.159 4.684 3.853 3.220 2.524 0.506
Coiled Tubing Handbook
i
Miscellaneous Fluid Information Tables .................................................. 3-67
Maximum Density of Common Completion Brines ............................. 3-67
Sodium Chloride Solution Properties ................................................. 3-67
Calcium Chloride Solution Properties ................................................. 3-68
Ammonium Chloride Solution Properties ........................................... 3-68
Potassium Chloride Solution Properties ............................................. 3-69
Fracturing Fluid Systems .................................................................... 3-69
Hydraulics and Friction Pressure Losses ................................................ 3-71
Pressure Losses in Liquids ................................................................ 3-72
Pressure Losses in Gases ................................................................. 3-75
Pressure Losses in Foams ................................................................. 3-75
Pressure Losses in Multiphase Fluids ................................................ 3-75
Nomenclature ..................................................................................... 3-76
References ......................................................................................... 3-76
Tables of Friction Pressure Losses in Coiled Tubing ......................... 3-77
ii
Section 3
BHTP—The bottomhole treating pressure, or BHTP, is the amount of pressure required at the
perforations to cause fracture extension. Many times this value is reported as the "frac gradient." The
gradient is calculated by dividing the BHTP by the depth to the center of the perforations.
bbl/min—This term refers to the pump rate or barrels per minute (use bpm instead of bbl/min).
Closure Pressure—Closure pressure is the amount fluid pressure required to reopen an existing fracture.
This pressure is equal to, and counteracts, the stress in the rock perpendicular to the fracture plane. This
stress is the minimum principal in-situ stress and is often called the closure stress.
Clean Volume—Clean volume refers to the volume of the treating fluid without taking into account
proppant.
kAΔP
μL
where:
K = Permeability
A = Area
P = Delta Pressure
μ = Viscosity
L = Strength
Density—The density of a body is its mass per unit volume. Water density is 8.33 lb per gallon at 70°F.
Dirty Volume—Dirty volume is the “clean” volume plus the volume of the proppant.
Flash Point—Flash point refers to the lowest temperature at which vapors above a volatile combustible
substance ignite in air when exposed to spark or flame.
Frac Gradient—(Hydrostatic pressure at perforation mid point + ISIP) divided by depth of perforation
mid point.
Hydrostatic Pressure—Hydrostatic pressure reflects the pressure exerted by a vertical column of fluid.
This pressure is calculated from the true vertical height and density of the fluid. Hydrostatic pressure is
not area sensitive.
ISIP—ISIP (PISIP) is the instantaneous shut-in pressure. It can be determined during a pump-in test. The
pumps are brought on line at a rate that will cause the formation to fracture ("break down"). Fluid is
pumped into the formation for a short time then pumping is stopped. ISIP reflect the amount of pressure
recorded immediately after shutting the pumps down. ISIP values can be hard to determine if the bottom
hole slurry rate is not zero and/or water hammer is introduced. Graphical methods are used to determine
an ISIP when water hammer is present by extrapolating back along a straight line section to the
intersection of the first rise of the first oscillation of the water hammer.
HHP—Hydraulic horsepower is a unit of measurement for the amount of work that is or can be done by
hydraulic equipment. HHP can be calculated by (pressure × rate)/40.8
Mgal—The M is the Roman numeral for one-thousand. Therefore, this refers to thousands of gal. Used
in concentration statements.
Net Pressure—Net pressure is defined as the difference in ISIP pressure and closure pressure.
Pw—The wellhead pressure is the gauge measured treating pressure or static pressure at the surface.
ΔPfrict—The symbol Δ indicates delta (or incremental) change; therefore, ΔP means the gradual change
in pressure. Pfrict stands for “friction loss in pipe,” as measured by units of psi. The movement of fluid
past a stationary object causes this friction, which in this case is the pipe wall.
Pperf—The friction caused by fluid flow through a perforation or group of perforations. This symbol
stands for perforation friction.
Porosity—A fractional or percentage value Referring to the void spaces inside a rock or the part of the
rock that is not rock.
Relative Permeability—Relative permeability is the ratio of the effective permeability to the absolute
permeability of the porous medium.
Slurry Volume—Slurry volume is the total volume of fluid, additives, and proppants. This reflects the
total volume of fluid that is pumped also referred to as dirty volume.
Specific Gravity—Specific gravity is a unit-less ratio relationship between a substance and a base
substance. For liquids, the base is water, so the specific gravity of water is 1.0 (8.33/8.33). For a 10 lb/gal
brine the specific gravity will be 10.0/8.33=1.2. For gases, air is the base substance.
The viscosity of a fluid is the physical property that characterizes the flow resistance of simple
(Newtonian) fluids. Viscosity is responsible for the frictional drag (or viscous force) which one part of
the fluid exerts on an adjacent part if the two parts are in relative motion.
Viscosity is a measure of a fluid's resistance to the deformation rate. Said another way, viscosity is the
measure of a fluid's resistance to flow. Viscosity is generally written with the Greek symbol mu (μ) and
reported in units of centipoise (cp).
The higher the viscosity, the higher the fluid's resistance is to flow.
Shear is the movement of one fluid particle past another. Shear rate is computed by the equation of Shear
Rate = Velocity/Length.
Units for shear rate are reciprocal seconds (sec-1). Figure 3.1 shows the ideal system of two parallel
plates.
In pipe flow, pressure drop represents shear stress and velocity of the shear rate. When using a Fann
Viscometer, shear stress can be determined from the dial reading and the shear rate from the rotational
speed of the sleeve.
The most common rheological test performed on fracturing fluids is the shear stress/shear rate test. This
data is used to construct a flow curve of which the slope is the fluid's viscosity. Higher rates of shear result
from faster movement of the fluid particles.
Temperature, however, has a strong effect on the viscosity of fluids. Liquid viscosity decreases with the
increase of temperature. Gas viscosity also increases with an increase in temperature.
The definition of a Newtonian fluid, then, is that it has the same viscosity at all flow rates or shear rates.
In comparison, non-Newtonian fluids do not have constant viscosity at all flow rates or shear rates.
Many of the fluids we use in the oilfield are non-Newtonian “pseudo plastic” or shear thinning fluids.
This behavior is represented graphically in Figure 3.2.
In general, the addition of chemicals such as fluid loss additives, gelling agents, friction reducers, and
emulsifiers to a Newtonian fluid tends to change the fluid to a non-Newtonian type. The viscosity of a
Newtonian fluid is a constant ratio of shear stress to shear rate.
As for non-Newtonian fluids, because their flow curves are not linear or linear but not passing through
the origin, the viscosity is not constant but is a function of shear rate. Apparent viscosity, or , is often
used when referring to the consistency of non-Newtonian fluids. The apparent viscosity of
non-Newtonian fluids at certain rates represents the viscosity of Newtonian fluids at the same shear
stress-shear rate (Figure 3.3).
Apparent Viscosity then, is a simplistic view of the consistency of a non-Newtonian fluid and only
relevant at a given shear stress or shear rate.
Velocity
Shear Rate =
Length
From the above shear rate equation, there will be a different shear rate and as a result, a different viscosity
for different geometry’s. So the shear rate down the tubing, casing and fracture will all have different
viscosities due to the different shear rates.
To help minimize the confusion of reporting apparent viscosity at arbitrary shear rates, it has become
standard practice to report apparent viscosity based on either 100 or 300 rpm (revolution per minute)
speeds of the Model 35A Fann Viscometer.
Halliburton assumes that apparent viscosity values are at the 300 rpm with a B1 bob for thinner fluids
and linear gels or at 100 rpm with a B2 bob for thicker crosslinked gels unless otherwise stated.
It should be noted that Viscosity changes dramatically with temperature as the Tables 3.1 and 3.2
demonstrate:
Fluid Density
The density of fracturing fluids must be considered since it affects hydrostatic pressure. The density of a
fluid is expressed in units of pounds per gallon (lb/gal). The propping agent concentration added to
fracturing fluids affects the density of the treating slurry. Therefore, this value must be known when
performing calculations to find density and hydrostatic pressures.
Adding proppant to a fluid will also increase the fluids apparent viscosity and thus its friction
characteristics will increase.
When the flow rate was increased to critical velocity, the velocity at which turbulent flow starts, the
thread of color disappeared and the color diffused uniformly throughout the entire cross-section.
Friction Pressure
As a fluid is pumped through tubing or casing, a certain amount of friction is created. This is due to fluid
moving past the pipe wall (shear). Friction is affected mainly by rate, pipe diameter, pipe roughness, pipe
length, viscosity and density. As the flow rate increases for a given fluid, the friction pressure increases.
As a fluid moves into turbulent flow, the friction pressure also increases. As a pipe’s diameter increases,
friction pressure decreases due to the decrease in velocity.
To determine the friction pressures of a fluid, use the Halwin\StimWin program “Friction.” To use this
program, you will need to select the fluid you are interested in and input the tubulars that you have. Then
hit the “DO” button and you can view the results in graphical or text format.
Below is the graphical output comparing the friction pressure for Fresh Water and WG-11 (40 lb/Mgal)
pumped through 10,000 feet of 1.5-in. CT with 0.109-in. Wall.
Friction Pressure
WG-11, 40.0 Fresh Water
6,000
5,000
Friction Pressure (psi)
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
At the end of this section there are calculation methods and charts showing the expected friction pressures
expected when pumping some common Newtonian Fluids through different sizes of coiled tubing.
Hydraulic Horsepower
Two equations may be used to determine hydraulic pressure (HHP). The unit in which the flow rate is
given in (bbl/min or gal/min) should determine the equation used.
⎛ bbl ⎞
Pw (psi ) × Rate⎜ ⎟
HHP = ⎝ min ⎠
40.8
or
⎛ gal ⎞
Pw (psi ) × Rate⎜ ⎟
HHP = ⎝ min ⎠
1713.6
Example:
Pump Rate
By rewriting the base equation for HHP, you can obtain an equation for calculating bbl/min.
Now divide both sides by Pw. This gives you rate in bbl/min.
Example:
What is the maximum pump rate in bbl/min that can be delivered at maximum psi under these conditions?
Horsepower
Horsepower output by a pump, or hydraulic horsepower (HHP), is less than input horsepower from the
engine (EHP) because of mechanical losses. These losses occur in the fan, transmission and pump, and
will be in the range of 5% to 20%. The use of 12% for calculations is reasonable; thus:
Hydraulic horsepower of the pump can also be calculated from its output conditions of pressure and
volumetric rate. Details of pressure and volumetric rate are found on P-V curve charts set up for each type
of pump and engine combination
Volumetric Rate
Volume per pump revolution equals plunger area times stroke length, but we also multiply by the number
of plungers as well as volumetric efficiency. The number of plungers for a HT-400 is always three since
it is a triplex pump. Volumetric efficiency is in the range of 94 to 98%. If you know the volume displaced
during one pump revolution, you can calculate the total volumetric rate by multiplying this value by
pump speed. The following formulas show how this works:
Volume per Pump Revolution = (Plunger Area) × (Stroke Length) × (Number of Plungers) × (Volumetric
Efficiency)
Note One pump revolution refers to one complete turn of the crankshaft.
Example:
Solution:
Volume per revolution equals the multiplication of plunger area (PA), stroke length (SL), number of
plungers (N) and volumetric efficiency (VE).
VPR = PA × SL × N × VE
VPR = (19.635 in2) × (8 in.) × (3) × (.97) = 457.1028 cubic inches per revolution
Note The unit for VPR is cubic inches. Since we are familiar with volumes expressed in
gal, we can convert to gal. One gallon equals 231 cubic inches. Therefore,
Example:
Volumetric Rate is obtained by multiplying the volume per revolution by pump speed.
VR = (VPR) × (PRPM)
VR = (1.9788 gal/rev) × (220 rev/min)
VR = 435.336 gal/min.
Remember as discussed earlier, the power train (pump, transmission, and engine) can affect HHP because
of energy losses. You need a visual on your tank bbl markers, flow meter or pit level indicator in order
to confirm you pump output.
Manifolding
Manifolding systems and components supplied to Halliburton's field operations are designed to convey
abrasive fluids up to 35 feet per second. Since abrasive fluid velocities above 35 feet per second
accelerate erosion, they should be avoided whenever possible. This will help to obtain maximum service
life from manifolding equipment. Standard manifold components are designed to handle moderate
corrosive materials. Special manifolding is required to convey severe corrosives such as sour gas. Severe
acid service (frequent pumping of large volumes of acid on a regular basis, especially if the acid is heated
and/or poorly inhibited) also requires that special manifold components be used.
Corrosion, erosion or “wash out” usually determine the lives of most manifold components. Operators
using the manifolding seldom have strict control over which materials are pumped. The types of materials
(corrosives, abrasives, etc.) are normally predetermined by the customer or by Halliburton personnel in
order to obtain specific results from the well. On the other hand, the user of discharge lines can help
minimize erosion from abrasive fluids by "rigging up" properly. The size and number of lines “rigged
up” should be adequate to keep abrasive fluid velocities from exceeding 35 feet per second. A convenient
rule of thumb to determine the flow rate in barrels per minute that corresponds to a fluid velocity of 35
feet per second is:
Maximum flow rate (BPM) = 2 × inside diameter in inches × inside diameter in inches
Example:
Table 3.3 shows the sizes and maximum flowrates allowed thru some common types of valves and
manifolds.
Note The IDs and wall thickness can change with different manufacturers and
specifications and is therefore only intended for use as a guide.
Figures 3.7a and 3.7b on the following page show the dimensions and maximum allowable flowrates
through a variety of different manifold components. These tables assume a fluid velocity of 42 feet per
second which is acceptable for clean fluids only, otherwise a maximum fluid velocity of 35 feet per
second should be used. These tables have been provided courtesy of SPM Flow Control, Inc .Dimensions
and flowrates may differ slightly from other manufacturers.
Figure 3.7a—SPM Flow Control, Inc. table showing dimensions and maximum al-
lowable flowrates through a variety of different manifold components
Figure 3.7b—SPM Flow Control, Inc. table showing dimensions and maximum al-
lowable flowrates through a variety of different manifold components
Both oil-based and water-based fluids are required in the oilfield. The advantages of each of these are
outlined below:
Fluid Additives
Chemical additives generally used in stimulation can be grouped into nine classifications. The following
sections will explain these types and their uses:
• pH control agents
• Clay control agents
• Fluid loss control additives
• Surfactants
• Gelling agents and friction reducers
• Complexors/crosslinkers
• Breakers/stabilizers
• Friction reducers
• Bactericides
• Conductivity Enhancers
pH Control Agents
Most aqueous based stimulation fluids contain a nominal amount of chemicals (common acids and bases)
for the sole purpose of obtaining the proper fluid pH. These chemicals are referred to as pH control
agents or buffers.
pH expresses the degree of acidity or basicity of a solution. The pH scale extends from 0 to 14 as shown
in the table below. A pH of 7 is neutral (neither acidic or basic). An acidic solution will have a pH value
lower than 7. If it is basic (or alkaline) it will have a pH value above 7 (Table 3.4).
The pH scale is useful in evaluating solutions which are slightly acidic or basic. A 0.1% solution of HCL
will have a pH of 1, while a 1% solution of caustic soda (NaOH) will have a pH of 14. The strength of
higher concentrations of hydrochloric acid (HCL) or caustic are expressed as percent rather than pH.
Measuring pH is done with narrow range pH paper or pH meters.
The pH of a fluid is a significant factor in stimulation treatment because it controls variables such as
crosslinker function, temperature stability, iron control problems, polymer hydration, clay control, and
gel stability and break rate. Compatibility of stimulation fluids with the formation is an important
consideration since the effect of fluid pH on clays and the resulting formation permeability can be
significant. Clay and shale formations are best protected in a low pH environment. Rates at which gelling
agents develop viscosity are a direct function of the pH of the liquid system. Adjusting the pH of the
liquid system also controls bacteria. Commonly used pH control additives include:
• sodium bicarbonate
• fumaric acid
• acetic acid
• formic acid
• sodium diacetate
• monosodium phosphate
• sodium carbonate
• sodium hydroxide
Table 3.5 lists the pH control agents used to adjust pH.
Buffers are mixtures of acids and salts of these acids and are resistant to pH change. By using a buffer
listed in Table 3.6, rather than an acid or base, the fluid pH can be maintained even though contaminants
from formation water or other sources tend to try and change it.
Table 3.6—Buffers
Buffer pH
BA-2 1.5-3
BA-20 6-8.5
BA-40 / BA-40L 7-11
Clay Control
Clay Characteristics
Clays are present in almost all oil and gas bearing formations and their presence can cause many
problems in the production of hydrocarbons, particularly where stimulation processes are employed. The
clay composition and its location in the rock matrix can vary extensively, thus complicating control and
treatment when clay minerals are present.
Where water-swelling clay is contacted by foreign water in the formation, an increase in clay swelling
can reduce the size of flow channels and decrease the flow capacity of the rock. In addition, any
appreciable change in the swelling characteristic of the clay may cause some of the clay to be detached
from its original position. Fine particles may be released which can migrate with fluid flow, form bridges
at flow restrictions in the formation, and therefore decrease the effective permeability of the producing
zone.
The clays most commonly found in hydrocarbon-producing formations are smectite, illite, mixed layer,
kaolinite, and chlorite (Table 3.7). Clays have a negative charge on their surfaces.
To minimize the possibility of clay crystals or packets of crystals breaking loose and migrating, any water
that may contact a clay bearing formation should contain a chemical that will not alter the natural water
retention characteristics of the clay.
ClayFix II
CLAYFIX II is a liquid replacement for the various salts used in aqueous fracturing treatments. It
offers an alternative to KCl, NaCl, and CLAYFIX (NH4Cl) as a temporary clay protection additive.
The primary application for CLAYFIX II is in propped fracturing treatments. CLAYFIX II is not
recommended for matrix treatments. The additive can be added to the mixing water while batch
mixing or it can be metered into the flow stream before the other ingredients are added. CLAYFIX
II is compatible will all present LGC formulations.
Note CLAYFIX II cannot be premixed in LGC concentrates. This additive also is not a
substitute for permanent clay control additives, such as salts.
Cla-Sta® Compounds
The Cla-Sta compounds are cationic polymers or oligomers that may be used with fracturing fluids
and acids to stabilize clays. They are most effective if used in a "pre-pad" or thin fluid pumped
before the main fracture treatment and become much less effective when blended with other gelling
agents. ClaSta Compounds can even plug pore spaces if used above recommended concentrations.
Cla-Sta® XP
Cla-Sta XP clay stabilizing agent is designed to be resistant to both acid and chemical removal. It is
intended for use in formations with permeability of 30 millidarcies (mD) or less but is not limited to
that permeability. Cla-Sta XP is an oligomer which provides clay and fines control in most
fracturing, acidizing, and gravel-pack operations and is preferred over other Cla-Sta products for
formations with permeability less than 30 millidarcies. Cla-Sta XP is compatible with many aqueous
stimulation fluids and can be batch mixed into the base fluid or continuously mixed at the blender.
Cla-Sta XP is not a substitute for salts, such as KCl or NaCl and will not provide the immediate clay
protection needed during treatment.
Cla-Sta® FS
Cla-Sta FS mineral fines and clay stabilizing additive is a new polymer designed to stabilize fines
commonly produced from a variety of formations. Cla-Sta FS effectively stabilizes mineral fines that
do not respond to treatment from conventional clay stabilizers. It is readily adsorbed on the
formation surfaces, reducing their dislodgment or movement when exposed to very high rates of
fluid flow. By substantially stabilizing mineral fine particles, solids production, and permeability
impairment caused by fines, migration may be greatly reduced. This fines stabilization is long
lasting.
Hydrocarbons
One method to effectively control clay problems is to not allow the formation to come into contact
with water. Oil-based fracturing fluids do not allow water to be introduced into the formation.
Hydrocarbons such as diesel can be blended with water-based fluids to control leak off into the
fracture face and minimize water contact.
Fluid loss additives are required to function across a wide range of pore size distributions, such as low,
medium or high permeability sections. Another requirement is that a large percentage of formation
permeability needs to be regained after being treated by the additive. Different approaches have been
taken to establish fluid loss control. Traditionally, finely powdered solids have been used to control fluid
loss. As the fluid moves into the pores of the formation, the fluid loss additives build up on the fracture
face and form a filter cake. This reduces fluid loss. Some of the solids are inert while others go into
solution and/or degrade.
Another approach to fluid loss control uses liquid additives that deposit droplets along the fracture fact
to control the loss of fluid. A major advantage of this approach is that no solids that might impair
productivity are left in the formation or fracture.
Water-Based Fluids
WAC-9
WAC-9 is finely powdered sand. It is an excellent fluid loss additive that can be used with water,
acid or oil-based fluids. However, since it is silica, it does not dissolve or degrade over time.
WLC-4
WLC-4 is a particulate fluid loss additive developed for use with water-based gelled fracturing fluids
at temperatures of 140° to 350°F. WLC-4 may be used to control leakoff in formations up to around
50 md or with 100-mesh sand to help control leakoff in natural fractures. At temperatures above
140°F, the additive degrades to low residue material in an aqueous environment. The additive should
be applied at 20 to 50 lb/Mgal to aid leakoff control.
WLC-5
WLC-5 is a fluid loss additive for use in aqueous fluids. It contains an enzyme breaker that allows
it to be more degradable than other starch additives such as Adomite Regain and WLC-4 at low
temperatures. WLC-4 does not contain this enzyme breaker, and the enzyme breaker in Adomite
Regain is not as effective as the breaker in WLC-5. Typical concentrations usually range from 20 to
50 lb/Mgal. WLC-5 can be used at temperatures from 75° to 350°F and permeabilities up to around
50 md.
WLC-6
WLC-6 is a non-damaging fluid-loss additive that helps in reducing gel filter cakes, especially from
borate-crosslinked fluids. Ground to an appropriate particle size for fracturing, it remains solid long
enough to function as a fluid-loss additive, then dissolves in the produced water to ensure cleanup.
As it dissolves, it reduces the surface tension of the filter-cake residue, helping to remove the filter
cake and improve fracture conductivity. WLC-6 is slowly soluble in water and should be applied in
low-to-moderate temperature wells up to 150°F. WLC-6 can also be used with FracPac treatments
in formations with up to 300 md of permeability. Use WLC-6 at concentrations of 25 to 50 lb/Mgal
of fracturing fluid.
WLC-7
WLC-7 fluid loss additive, an organic solid, is a finely ground powder that dissolves slowly in water
as the water temperature rises; therefore, it can be cleaned up as water is produced from the well.
Because of its solubility, WLC-7 is non-damaging. Laboratory tests indicate that WLC-7 helps
reduce the potential damaging effects of borate crosslinked gel filter cakes. WLC-7 can be used in
wells up to 180° F. It should be used in concentrations from 25 - 50 lb/Mgal of fracturing fluid.
Laboratory tests show that WLC-7 is beneficial up to 320 md.
Adomite®Aqua
Adomite Aqua is an older fluid-loss additive for use in water-based fracturing fluids and was
originally developed by Continental Oil Company. It is currently manufactured by Nalco Chemical
Company and is available from all service companies. It is compatible with most water-based gelling
agents and testing has shown some benefit in formations up to 200 md. Although it is compatible
with most stimulation chemicals, including MY-T-OIL IV, it contains solids that are inert, meaning
some residue will be left after treatment. Adomite Aqua is not recommended in hydrochloric acid
solutions stronger than 3%. Normal concentrations used are from 20-50 lb/Mgal.
Adomite Regain
Adomite Regain is a starch-based particulate fluid loss additive used for water-based fracturing
fluids. Designed with an internal enzyme breaker system, it is active at low temperatures.
Concentrations used are normally in the 20 to 50 lb/Mgal range, at temperatures up to 350°F. It can
be used in formations up to 10 md.
Oil-Based Fluids
There are a variety of fluid loss additives applicable to oil-based fracturing fluids.
WAC-9
WAC-9 may be used for fluid loss control with any oil or water-based fracturing fluids or acids.
K-34
K-34 (Bicarbonate of Soda) is used in My-T-Oil IV gels as both a breaker and a fluid loss control
additive. Laboratory tests are required to determine the concentrations used.
Surfactants
A major obstacle to oil production is the infiltration of water into oil-bearing formations. Water can
reduce the sand's effective permeability to oil, resulting in a partial or complete block. Many crude oils
and waters form emulsions that are more viscous than crude oil. Some emulsions have a fluid viscosity
that is several thousand times that of oil. Both blocking water and water-oil emulsions can be present
near the wellbore. Breaking or preventing these emulsions can be of great benefit in increasing the
productive flow of oil to the wellbore.
Surfactants ("surface active agents") have been developed to reduce fluid retention in a formation.
Through the wise use of surfactants, these chemicals can aid in stimulation fluid recovery and reduce the
possibility of emulsions forming in the formation.
Surfactant Definition
A surfactant is defined as a "surface active agent." This means a chemical which, when added to a liquid,
changes the surface tension of the liquid. Emulsifiers, non-emulsifiers, and anti-foaming agents are all
examples of surfactants. In a practical sense, the term is limited to those chemicals that lower the surface
tension of liquids. Surface tension is composed of the forces present in the surface film of all liquids. It
tries to pull the fluid into a form with the least surface area. This would be a sphere or a round droplet
The particles in the surface film are attracted inwardly, causing tension.
Surfactant Usage
Surfactants have been used in conjunction with fracturing treatments for several years. There are four
important effects of these chemicals in fracturing:
• helps prevent water blocks
• helps prevent the creation of emulsions between the injected fluid and the formation fluid
• helps stabilize emulsions when using an emulsified treatment fluid
• aids in fluid recovery
Emulsions that are accidentally created in the formation and do not break spontaneously may reduce the
flow of fluid into the fracture. Emulsions in the fracture may limit the flow of fluid through the fracture
itself. If properly used, a surfactant incorporated in the injected fluid can help prevent the formation of
emulsions during the treatment. The selection of the most effective type and concentration of surfactants
for the prevention of emulsions or fluid blocks can be determined by emulsion and flow tests.
Surfactants vary in chemical composition and the effects they have on oil-water mixtures. Some cause
the formation of oil-water emulsions. Surfactants of this type exist naturally in some crude oils. They
are the cause of common oil field emulsions. These emulsions may be very thick and, when formed in a
formation, will block the flow of well fluids more so than water.
Although emulsions formed in a formation may block the flow of oil, certain surfactants can be used to
develop emulsions that can be used to fracture oil-bearing formations. Acidfrac is an acid-in-oil
emulsion prepared with a specific type of surfactant. It has been successfully used in many fracture
treatments.
Surfactant Composition
Surfactants are composed of an oil soluble group (lipophilic group) and a water-soluble group
(hydrophilic group). These chemicals have the ability to lower the surface tension of a liquid by
adsorbing at the interface between the liquid and a gas. Surfactants lower the interfacial tension by
adsorbing at interfaces between two immiscible (unmixable) liquids. They also reduce contact angles by
adsorbing at interfaces between a liquid and a solid. Surfactants are classified into four major groups,
depending upon the nature of the water-soluble group. These divisions are:
• Anionic
• Cationic
• Nonionic
• Amphoteric
The following model (Figure 3.9) will be used to simplify this discussion.
Surfactant Mechanisms
Surface Tension
Because surfactants are composed of water-soluble and
oil soluble groups, they will absorb at interfaces
between a liquid and a gas, or two immiscible liquids.
Figure 3.14 illustrates how surfactants function to lower
surface tension.
Figure 3.14—Surfactant interaction
The "water-loving" group is more soluble in water than the "oil-loving" group. Therefore, a
surfactant molecule orients itself at the air-water interface with the oil soluble group in the air and
the water-soluble group in the water. This alters the nature of the air-water interface. Depending on
the effectiveness of the surfactant, the interface now is a combination of an "air-water-oil" interface.
Oil has a much lower surface tension than water (Table 3.8). Therefore, the surface tension of a
water/surfactant mixture will be lower than the surface tension of pure water, perhaps as low as oil.
Some effective hydrocarbon surfactants will reduce the surface tension of distilled water to about 27
dynes/cm when used in relatively low concentrations. Another type has been used as an aid for
stimulating tight gas wells. This type of surfactant is based on an oil soluble group composed of a
fluorocarbon chain. Using this type, it is possible to get surface tensions below 20 dynes/cm.
Surfactants will also lower the interfacial tension that develops between two immiscible liquids by
absorption of the surfactants at the oil-water interface.
Wettability
The ability of a surfactant to adsorb at interfaces between liquids and solids and to alter the
wettability of solids is usually explained by an electrochemical approach. Wettability indicates
whether a solid is coated with oil or water. Most formations are composed primarily of mixtures
containing sand, clay, limestone and dolomite.
Sand and clay usually have a negative surface charge. With cationic surfactants, the positive
water-soluble group is adsorbed by the negative silica particle, leaving the oil soluble group to
influence wettability. Therefore, cationics generally oil wet sand. With anionic surfactants, the
negative silicate electrically repulses the negative water-soluble group. Thus the surfactant is not
usually absorbed by sand. Therefore, anionics generally leave silica minerals in a natural water wet
state.
Limestone has a positive surface charge at a pH below 8 and a negative surface charge at pH values
above 9.5. Under oil field conditions most limestone and dolomite formations will have a positive
surface charge. Since anionic surfactants have a negative charge, the water soluble group will be
adsorbed by the positive carbonate particle leaving the oil soluble group to influence wettability.
Because of this, anionics usually oil wet limestone and dolomite formations.
Carbonates do not adsorb cationics; therefore, most cationics will leave limestone and dolomite
naturally water wet. An illustration of the mechanism governing wettability characteristics exhibited
by anionic and cationic surfactants on silicates and carbonates is shown in Figure 3.15.
In the case of nonionic surfactants, the wettability of silicates and carbonates depends primarily on
the weight ratio of the water-soluble group to the oil soluble group.
Blending of Surfactants
Most surfactants used by the petroleum industry are blends of several surfactants with a solvent
present. By selectively blending surfactants, it is possible to obtain a mixture with more universal
properties. This is very important since there are no two producing formations exactly alike.
Therefore, no single surfactant is universally applicable. Even by blending surfactants, it is not yet
possible to have one surfactant that will always satisfactorily perform in every field. Table 3.9 lists
a number of surfactants commonly used by Halliburton and their charges.
Summary
In summary, selection of the most effective type and concentration of surfactants for the prevention
of emulsions or fluid blocks should be determined by emulsion and flow tests. Having made these
tests and selected the correct type and concentration for the surfactant, it is the responsibility of the
frac operator not to substitute for the type or change the concentration of surfactant. If the selected
type surfactant is not available, additional tests will be required to determine a second choice for the
surfactant.
There are many surfactants available for oil field work. Great care should always be observed in their
selection and use for particular conditions. Check with the engineering staff in your district for help
in making selections.
Gelling Agents
Gelling agents are divided into two categories: those for water-based fluids and those for oil or
hydrocarbon base fluids. The two categories will be discussed separately in this unit.
Gelling agents are used for increasing viscosity, reducing friction, controlling fluid loss, etc. Viscosity
(resistance to motion) is the most important condition derived from the use of gelling agents.
A number of water-based gelling agents have been developed for use in the oilfield. Water-soluble
polymers commonly used in oilfield applications are:
Guar
Guar and its derivatives are the most extensively used polymers in fracturing fluids. The guar bean, which
is grown primarily on the Indo Pakistan subcontinent, is a polysaccharide with one of the highest
molecular weights of all naturally occurring water-soluble polymers. The average molecular weight is
believed to be in the range of 1 to 2 million. The guar bean's hull is removed and the endosperm (inside
portion) is ground into a fine powder, which is used as a viscosifier. The guar molecule is in a coiled state
in the powder form. Guar molecules absorb water (a process referred to as hydration) upon being placed
in an aqueous media and uncoil, elongate, and become linear.
Derivatized Guars
Derivatized (modified) guar gelling agents are also manufactured from the guar bean. These agents are
subjected to additional chemical processing, which adds to its cost. This processing reduces the residue
that remains after the gelled fracturing fluid is broken and improves dispersion to enhance mixing
characteristics. Derivatized guars, such as hydroxypropyl guar (HPG) are commonly used in the oilfield.
The characteristics of HPG are:
• Contains 1 to 3% residue by weight
• Higher crosslink viscosities than guar
• Fewer crosslink sites
• Yields 40 lb gel viscosities of 32 to 36 cp at 511 sec-1
• Can tolerate 80% by volume methanol with some HPG derivatives
• More expensive than guar.
Carboxymethyl hydroxypropyl guar (CMHPG) is another commonly used guar derivative in the oilfield.
It is similar to HPG with some additional versatility in crosslinking via the carboxyl groups. CMHPG is
a double derivatized material. Some characteristics of CMHPG include the following
• More sensitive than guar and HPG to brines and electrolyte solutions
• Hydrates well in cold or warm water
• Yields 40 lb gel viscosities of 30 to 32 cps at 500 sec-1 in 2% KCl
• Anionic derivative
• 1 to 2% residue by weight
• Easy to crosslink
• Equivalent in cost to HPG
Cellulose
All cellulose compounds used as fracturing fluid gelling agents are derivatized forms of cellulose.
Cellulose derivatives are polymers made from cotton. They are chemically modified natural products
designed for applications that require a highly efficient gelling agent that contains no solids and leaves
no residue when broken properly.
Hydroxyethel cellulose is currently the most commonly used form of derivatized cellulose products in
the oil field. Unlike guar and its derivatives, HEC only hydrates rapidly at a pH of over 7.0. HEC is most
commonly used for sand control operations. General properties of HEC include the following
Carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC) is a residue free polymer that can be crosslinked; however, CMC is
extremely salt sensitive, which limits its application. Characteristics of CMC include:
• Maximum viscosity and stability with CMC occurs at pH 7 to 9 with fresh water
• Extremely sensitive to divalent metal salts such as CA+2, Zn+2
• Low salt tolerance
• Relatively expensive
The double derivatized carboxymethyl hydroxyethyl cellulose (CMHEC) has found acceptance as a
gelling agent in stimulation fluids. CMHEC has both nonionic and anionic substituent groups.
Characteristics of CMHEC include:
• Residue free
• Can be used with brines
• Can be crosslinked
• Relatively expensive
Xanthan
Biopolymers have been used in drilling fluids for a number of years. Recently, xanthan has been
introduced in fracturing and sand control applications. Xanthan yields much less viscosity per pound of
polymer when compared to guar and cellulose; however, it does have excellent proppant transport
characteristics. Maximum freshwater solution viscosity occurs at a pH of 5.5. At pH values of less than
7, chrome or aluminum will crosslink xanthan gum solutions. Properties of xanthan include:
• Residue 3% by weight
• Expensive
• Can crosslink
• Excellent proppant transport.
Polyacrylamides
Polyacrylamides (PAM) are used in fracturing fluids as friction reducers. In the dry form these are used
at concentrations of 2 to 5 lb per 1,000 gal fluid. PAM's can be cationic or anionic and are residue free.
Properties of polyacrylamides include:
• Relatively expensive
• Hard to mix without creating gel balls
• Extremely high molecular weight - 1 to 20 million.
• Produce the greatest friction reduction (anionic polymers)
• Used in low concentration.
Gelling agents are normally found in fracture acidizing treatments where viscosity is used to help achieve
deeper acid penetration. However, in a matrix treatment, while deep penetration is not the objective,
viscosity can be an advantage in fines removal. If used for this purpose, the concentration of the acid
gelling agent will be much less than a similar application in fracture acidizing. In addition, viscosity
derived from a surfactant rather than a polymer will minimize the potential for additional damage.
Although the fluid systems using the same base polymers are composed of the same base materials, each
one is specially formulated to tailor its performance to meet particular needs.
Many of the dry powder gels are also available in a liquid form to simplify mixing. These contain a slurry
of ~50% gel polymer + stabilizer and ~50% hydrocarbon base fluid such as diesel.
Table 3.11 gives the names, types, and equivalents for the LGCs.
Table 3.11—Names/Types/Equivalents for LGCs
Name Type Equivalent
LGC-I,II,III Water-based
LGC-IV Guar WG-22, WG-31
LGC-V HPG WG-11
LGC-8 Guar WG-26
LGC-9, 10 Guar MeOH
LGC-12 CMG
Guar 34 3 C NS NS R
HPG 36 3 C NS NS R
CMHPG 32 3 C NS NS R
CMC 55 3 IC NS NS RF
HEC 37 3 C NS NS RF
CMHEC 32 3 C NS NS RF
Xanthan 34 1 C MS MS RF
Polyacrylamide
34 2 IC S S RF
(partially hydrolyzed)
Legend: C=Compatible IC = Incompatible MC = Moderately compatible
S = Stable MS = Moderately stable NS = Not stable
R = Residue RF = Residue free
140 lbm/1,000 gal at 300 rpm (cp)
2Order
of shear stability (1 the least shear stable, 3 the most); Xanthan gum solution viscosity is not reduced
permanently by shear
3In broken gel
In the fracturing of certain extremely water-sensitive formations, even the use of potassium chloride,
calcium chloride and sodium chloride solutions may not be effective in reducing clay swelling or
formation particle migration. This can usually be determined from laboratory tests on formation cores
or from field treating results. In such cases, an oil-based fluid should be considered. However, when
using a hydrocarbon-based fluid system, safety to prevent fires on location is a main concern and good
fire fighting equipment is a must.
To meet the needs of treating water sensitive formations, gelling agents have been developed to give
structure to oil-based fluids. The four basic fluid systems below are available for oil-based fracturing
fluids and are a culmination of years of research.
MY-T-OIL IV
Earlier gelled oil systems had to be batch mixed prior to pumping the fracture treatment. Extensive
laboratory research and field-testing have resulted in the development of a continuously mixed gelled
oil system. This system can reduce the time on location caused by batch mixing, as well as eliminate
waste and disposal problems caused by leftover gelled fluid in the storage tanks.
The My-T-Oil IV system uses a two-component system. The components are MO-75 gelling agent
and MO-76 activator. The chemicals are added at a 1:1 ratio with the normal usage concentration
being 4 to 6 gal/Mgal. The final viscosity of this system will vary greatly depending on the type of
hydrocarbon used and the chemical concentrations. For refined hydrocarbons such as diesel or
kerosene, the viscosity should be in the range of 100 - 400 cp at 170 sec-1. MY-T-OIL IV is effective
at temperatures up to 200°F.
MY-T-OIL V
A recent extension of the MY-T-OIL series, MY-T-OIL V is a crosslinked, anionic surfactant,
oil-gellant system. It uses MO-85 anionic surfactant and MO-86 crosslinker. The use of surfactant
chemistry prevents damage by polymer residue. The chemicals are added at a 1:1 ratio with the
normal usage concentration being 4 to 9 gal/Mgal, depending on temperature. My-T-Oil V is
capable of viscosities over 600 cp at 170 sec-1 depending on temperature, additive concentration and
hydrocarbon used. The system is designed for continuous-mix stimulation of oil reservoirs over a
wide temperature range up to 275°F. Crude oils that gel easily may be effectively used in this
application to reduce costs, but the MY-T-OIL V system will gel a wide range of crude oils.
However, the risk of paraffin and/or asphaltene precipitation in the formation is greater than with
refined fluids such as diesel.
MISCO2 FRAC
MY-T-OIL V's counterpart, MISCO2 FRAC fracturing system, provides similar benefits for gas
reservoirs, including those which are low pressured and/or water sensitive. MISCO2 FRAC is used
with up to 50% CO2 by total volume. In this application, the system provides excellent fracture and
formation conductivity with rapid load fluid recovery. MISCO2 FRAC employs the same gelling
system used in MY-T-OIL V.
Super Emulsifrac (Oil Internal Gelled Water External Emulsion Fracturing Fluid)
Super Emulsifrac is the Halliburton name for a fracturing process developed by Exxon Production
Research Company (EPR). This process uses an emulsion composed of an internal hydrocarbon
phase (such as diesel, kerosene, condensate, or crude oil) and an external water phase containing a
gelling agent such as WG-22, WG-31 or WG-11. The emulsion is stabilized with an emulsifier such
as SEM-5, SEM-6, or SEM-7 that is contained in the gelled water phase. The internal hydrocarbon
phase is between 50 and 80% of the total volume, and the remaining volume is composed of the
gelled water, emulsifier, and other additives.
Super Emulsifrac fluids are similar to N2, or CO2, foams, except that a hydrocarbon constitutes the
internal phase of the two-phase fluid rather than gas. With the application of constant internal phase
principles to emulsion fluids, friction pressures can be controlled resulting higher sand
concentrations.
Super Emulsifrac can be used up to 300° with the proper emulsifier concentrations.
Additional References
Fracturing Service Manual - HalWorld.
A major concern with crosslinked fluids is their shear stability (ability to resist a decrease in viscosity
under shear) while pumping down the tubular goods and through perforations. This concern led to the
development of delayed crosslinkers that are designed to inhibit crosslinking in the tubulars.
CL-11
CL-11 is a light yellow, water-sensitive, alkaline liquid. It contains a titanium-ion complex in an
alcoholic solution. CL-11 can be added to Thermagel or VersaGel HT or it can be mixed with the
primary crosslinkers in these systems (CL-24 and CL-18) to achieve accelerated crosslink times.
Crosslink time testing should be conducted with actual source water before performing the
stimulation treatment.
CL-18
CL-18 is an older, titanate complex crosslinker for use in the VersaGel HT fluid system. It is a
yellow-gold colored liquid and is flammable, with a flash point of 74°F. It is a delayed crosslinker
which can be accelerated with temperature or the addition of CL-11.
CL-22
CL-22 is an oil-base slurry of borate minerals used in Hybor fluid systems. CL-28M is a water-based
slurry of borate minerals. Both CL-22 and CL-28M provide delayed crosslink to borate crosslinked
fluids, similar in apparent viscosity to the non-delayed borate crosslinked BoraGel fluid.
CL-23
The crosslinking agent, CL-23 is used in the PurGel III fluid systems. CL-23 is a
delayed-crosslinking agent that is compatible with CO2. It is an aqueous, colorless liquid containing
a zirconium complex. It may be diluted with fresh water for convenience of metering. Crosslinker
concentration used depends upon the buffering system employed.
CL-24
CL-24 is a pale yellow, liquid zirconium-ion complex that is used as a delayed temperature-activated
crosslinker in the Thermagel fluid system. The crosslinker begins activation at 100° to 110°F. The
base gel fluid will crosslink rapidly at 140°F. Each drum of CL-24 is dated and the oldest stock
should always be used first. CL-24 is a flammable liquid. The recommended concentration of CL-24
is 0.10 gal per 10 lb of base gel per 1,000 gal of fluid.
CL-28M
CL-28M is a water-based suspension crosslinker of a borate mineral used in Hybor fluid systems and
was developed as a low cost alternative to CL-22 (see above). Since CL-28M is water-based, it does
not have the flash point concerns associated with CL-22. The suspension properties of CL-28M have
been improved to provide better stability. However, containers should be inspected for solids settling
and remixed if needed. Material loss could occur if the suspension adheres to the sides of the
container.
CL-29
CL-29 is a fast acting zirconium complex that was introduced as an accessory crosslinker for the
PurGel III fluid system. CL-29 provides a more rapid crosslink time when used with CL-23. It can
also be used as a stand-alone crosslinker.
CL-31
CL-31 is a concentrated solution of non-delayed borate crosslinker originally designed for use in
BoraGel fluid systems. Also used to control crosslink time for Hybor fluids, it provides the
convenience of a concentrated, stable crosslinker solution. One gallon of CL-31 contains the
equivalent of 2.0 lb of K-38, has a high pH and is highly caustic. CL-31 has no flash point and has a
pour point of -5°F. If diluted with water or aqueous sodium hydroxide, CL-31 will freeze above -5°F.
Because of its high pH, CL-31 can be used as a self-buffering crosslinker.
BC-200
BC-200 is a delayed crosslinker and functions as both crosslinker and buffer for use in the Delta Frac
fluid systems. It is a dark brown suspension of fine particles in a hydrocarbon. No additional
buffering agents, acids, or bases are required to adjust the pH of the fluid system. Used at the proper
concentrations, BC-200 buffers fluids to the proper pH. The resulting design raises the pH of the fluid
but does not increase crosslink time. In fact, adding caustic or a buffer to raise the pH of the fluid out
of the proper range will ruin the fluid by over-crosslinking, resulting in much lower viscosity. The
final pH of this system should be approximately 9 to 9.5. Although the crosslink time of the system
cannot be increased, it can be decreased by adding an instant borate crosslinker such as K-38,
BC-140 or CL-31.
CL-36
CL-36 is a new mixed metal crosslinker specifically designed for the Delta 275 fluid system. It is a
yellow, alcohol based system with a flash point of 81°F. The concentration used is a function of the
temperature and pH of the final fluid system (generally 1 to 2.2 gal/Mgal). CL-36 is a delayed
crosslinker that can be accelerated with the addition of CL-31.
The viscosity of fracturing fluids is increased when gelling agents and crosslinkers are used to aid
proppant transport and placement. This increased viscosity is desirable during pump-in procedures.
However, if this viscosity is not reduced the treated well may not flow. The stimulation fluid must have
the capability to decrease in viscosity (break) following proppant placement. The decrease in fluid
viscosity is necessary to
• minimize return of proppant
• maximize return of stimulation fluids to the surface
The decrease in the fluid viscosity is usually achieved using chemicals referred to as gelling agent
breakers or gel breakers. The gel breaker functions by breaking the long chain polymers into shorter
chain segments, allowing the fluid more mobility with controlled and predictable viscosity decrease. The
degree of reduction in viscosity is controlled by the breaker type, pH, gel concentration, breaker
concentration, time, and temperature.
Breaker Types
Chemical breakers used to reduce viscosity of guar and derivatized guar polymers are generally grouped
into three classes: oxidizers, enzymes, and acids. All of these materials reduce the viscosity of the gel by
breaking connective linkages in the guar polymer chain. Once the connective bonds in the polymer are
broken, the resulting pieces of the original polymer chain are the same regardless of the type of breaker
used.
A breaker should be selected based on its performance in the temperature, pH, time, and desired viscosity
profile for each specific treatment.
Enzyme Breakers
Enzymes are referred to as Nature's catalysts because most biological processes involve an enzyme.
Enzymes are large protein molecules. Proteins consist of a chain of building blocks called amino acids.
In Oilfield applications, breaker enzymes cause hydrolysis, or the addition of water, to the guar polymer.
This causes viscosity to decrease. However, because of the characteristics of enzymes, they are only
effective in a relatively narrow range of temperatures and pH levels.
GBW-3™ / GBW-30™
GBW-30 is a white powdered enzyme breaker. It is used below 120°F and below pH 8.5. Like
GBW-3, GBW-30 is a water-soluble enzyme breaker for aqueous-based gelling agents at
temperatures below 120°F (48.8°C). Its reactive strength is approximately 10 times that of GBW-3.
HPH
HPH breaker is an enzyme breaker specifically designed for borate fracturing fluids up to
approximately 140°F. HPH breaker is a high-pH, stable enzyme breaker solution that generally
maintains its activity at higher pH than GBW-30 enzyme breaker; between pH 7 and pH 10. Between
70 and 140°F, HPH breaker's pH range of 8.5 to 9.5 is suitable for BoraGel and Delta FracSM fluids.
This pH range contrasts with the pH range of GBW-30 breaker which displays its maximum activity
below pH 7. Under lower temperature conditions, HPH breaker will function at even higher pH
values.
N-Zyme 1 / N-Zyme 3
N-Zyme 1 enzyme breaker and N-Zyme 3 enzyme breaker are new breakers for use with fracturing
fluids at temperatures up to 140°F. N-Zyme 1 and N-Zyme 3 breakers can be used in place of GBW-3
breaker, GBW-30 breaker, and HPH breaker. N-Zyme 3, which is three times more concentrated than
N-Zyme 1, is specifically formulated for lower-temperature applications.
OptiFlo-HTE
OptiFlo-HTE is an encapsulated, delayed release, high temperature, enzyme breaker. It is a reddish
colored granular solid. OptiFlo-HTE is the direct replacement for the obsolete OptiFlo-E. The
recommended temperature range for application is from 75 to 175°F.
The merits of an encapsulated enzyme breaker are many. The encapsulation of OptiFlo-HTE allows
the enzyme to be shielded from the fluid environment and can delay denaturization due to
temperature exposure when compared to a liquid enzyme breaker as shown in Figure 3.18. Liquid
enzyme or solid un-encapsulated enzyme breakers cause an almost immediate reduction in viscosity
when added to stimulation fluids; this can lower the ability of the fracturing fluid to transport
proppant. The controlled release rate of an encapsulated breaker allows higher concentrations to be
placed throughout the stimulation treatment.
Oxidizing Breakers
Sodium, potassium, and ammonium persulfate have been used effectively as breakers for over 30 years.
In these types of breakers, oxidation-reduction chemical reactions occur as the polymer chain is broken.
SP
SP Breaker is a white granular oxidizing material used as a breaker at temperatures above 120°F. It
may be used below 120°F in conjunction with an activator. Above 180°deg, persulfate breakers
become highly unstable and create unpredictable breaks.
ViCon HT or ViCon NF
Powder form ViCon-HT or liquid form ViCon-NF is a powerful oxidizing breaker for use with
GEL-STA in fracturing fluids, and is the premiere breaker at temperatures above 200°F. Vicon can
also be run below 200°F with an activator. Although ViCon-NF is compatible with GEL-STA in
dilute fluids, such as fracturing fluids, ViCon-NF should not be mixed with GEL-STA or GEL-STA
Optiflo II
In low temperature, high pH fluids, enzyme breakers are not effective; therefore, there is a need for
a delayed release, low temperature oxidizing breaker. OptiFlo II delayed breaker is coated
ammonium persulfate that is designed to be used in low temperature applications. The coating on
OptiFlo II allows the breaker to be released slowly by diffusion across the slightly permeable coating.
The release profile of OptiFlo II at 80°, 100°, and 120°F show less than 10% of the breaker is released
in 1 hour, but at least 70% of breaker is released in 24 hours. This product is not designed to be used
in applications where the actual fluid temperature is above 125°F. However, the application of
OptiFlo II can be extended to jobs with bottomhole static temperatures (BHST) above 125°F using
formation cool down. Field experience and temperature programs can aid in the prediction of
downhole fluid temperatures during the job. The addition of OptiFlo II to the pad is not
recommended, but OptiFlo II can be added to the pad fluid in jobs where static break tests, data, and
fluid rheology data support its use.
Deposition of filter cake during a job can decrease the conductivity of the generated fracture.
Delayed release breakers help improve fracture conductivity by cleaning up the filter cake and
proppant pack. This cleanup is accomplished by two beneficial features of delayed release breakers.
• The capability of adding higher breaker concentrations allows enough to be added to break
the filter cake and gel remaining in the proppant pack.
• The breaker is a solid and cannot be lost to the formation during fluid leak off.
Optiflo III
OptiFlo III is a delayed release breaker that has improved performance as a result of a new,
innovative coating technology that provides less early time release of the breaker than previous
delayed release breakers. OptiFlo III improves gel breaking technology by limiting the contact time
of the breaker with the fracturing fluid and concentrating the breaker in the fracture. Limiting the
breaker contact with the fracturing fluid allows increased breaker concentration without sacrificing
fluid performance. Higher breaker concentrations, as well as concentration of the breaker in the
fracture, improves proppant pack cleanup and results in improved proppant conductivity of the
created fracture. OptiFlo III contains ammonium persulfate (AP breaker) as the active component.
This breaker is designed to be used in actual fluid temperatures of 130° to 200°F.
Acid Breakers
Acid also provides the same break via hydrolysis as an enzyme. Acid, however, poses various difficulties
for practical applications. Acid is not used as a guar polymer breaker very often because of cost, poor
break rate control, chemical compatibility difficulties, and corrosion of metal goods. Another difficulty
with acid breakers is that the formation may act as a buffer. A small amount of acid introduced as a
breaker may be totally consumed by the formation water and minerals. This absorption could quickly
change the pH of the fracturing fluid to a point where breaking may not occur. Most formation brines
have a pH between 6 and 8.
The applications for acid breakers are limited, with two exceptions that involve delayed release type
acids. First, a delayed release acid may be used to un-crosslink a borate. Second, delayed release acid
may also be useful with enzyme breakers. Especially at low temperatures, the use of enzymes in borate
crosslinked fluids is often effective. To allow the enzyme to be effective in the pH 9 to 11 borate fluid,
delayed release acids can be used to lower the fluid pH value to a range where the enzymes are effective.
MatrixFlo II
MatrixFlo II is a liquid, delayed release acid breaker that deeply penetrates a formation matrix to
provide a more complete break and enhanced fracture conductivity. When used in Delta Frac,
BoraGel, and Hybor fracturing fluids MatrixFlo II breaker can controllably decrease fluid viscosity
by lowering the pH and uncrosslinking a crosslinked gel network. When MatrixFlo II breaker is used
with enzymes, it will also lower the pH of the system and initiate enzyme breaker activity to degrade
the polymer backbone further. MatrixFlo II breaker can be used effectively at temperatures up to
180°F. MatrixFlo II breaker significantly improves the regained permeability of the fluid system.
OptiFlo-LT
OptiFlo LT is a delayed release acid additive that decreases the pH of fracturing fluids. OptiFlo LT
can be used in BoraGel and Hybor fluids to decrease fluid pH to initiate enzyme breaker activity (to
degrade gel polymer) and to reverse the borate crosslink. OptiFlo LT was developed to be used in
conjunction with enzyme breakers at temperatures below 120°F.
OptiFlo LT is designed to lower the pH value of borate crosslinked fracturing fluid. It can be used
in other fluids where a delayed decreased in fluid pH is desired. Unlike previous delayed release
additives, OptiFlo LT has a fast release mechanism. In general, OptiFlo LT itself will not break the
gel polymer of a borate crosslinked fluid, but when used in conjunction with OptiFlo HTE
(encapsulated enzyme), a broken gel will result. The combination of OptiFlo LT and OptiFlo HTE
offers an alternative to the use of oxidizing breakers.
Where
Gelled-Oil Breakers
K-34
K-34 is used as the breaker for MY-T-OIL IV gels. Concentration range is 20 to 50 lb/Mgal based
on fluid temperature. K-34 is a finely divided, white, free-flowing powder. It is not considered
dangerous; however, it should be handled as a dusting material. It also possesses fluid loss control
properties and can contribute fluid loss control in the MY-T-OIL IV fluid.
HL Breaker
HL Breaker is used as a breaker for the MY-T-OIL IV fluid where there are bottomhole temperatures
less than 120°F and/or the need for short gel break times. Concentrations range from 5 to 10 lb/Mgal,
based on the gel concentration and bottom hole temperature.
MO-IV
MO-IV is a white powder breaker developed for the MY-T-OIL V fluid system. This process is
currently proprietary information. It is effective from 70° to 200°F.
MO-V
MO-V is a white powder breaker developed for the MY-T-OIL V fluid system. This breaker's
makeup is currently proprietary information. It is used from 201° to 275°F.
Breaker Activators
Just as there is a need to add activators to speed up crosslink times, there is also a need for activators to
better control break times. CAT (catalyst) LT, CAT-3, and CAT-4 are chemicals that are used for this
purpose.
ViCon-NF Breaker (or ViCon-HT Breaker) has been very successful as a high temperature breaker, but
below 200°F it reacts too slowly to be useful in the time period desired. By using a catalyst to "activate"
the Vicon, its lower temperature limit can be reduced. Due to the high reactivity and thermal instability
of persulfates, the activated ViCon systems are the breakers of choice for fluids at 170 to 200°F. They
can also be used as low as 150°F, but the persulfate systems may be as effective and more economical.
The other oxidizing breakers can also be activated to function below their lower temperature limits.
Stabilizers
Gel breakers historically have been used to accelerate gel degradation. However, at sufficiently high
temperatures, either pH or temperature may break the viscosity of the gel prematurely. At high
temperatures, gel extenders may be needed to increase the temperature stability of gelled fluids, which
results in a higher retained viscosity at temperature for a longer period of time. There three ways to
stabilize gels; methanol, Gel Sta, and pH control.
The safety precautions required for the usage of methanol based fracturing fluids are similar to those
followed for handling high gravity crude oils and condensates. When the flash point of a
methanol/water mixture is reached, the mixture becomes highly flammable due to the high
concentrations of methanol vapors above the fluid. Unfortunately, unlike high gravity crudes and
condensates, the methanol flame is not visible and no smoke is produced as the material burns. The
heat from the flame will be the first sign of a methanol fire.
pH control
Maintaining a pH above 7 will also help stabilize water-based gels.
Bactericides/Biocides
Bactericides are used to destroy or control bacteria. Bacteria can cause viscosity instability in batch
mixed gels. When conditions are favorable, sufficient numbers of bacteria can be the chief cause of gel
degradation.
Bacteria Conditions
Some of the most favorable environments for bacteria are dirty frac tanks and mixing water. Dirty frac
tanks often contain several gal of bacteria-ridden decomposed gel from previous jobs. When new gel is
added, the bacteria have a new food source. When the conditions are favorable, some species may even
attain maximum concentrations within twenty-four hours.
Bacteria feed on gel by releasing enzymes. The enzymes degrade the gel to sugar, and the bacteria absorb
the sugar through their cell walls. The enzymes released are very similar to the low temperature breaker
GBW-3. A simplified cycle for the degrading of the polymer by bacteria is shown in Figure 3.20.
Bacteria Types
There are thousands of different kinds, or strains, of bacteria that have been classified. Many thousands
have not. They are among the simplest forms of non-vegetative organisms. Because they are living, they
have the same needs as other forms of life: a source of energy, carbon, nitrogen, sulfur and phosphorus,
metallic elements, vitamins and water. They can also adapt to changing environments. Bacteria can be
classified by their environmental needs:
Bactericides
Bactericides should be handled with care. Anything that can destroy bacteria may be dangerous to
handlers.
Caustic
Caustic is used to adjust the treating water pH upward and can be an effective bactericide if done
properly. Add the caustic to each tank of water to be treated until the pH of the water is greater than
11.0 throughout the tank. This will control bacteria over extended periods of time and can also be
used as an effective quick-kill technique.
BE-3
BE-3 is a biocide that should be handled in a very safe and careful manner. BE-3 is an effective,
extremely fast-killing biocide at low concentrations (0.1 gal/Mgal). Maximum effectiveness of BE-3
will be attained if the entire volume of the biocide is placed in the frac tank with the first load of water
as the tank is being filled. This procedure places a high enough concentration of biocide in the bottom
of the tank where bacteria and a large portion of their enzymes can be destroyed. Addition of the
biocide to a full tank will result in killing the bacteria but not affecting the enzymes. BE-3 degrades
rapidly at pH levels greater than 7.0. Therefore, its use should be restricted to fluid with pH's less
than 7.0.
BE-3S
BE-3S biocide is a rapid killing, board-spectrum biocide packaged in water-soluble bags for safety
and ease of use. A powdered version of BE-3, BE-3S provides all the treatment benefits of BE-3
while helping to eliminate handling and disposal problems associated with liquids.
BE-5
BE-5 is a broad spectrum biocide. It is used to control the growth of microorganism populations
commonly found in source waters for fracturing and stimulation processes. BE-5 is effective against
most types of bacteria, fungi, and algae. It controls population growth by acting as a metabolic
inhibitor. Although slower acting than other biocides, it has proven to be reliable.
BE-5 is a nonionic, nonfoaming, degradable biocide with a broad pH stability range. The active
ingredient is absorbed into Fullers earth, which renders the solid product as a nondusting material
that is much safer for handling than other solid or liquid biocides. It is conveniently packaged in a 6
lb plastic bottle containing a sufficient dosage for one 20,000 gal frac tank. One container of BE-5
biocide (6 lb) should be added to each 20,000 gal frac tank with the first load of water. BE-5 may
not be premixed in LGC concentrates. The oil phase in the LGC will inhibit the release of the biocide
from the Fullers earth.
BE-6
BE-6 is a new bactericide that addresses the issue of packaging and persistence of kill. This material
is nonionic and provides a broad-spectrum control of bacteria. BE-6 functions similar to BE-5; it has
a slow rate of kill (6 to 10 hours) and controls growth by inhibiting the metabolic pathway of the
bacteria. BE-6 is a white, solid powder placed in a water-soluble bag to improve handling and ease
of addition. The water-soluble bag is contained in a protective outer bag that must be removed prior
to addition to the frac tank. Three of the 1-lb water-soluble bags provide the normal dosage for a
single 20,000-gal frac tank.
CAT-1
The use of biocides to treat tanks of fluid for bacteria control has been used to control active bacteria
particularly during warm weather. However, it has recently been determined that even during winter
months bacteria can assume a sporulated form that resists the action of biocides such as BE-5.
Although these particular bacteria may not prematurely break the gel, our customers have expressed
a desire to kill these bacteria if found during bacteria counts. CAT-1 is available as sodium
hypochlorite (household bleach) from most chemical suppliers in major cities. Usually found in
concentrations of 10 or 15% sodium hypochlorite, it is normally used at 0.5 gal of a 10% solution or
0.33 gal of a 15% solution per 1,000 gal of water to be treated. The disadvantage of CAT-1 is that
because it is an excellent oxidizer, GEL-STA must be added to the treated water to neutralize it prior
to adding a gelling agent.
Conductivity Enhancers
SandWedgeTM
The conductivity enhancement additives came as a direct result of research to find a liquid proppant
flowback control additive. The SandWedge materials that were produced and are continuously being
improved were found to have the unique property of improving the flow of fluids through proppant.
There are three mechanisms that allow this to happen:
• Coating each grain improves breaker efficiency. When the proppant is coated with
SandWedge, gel cannot coat the proppant. This property increases proppant conductivity in
two ways. First the breakers are more efficient as they are able to break gels by having more
"break" sites available to them and secondly, the proppant pack itself is not susceptible to
gel damage.
• Porosity improvement in low stress environments. In closure stresses less than 4,000 psi, the
porosity of the proppant pack, when treated with SandWedge, retains its cubic porosity
pattern. At this pattern, the pack has about 48% porosity. At 4,000 psi closure, the majority
of the pack is in a rhombohedral packing and the pack porosity is reduced to 26%. In
proppant packs, porosity is directly related to permeability; therefore, the higher the porosity
the higher the permeability of the pack.
• SandWedge alters vertical proppant distribution during the settling process. A further
benefit of SandWedge's tackiness is that proppant tends to form in clumps or bundles. This
has the effect of causing the proppant mass to maintain its cubic porosity shape until acted
on by closure forces greater than 4,000 psi. This occurrence requires that frac fluid flow
through the mass rather than around it during settling. That impacts proppant settling in a
positive way.
SandWedgeTM NT
SandWedgeTM NT, which uses the dry proppant coating method, was designed to make
SandWedgeTM compatible with most frac fluids and surfactants. Dry coating means that instead of
adding the material to a fracturing fluid with proppant already in it, SandWedgeTM NT is allowed to
coat the proppant before being introduced to the fluid. It greatly reduces the sensitivity to high pH
fluids and high salt concentrations. While the core of SandWedgeTM remains the same, NT uses a
safer and more environmentally friendly solvent than the previous version. SandWedgeTM NT can
thus be used in many more frac fluids because incompatibility issues have been greatly reduced.
5,000
4,500
Conductivity, md-ft
4,000
3,500
3,000
2,500
2,000 Fibrous Strips
1,500
1,000 20/40 Sand No Treatment
500
0
2,000 SandWedge Treatment
3,000
4,000
6,000
SandwedgeTM XS
SandWedgeTM XS is designed for wells in which proppant flow back is identified as the primary
source for declines in production. The addition of 5% ER-1 will make SandWedgeTM NT 10-20
times more sticky and greatly increase the proppant packs resistance to flow back. If XS is run, a
reduction in conductivity can be expected, in the range of 10-15%.
ER-1
ER-1 resin is a clear, viscous liquid that is mixed with SandWedge™ polymer before the job, or
added on-the-fly into the blender tub during a SandWedge™ NT dry-coat treatment. The resin
additive increases the molecular weight of SandWedge™ polymer by partially crosslinking it,
greatly increasing its viscosity, tackiness, and resistance to high-velocity flow. Typically, ER-1 resin
is used at a concentration of 5%, based on the SandWedge™ NT volume. If high concentrations of
ER-1 resin are used with SandWedge™ polymer (>25%), a high-strength thermoplastic polymer can
result from the high degree of crosslinking.
Acids
Major acids used in chemical stimulation include hydrochloric acid, hydrofluoric-hydrochloric acid
mixtures, and organic acids. The following explains the main difference between these acids.
Hydrochloric Acid
Hydrochloric (HCL) acid containing inhibitors is the base solution for most oil field acidizing treatments.
Depending on the use and requirements of the treatments, the concentration may range from 1% to about
35%. Hydrochloric acid reacts rapidly with carbonate formations and is used in treating sandstone
formations. HCL can serve as the basic acid for damage removal in addition to matrix and fracture
acidizing.
Hydrochloric acid is a mixture of hydrogen and chlorine gases dissolved in water. This gas is called
hydrogen chloride and is readily soluble in water up to 42% by weight at 60°F. However, a solution of
this concentration is impractical since hydrogen chloride gas will come out of hydrochloric acid at
temperatures above 60°F.
Commercially available hydrochloric acid has been standardized at 20° Be (Baume). This is equivalent
to 31.45% acid, by weight, with a density of 9.67 lb/gal. Higher concentrations of acid can be purchased
at 22° Be, or 35.2% acid. It has a specific gravity of 1.179 and a density of 9.82 lb/gallon.
Hydrofluoric-Hydrochloric Acid
A Hydrofluoric-Hydrochloric (HF) acid mixture is the basic acid for treating sandstone formations with
less than 20% HCL solubility. These mixtures are used for removal of damage caused by drilling mud,
filtrate water, water-swollen clays, migrating clays, and other small formation particles. HF acid is
typically prepared in the field by adding ammonium bi-fluoride (ABF) to HCL.
Additional Acids
Two organic acids also used are formic and acetic. These are weaker than hydrochloric acid and exhibit
less corrosion problems than HCL; which means their hydrogen ions are released more slowly than HCL
with most materials found in wells. Ten-percent formic acid will dissolve as much limestone as eight-
percent HCL. Six percent HCL will dissolve as much limestone as ten-percent acetic acid. Due to their
low degree of corrosiveness, organic acids can be used at higher temperatures for acidizing treatments.
Acetic acid is the only acid that won't damage chrome plating. It is useful for acidizing wells that contain
pumps using chrome plated parts. Organic acids may be used with HCL to allow deeper penetration and
to provide unique etching properties with some formations.
Acid Safety
Safety is a top priority in all job procedures. Before pumping or handling acids or other stimulation
chemicals, you should study the safety precautions given in the Chemical Stimulation Manual excerpts
on HalWorld.
Safety Precautions
Some critical safety precautions are as follows:
Note When washing eyes, use a gentle flow of water when rinsing. You could damage an
eyeball or even wash it out of its socket with a heavy stream of water.
• NO SMOKING around an acid tank. Tanks containing acid or that have had acid in them
can have an explosive mixtures of gases and liquids trapped inside. Crude oil vapors mixed
with air or hydrogen gas present in a tank is also a possibility. Hydrochloric acid reacts with
steel to produce iron chloride and hydrogen gas-a potentially explosive situation.
• Even though an acid tank is coated with a sealant, there may be some exposed metal.
Hydrogen gas could be present.
• Always add the water to the tank first and then add the concentrated acid. Never add water
to acid or fill the tank with acid first. This increases the risk of splashing and can generate
a large amount of heat.
• Hydrogen, mixed with air in the ratio of one part per 24 parts, is an explosive mixture. For
this reason, be aware of metal connections when loading hoses. They could strike the tank
and ignite an explosion with the smallest of sparks.
• Clothes contaminated with chemicals should be removed and thoroughly washed before
wearing them again. Wash off any chemical spills with water immediately.
• Wear a dust mask when handling powders. Inhalation of any powdered material can be
irritating even if the chemical is not toxic.
• The safety rules given here are a few of the rules listed in the Chemical Stimulation excerpts
on HalWorld. Be sure to study the remaining rules. An important section to be read in the
safety section of the Chemical Stimulation manual on HalWorld is "Hydrogen Sulfide".
Reaction rates and products are important considerations in acidizing. The various characteristics can
have an effect on the choice of acid systems.
HCL Reactions
When 1,000 gal of 15% hydrochloric acid solution reacts with calcium carbonate (limestone), it will
dissolve 10.9 cubic feet (1,843 lb) of the limestone. The products resulting from "spending" the 15%
HCL solution upon the limestone will be:
Concentrations of HCL acid solutions may range from 1% to approximately 35% depending on the
use and requirements of the treatment. It may be your responsibility to mix the various acid blends
required in stimulation treatment applications. Tables such as Table 3.13 (Page 3-49) have been
developed to assist you in determining the proper amounts of concentrated acid and water to use
when mixing an acid solution These tables are usually posted in acid terminals.
Information for both 22 °Be and 20 °Be acid is given in the table. Before using the table, find out
which of the two acid concentrations are being stocked in the service center.
To illustrate the use of the table, assume that 20 °Be acid is stocked in the storage tanks and that you
need to mix 1,000 gal of 15% HCL acid solution. You need to determine how much water to add to
the acid transport and how much strong acid to add to the water to make the solution.
In Table 3.13 (Page 3-49), locate the heading "gal 20% Be Acid and Water To Make 1,000 Gals
Acid." Under this heading observe that acid and water amounts are given in separate columns. In
the extreme left-hand column "HCL% Acid" is given. Under this column locate 15 % and move
horizontally across the chart. You will read 442 gal of 20 °Be acid and 558 gal of water required to
mix 1,000 gal of 15% HCL acid solution.
To calculate the volume of dilute acid that can be prepared from a certain volume of strong acid, use the
following formula.
Volume of Strong =
(vol.of dilute )(%HCl in dilute )(SG of dilute )
(%HCl in strong )(SG of strong )
It may be necessary to calculate the volume of dilute acid which can be prepared from a certain volume
of concentrated acid. Use the following formula to calculate the volume of dilute acid.
Volume of Dilute =
(vol. of strong)(%HCl in strong )(SG of strong )
(%HCl in dilute)(SG of dilute)
Example 1:
or
1,000 × 15 × 1.075
Vol. of strong =
31.45 × 1.16
16,130
Vol. of strong =
36.5
442 gal of 31.45% acid made to 1,000 gal with water gives a 15% solution
Example 2:
or
Corrosion Inhibitors
Corrosion is defined as "the deterioration of a substance (usually a metal) because of a reaction with its
environment." In well stimulation, the primary concern is the reaction of acids on the well equipment,
including tubular goods, during acidizing treatments. This reaction can be minimized by the use of
corrosion inhibitors.
There is a dual purpose for adding inhibitors to acid: the first is to protect our equipment and the second
is to protect the customer's well equipment. Several types of inhibitors are available for use in the
oilfield.
Corrosion of Metals
Several factors govern the degree of attack acid has on steel. The primary factors are:
• temperature
• time of contact
• type of acid
• pressure
• type of steel
• ratio of volume of acid to exposed steel surface area
The longer acid is in contact with steel, the greater the amount of steel dissolved. The corrosion rate
increases with increasing temperatures. You must remember that inhibitors do not stop corrosion; they
only decrease the rate of corrosion. This rate of corrosion can be decrease to an acceptable level if the
proper inhibitor type and concentration are used. Figure 3.22 shows the corrosion rate of 15% HCL with
different concentrations of HAI-85 on N-80 steel at 200°F. Notice that the Halliburton standard is a
"Maximum Total Corrosion Loss" of 0.05 lb/ft2 total steel dissolved over the life of the test.
Inhibitors being used presently in hydrochloric acid are Halliburton Acid Inhibitors HAI-81M and 85M,
as well as the newer inhibitors HAI-GE and OS. HAI-202 has also been developed for use when
environmental issues are a concern - such as the North Sea. These inhibitors will not protect such metals
as aluminum and magnesium from attack by hydrochloric acid. In addition, galvanized coatings and
chromium plating will be attacked by inhibited hydrochloric acid. This is true with these inhibitors and
with all other inhibitors, including competitive materials. Some types of chrome and steel alloys can be
protected. Contact Duncan Research for further information about these alloys.
Acid corrosion inhibitors can be used up to about 500°F. At temperatures above 275°F a secondary
component may need to be added. Two such components are Halliburton Inhibitor Intensifiers 124 and
500 (HII 124 and HII 500).
Note When hydrochloric acid is mixed with acetic or formic acid, the inhibitors used for
HCL are the inhibitors used in these mixtures.
In general, the mixing procedures to follow when mixing hydrochloric acid and organic corrosion
inhibitors together are:
For more complete and detailed mixing procedures, refer to the confidential field bulletins for inhibitors
found on HalWorld
MSA Inhibitors
Organic acids such as formic and acetic require an inhibitor other than HA1-81, 85M, or 72 E+. MSA-II
and the newer MSA-III inhibitors are designed for use in these acids. MSA-II and MSA-III inhibitors
are not recommended for use in hydrochloric acid solutions. Mixing procedures for MSA-II inhibitor are
the same as for other acid inhibitors. The Chemical Stimulation Manual on HalWorld should be used
when determining amounts of MSA inhibitor to use.
Proppants
Propping agents are the essential part of any fracturing treatment. Propping agents prop open the created
fracture to conduct reservoir fluids to the wellbore. The selection of a propping agent requires
information on the conductivity at stress of any material used. Sand is a natural material that is used as a
propping agent in many hydraulic fracturing treatments.
Some characteristics of proppants used in hydraulic fracturing that need to be monitored are:
• Roundness
• Spericity
• Specific gravity
• Bulk density
• Sieve size
• Acid solubility
• Silt and fine particles
• Crush resistance
• Clustering
Roundness and Sphericity are particle factors that influence particle packing and load bearing
capabilities. Roundness is the measure of the relative sharpness of grain corners or a grain curvature.
Sphericity is the measure of how closely a particle approaches the shape of a sphere. The API
recommended limit for sand for both roundness and sphericity is 0.6. For resin-coated sand, the API
limits are 0.7. Figure 3.23 is a Krumbein chart showing visual estimates for roundness and spherictity.
Figure 3.23—Chart for visual estimates of sphericity and roundness (from Krum-
bein and Sieve 1963)
Several samples of a particular sand should be observed, and then an average roundness factor
comparison can be made. In some select cases, angularity may be advantageous because the proppant will
tend to bridge in the fracture and be less likely to flow back into the wellbore. This is especially true in
a formation where the fracture is slow in closing back completely.
The specific gravity of a proppant is the measure of the absolute density of individual proppant particles
relative to water. The recommended API maximum limit is 2.65 for sand.
The solubility of a proppant in 12% HCl - 3% FE acid is an indication of the amount of contaminants
present and of the relative stability of the proppant in acid. It may also indicate the tendency of proppants
to dissolve in hot brines. Acid solubility is measured by percentage by weight. The API recommended
maximum for sand is 2%, while the limit for resin-coated sand is 7% maximum.
Silt and Fine Particles is a measure that indicates the amount of clay and silt or other fine material present.
Properly washed and/or processed proppant will not have excess silt and fine particles.
Crush resistance indicates the relative strength of a proppant by measuring the amount of material
crushed under a given load. It is expressed in units of percentage of fines. API recommended maximum
limits for sand are:
• for 12/20 - 16% at 3,000 psi
• for 20/40 - 14% at 4,000 psi
API recommended maximum limits for high strength proppants are:
• 12/20 mesh 25%
• 16/20 mesh 25%
• 20/40 mesh 10%
• 40/70 mesh 8%
These tests are performed at stress levels of 7,500 psi, 10,000 psi, 12,500 psi, and 15,000 psi until the
maximum fines limit is reached.
Resin-Coated Sand
Resin Coated Proppants (RCPs) have evolved over time. They are more compatible with our fracturing
fluid systems compared to early generation products. Compatibility issues include the effect on fluid pH,
crosslink time, breaker concentration, and foam stability. Resin coatings are available on sands, ceramics,
and bauxite proppants.
Pre-cured or tempered products have a hard coating or shell around the proppant grain and they are most
compatible with our fracturing fluid systems. This coating will not bond grains together but it helps with
conductivity performance when compared to uncoated proppants. This is most significant with resin
coated sands and less significant with resin coated ceramic or bauxite proppants.
Partially curable and encapsulated materials provide proppant grains that will bond together under
closure stress in a fracture. They are also more compatible with our fluid systems when compared to fully
curable resin coated proppants.
Ceramics
Ceramic are one of the large classes into which all useful solid materials can be divided, i.e., metals,
organics, and ceramics. Generally, a ceramic is any non organic, non metallic solid formed by high
temperature processing (above 875°F). Example ceramics include glass, dishes, pottery, brick, abrasives,
and cement.
Ceramic proppants are produced in a different manner than sintered bauxite proppants. The composition
of the ceramic-type proppants is mostly made up of aluminum and silica compounds. This produces a
compound only slightly denser than sand with specific gravities of approximately 2.65 to 2.75. These
ceramic proppants have greater strength than sand but less strength than the intermediate- and
high-strength sintered bauxite proppants. Table 3.16 (Page 3-56) lists some of the ceramic proppants
currently available.
Sintered Bauxite
High-strength sintered bauxite and intermediate-strength sintered bauxite are produced by essentially the
same manufacturing process. Bauxite ore is ground to a fine powder and formed into green pellets. After
drying and screening, the pellets are fired in a kiln. The firing, or sintering process, fuses the edges of the
individual particles of each pellet. The basic difference in the high strength and intermediate strength
materials lies in the raw material used. High-strength sintered bauxite is formed from almost pure bauxite
ore. The sintering process gives high strength bauxite the high density (approximately 3.7 specific
gravity) and strength for this proppant. Intermediate-strength sintered bauxite is formed from a less pure
bauxite ore. The slightly different mineral composition of intermediate strength bauxite results in a less
dense (approximately 3.25 specific gravity) and slightly weaker compound than the more pure sintered
bauxite compound. Table 3.17 lists some of the bauxite proppants currently available.
Proppant Calculations
Slurry Density and Volume
Slurry density is an extremely important factor in stimulation. It is used during the calculations of BHTP
and friction pressure while running sand-laden fluid.
On a fracturing job, proppant is added to the gel on a lb/gal basis. For example, one pound of dry sand
will be added to one gallon of fluid. Because sand adds density and volume, the resulting slurry density
and volume will change. The absolute volume factors in Table 3.21 will be used to help calculate slurry
density and volume in the following example problems.
The absolute volume of proppant is calculated from the specific gravity of the proppant. The specific
gravity is measured in grams per cc (cubic centimeter).
So, the Bulk Density (or Specific Gravity) is measured as if the proppant were a solid and not made up
of individual particles.
Example:
What is the slurry density (lb/gal) and slurry volume (gal) of fresh water with 2 lb/gal Ottawa proppant
added?
Solution:
lb 10.33 lb lb
Slurry Density = = = 9.4666
gal 1.0912 gal gal
The total of the absolute volume column (in gals) is also referred to as "dirty" volume.
If you were to run 2,000 gal of water with 2 lb/gal Ottawa sand, then "clean" volume is 2,000 gal. The
"dirty" volume is the "clean" volume plus the sand volume (in gal). Total lb of sand would be 2,000 gal
× 2 lb/gal = 4,000 lb. Sand volume (in gal) is the total lb of sand times the absolute volume factor for
sand. In this case the sand volume is 4000 lb × 0.0452 gal/lb.
⎛ gal ⎞
Dirty Vol = 2000 gal + ⎜ 4000 lb sand × 0.0452 ⎟
⎝ lb ⎠
= 2000 gal + 180.8 gal
= 2180.8 gal
Example:
Solution:
Table 3.19—Example Solution
Materials Absolute Volume Absolute Volume
Materials
(lb) Factor (gal/lb) (gal)
Diesel #2 7.33 — 1
Sand 10 0.0452 0.452
lb 17.33 lb lb
Slurry Density = = =11.935
gal 1.452 gal gal
"Dirty" Volume = "Clean" volume + (sand concentration × clean volume × absolute volume factor)
⎛ lb gal ⎞
10,000 gal + ⎜⎜10 × 10,000 gal × 0.0452 ⎟
⎝ gal lb ⎟⎠
=14,520 gal " dirty" volume
Instead of using a table, you can use the following equations for slurry density, slurry volume, and
volume factor:
where:
ρSlurry = Slurry Density
ρBase Fluid = Base Fluid Density
Prop Conc = Proppant Concentration
Volume Factor =
⎛ ⎛ lb ⎞ ⎛ gal ⎞ ⎞⎟
1 + ⎜⎜ Prop Conc⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ × Abs Vol factor⎜ ⎟
⎝ ⎝ gal ⎠ ⎝ lb ⎠ ⎟⎠
One place where an understanding of slurry density and volume is necessary is when a well "screens out".
A screen out occurs when fluid and proppant can no longer be pumped into the formation and causes the
pressure to reach its maximum allowable value. Usually, the job is shut down at that point.
Example:
We are pumping 2% KC1 water (8.43 lb/gal) with 4 lb/gal 20/40 Ottawa sand. The casing is 4-1/2 inch,
10.5 lb/ft. Perforations are at 3,000 ft. As soon as the 4 lb/gal stage gets to the perfs, the well screens out.
How many sacks of sand are left in the casing? What is the hydrostatic pressure at the perforations?
gal
Casing Capacity = 3000ft × 0.6699
ft
= 2009.7 gal
Therefore, we have 2009.7 gal of slurry in the casing. In order to calculate the sand volume we need to
use the equation.
lb
Wsand = 1701.9817 gal × 4 = 6807.927 lb
gal
6807.9268 lb
Vs = = 71sacks of sand
lb
95.9
sk
lb lb
8.43 +4
gal gal
Slurry Density =
1.1808
12.43
=
lb
1.1808
gal
lb
= 10.5268
gal
lb
Ph Gradient = 10.5268 × 0.05195
gal
psi
= 0.5469
ft
.
psi
Ph = 3000ft × 0.5469
ft
=1640.6 psi
or
Ph = 3000ft × 0.5455(RedBook)
= 1635.5 psi
Metric Units
Solution Water lb/gal kg/m3 at 20oC /gal water /bbl water g/L bbl m3 °F °C
0 0.998
1 1.01 8.36 1003.00 1.003 0.084 3.522 10.000 1.007 0.1601 30.853 -0.637
2 2.04 8.39 1006.00 1.006 0.168 7.044 20.100 1.014 0.1612 29.714 -1.270
3 3.09 8.42 1009.00 1.009 0.252 10.584 30.200 1.021 0.1623 28.557 -1.913
4 4.17 8.44 1013.00 1.013 0.337 14.158 40.400 1.028 0.1634 27.372 -2.571
6 6.38 8.49 1019.00 1.019 0.509 21.377 61.000 1.043 0.1658 26.157 -3.246
8 8.70 8.54 1025.00 1.025 0.683 28.667 81.800 1.057 0.1680 24.906 -3.941
10 11.11 8.59 1030.00 1.030 0.859 36.061 102.900 1.073 0.1706 22.280 -1.250
12 13.64 8.64 1036.00 1.036 1.035 43.491 124.100 1.088 0.1730 19.490 -6.950
14 16.28 8.69 1042.00 1.042 1.215 51.025 145.600 1.104 0.1755 16.520 -8.600
16 19.05 8.73 1048.00 1.048 1.396 58.630 167.300 1.120 0.1781
18 21.95 8.78 1053.00 1.053 1.579 66.305 189.200 1.136 0.1806
20 25.00 8.83 1059.00 1.059 1.763 74.050 211.300 1.153 0.1833
22 28.21 8.87 1064.00 1.064 1.950 81.900 233.700 1.170 0.1860
24 31.58 8.92 1069.00 1.069 2.138 89.785 256.200 1.187 0.1887
From a fluid mechanics viewpoint, flows that occur during any CT application can be broadly classified
as:
• steady (flow is independent of time) or unsteady (flow is time-dependent)
• laminar (flow is characterized by layers or streamlines) or turbulent (flow is characterized by random
mixing and is no longer streamlined)
• compressible (fluid density is a strong function of pressure such as in gases) or incompressible (fluid
density is a very weak function of pressure such as for liquids)
• single-phase (only one fluid phase exists as either liquid or gas) or multiphase (at least two phases
exist as in liquid and gas or liquid, gas, and solid)
• Newtonian (shear stress is linearly related to shear rate) or non-Newtonian (shear stress is not linearly
related to shear rate).
• the flow direction can be either upwards or downwards; flow can occur in vertical, inclined, or
horizontal wells; and in tubing or annulus formed between the CT and production tubing/casing.
Therefore, in order to accurately predict the system pressures in any CT operation, all these fluid
mechanics aspects and parameters must be taken into careful consideration during the mathematical
development of a wellbore hydraulics model for CT applications.
System pressures can be estimated by appropriately accounting for the total pressure losses (ΔΡ ) in the
CT and annulus. In general, the total pressure loss is comprised of three components, namely:
hydrostatic pressure loss (ΔΡh )
Moreover, the frictional component of the coiled tubing pressure loss can be further subdivided into two
parts: a part that accounts for the friction pressure loss on the reel (ΔRT) before entering the well, and a
part that accounts for the straight tubing losses (ΔΡST) in the well. Experiments have shown that, in
general, reeled tubing pressure losses are greater than the corresponding straight tubing pressure losses.
Usually, the acceleration pressure loss is negligible as long as there is no sudden change in cross-sectional
area of flow, and is therefore not included here.
From a steady-state mechanical energy balance, the hydrostatic and frictional components of pressure
loss can be written as [see Bourgoyne et al. (1991)].
ΔP = 0.052 ρh , (1)
h
and
ρv 2 L . (2)
ΔP = f
f 25.8d
Q
v= . (3)
2.448d 2
The friction factor in Eq. (2) is a function of the Reynolds number (Re), defined physically as the ratio
of the inertia force to the viscous force. Mathematically, the definition of Re varies depending on the fluid
type (e.g., Newtonian liquids, non-Newtonian liquids, gases, multiphase fluids). In addition, the
magnitude of Re distinguishes a flow from being in the laminar, transitional, or turbulent flow regimes.
Thus, the friction factor is found as a function of Re for all these flow regimes in various fluid types.
Similarly, computation of fluid properties (density, viscosity) differ depending on fluid type and will be
discussed briefly in separate sub-sections.
Newtonian Liquids
Fluids that exhibit a linear relationship between the shear stress and shear rate are called Newtonian
fluids. Water, brines, acids, and light oils are good examples of Newtonian liquids. The flow is usually
characterized by the Reynolds number, which for Newtonian fluids can be written as
928ρvd .
Re = (3)
μ
For internal flow of Newtonian fluids through straight tubing, the flow can be classified as either laminar,
transitional, or turbulent depending on the magnitude of the Reynolds number. The flow is laminar if Re
is less than or equal to a critical value of 2100. A transitional flow is observed between Reynolds numbers
of 2100 and 4000. If Re is greater than 4000, then the flow is turbulent. The friction factor for straight
tubing (fst ) in laminar flow is given by
16
f ST = . (4)
Re
−2
⎡ ( A − 4.781)2 ⎤⎥
f ST = 0.25⎢4.781 − . (5)
⎢⎣ B − 2 A + 4.781⎥
⎦
where
⎛ ε 12 ⎞⎟
A = −2.0 log⎜ + . (6)
⎜ 3 .7 D ⎟
⎝ e Re ⎠
⎛ ε 2.51A ⎞⎟
B = −2.0 log⎜ + . (7)
⎜ 3.7 D Re ⎟
⎝ e ⎠
However, in the case of flow through reeled tubing (i.e., for the length of CT on the reel), the presence
of a secondary flow (commonly referred to as Dean's vortices) perpendicular to the main flow makes the
characterization somewhat complicated. In most cases, flow is turbulent in the CT. For turbulent flow,
Sas-Jaworsky and Reed (1997) have recently provided a correlation to determine the friction factor in
reeled tubing as,
d
f RT = f ST + 0.0075 . (7)
Dreel
Clearly, from Eq. (7) the coiled tubing friction factors are greater than the straight tubing friction factors
by an amount specified by the reel curvature. Equations (3)-(7) are utilized in Eq. (2) to compute the
friction pressure losses in straight and reeled tubing.
In this section, friction pressure loss graphs for various CT sizes (diameters and wall thickness) are
presented for four common oilfield fluids pumped through CT. These four Newtonian fluids are shown
in Table 3.30 along with their properties.
The graphs depict the friction pressure loss in both straight (when the CT is off the reel) and reeled tubing
(when the CT is on the reel) for various flow rates through the CT. A pipe roughness value of 0.0018 in.
(corresponding to that of commercial steel pipes) is used in the calculations. For the friction pressure loss
plots in reeled tubing, the Table 3.31 shows the reel core diameters selected for various CT diameters.
These graphs can be readily used to estimate the friction pressure loss for a given CT size, or conversely,
select an appropriate CT size depending on the magnitude of the friction pressure loss.
Example 1
Determine the hydrostatic pressure loss in a 10,000-ft long CT section inclined at angle 30 degrees to the
vertical. The fluid flowing through the CT is diesel
From the table, density of diesel = 6.91 ppg. The vertical distance
Example 2
Consider a 15,000-ft long, 1.5-in. CT with 0.109-in. wall thickness. The length of CT on the reel is 5,000
ft. Determine the total friction pressure loss if fresh water is pumped through the CT at 1 bpm. Use an
inside pipe roughness of 0.0018 in. and a reel core diameter of 84 in.
For fresh water, ρ = 8.33 ppg and μ = 0.99 cp (see above table). The inside diameter of the CT, d = 1.5
- 2 × 0.109 = 1.282 in. The velocity of fresh water in the CT can now be calculated as,
42
v= ft/s = 10.44 ft/s
2,448 ×1.2822
Then , the Reynolds number is found to determine if the flow is laminar or turbulent.
Since Re > 2100, flow is turbulent. Using this value of Re, d, and ε = 0.0018 in., the friction factor in
straight tubing can be found as fST = 0.00584. Thus, the friction pressure loss in straight tubing
becomes,
Using Dreel = 84 in., the friction factor in reeled tubing , fRT = 0.006766.
Correspondingly, the friction pressure loss in reeled tubing , ΔPRT = 929 psi. Hence, the total friction
pressure loss becomes, ΔPf = 1604 + 929 = 2,533 psi.
Alternatively, the friction pressure loss in both straight and reeled tubing can be found from the graphs
presented in this section. From the graph of friction pressure loss for 1.5 in. CT with 0.109 wall thickness,
the pressure loss for fresh water at 1 bpm in straight and reeled tubing is about 160 and 185 psi/1,000 ft
respectively. Multiplying the straight tubing loss value by 10 gives the pressure loss in 10,000 ft as psi.
ΔPST = 1,600 Similarly, ΔPRT = 185 × 5 = 925 psi. Thus, the total friction pressure loss, ΔPf = 1,600 +
925 = 2,525 psi.
Non-Newtonian Liquids
Liquids that exhibit a non-linear relationship between shear stress and shear rate are said to be
non-Newtonian. The most widely used non-Newtonian models in the petroleum industry are the
Power-Law and Bingham Plastic models (many polymer gels and drilling muds can be described by
these two models). Friction pressure loss calculations for Power-Law fluids are dependent on a
generalized Reynolds number, and are somewhat different from the corresponding Newtonian
computations. On the other hand, Bingham Plastic calculations are similar to the Newtonian friction
pressure loss calculations, and only differ in the criteria for determining the onset of turbulence.
number. Clearly, evaluation of liquid hold-up is a critical part of the multiphase computations and
erroneous system pressure predictions can result if hold-up is not estimated accurately. Liquid hold-up
can either be measured or calculated, and is dependent on the flow regime. Flow regimes in two-phase
flow are classified based on whether the flow is vertical or horizontal. In vertical flow, the flow regimes
are usually classified as bubble, slug, froth, transition, and mist flow, whereas in horizontal flow, the
usual classification is: segregated, intermittent, transition, and distributed. Details on these various flow
regimes and how they can be distinguished from one another is quite complex and is not presented here.
Nomenclature
d inner diameter of CT (in.)
Dreel reel diameter (ft)
f Fanning friction factor
h h = L cos θ is the vertical distance between two points on the CT (ft)
L length between two points on the CT (ft)
Q flow rate (gpm)
Re Reynolds number
v velocity of fluid (ft/s)
Greek Symbols
ΔP pressure loss (psi)
ε absolute pipe roughness (in.)
μ viscosity of fluid (cp)
ρ density of fluid (ppg)
θ angle of inclination to the vertical (radians)
Subscripts
a acceleration
RT reeled tubing
f friction
h hydrostatic
ST straight tubing
References
1. Bourgoyne Jr., A. T., Millheim, K. K., Chenevert, M. E., Young Jr., F. S.: "Applied Drilling
Engineering," SPE Textbook Series, Vol. 2 (1991).
2. Sas-Jaworsky II, A., and Reed, T. D.: "Predicting Friction Pressure Losses in Coiled Tubing
Operations," World Oil (Sept., 1997), 141-146.
3. Serghides, T.K..: "Estimate Friction Factor Accurately," Chemical Engineering (Mar., 1984),
63-64.
Figure 3.27—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.0-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.095 in. (straight)
Figure 3.29—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.0-in. OD; wall thickness = 0.087
in. (reeled)
Figure 3.30—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 25.40-mm OD; wall thickness
= 2.210 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.31—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.0-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.095 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.33—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.25-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.095 in. (straight)
Figure 3.34—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 31.75-mm. OD; wall thickness
= 2.413 mm (straight)
Figure 3.35—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.25-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.134 in. (straight)
Figure 3.37—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.25-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.095 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.38—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 31.75-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 2.413 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.39—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.25-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.134 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.40—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 31.75-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 3.404 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.41—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.5-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.109 in. (straight)
Figure 3.42—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 38.10-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 2.769 mm (straight)
Figure 3.43—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.5-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.134 in. (straight)
Figure 3.45—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.5-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.109 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.46—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 38.10-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 2.769 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.47—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.5-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.134 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.48—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 38.10-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 3.404 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.49—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.75-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.109 in. (straight)
Figure 3.50—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 44.45-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 2.769 mm (straight)
Figure 3.51—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.75-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.156 in. (straight)
Figure 3.52—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 44.45-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 3.962 mm (straight)
Figure 3.53—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.75-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.109 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.54—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 44.45-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 2.769 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.55—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 1.75-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.156 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.56—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 44.45-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 3.962 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.57—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.0-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.156 in. (straight)
Figure 3.58—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 50.80-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 3.962 mm (straight)
Figure 3.59—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.0-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.175 in. (straight)
Figure 3.60—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 50.80-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.445 mm (straight)
Figure 3.61—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.0-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.156 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.62—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 50.80-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 3.962 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.63—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.0-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.175 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.64—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 50.80-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.445 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.65—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.375-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.188 in. (straight)
Figure 3.66—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 60.33-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.775 mm (straight)
Figure 3.67—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.375-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.203 in. (straight)
Figure 3.68—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 60.33-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 5.156 mm (straight)
Figure 3.69—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.375-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.188 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.70—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 60.33-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.775 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.71—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.375-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.203 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.72—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 60.33-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 5.156 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.73—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.875-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.188 in. (straight)
Figure 3.74—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 73.03-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.775 mm (straight)
Figure 3.75—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.875-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.203 in. (straight)
Figure 3.76—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 73.03-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 5.156 mm (straight)
Figure 3.77—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.875-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.188 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.78—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 73.03-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.775 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.79—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 2.875-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.203 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.80—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 73.03-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 5.156 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.81—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 3.5-in. OD; wall thick-
ness = 0.188 in. (straight)
Figure 3.82—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 88.90-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.775 mm (straight)
Figure 3.83—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 3.5-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.203 in. (straight)
Figure 3.84—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 88.90-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 5.156 mm (straight)
Figure 3.85—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 3.5-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.188 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.86—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 88.90-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 4.775 mm (reeled)
Figure 3.87—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 3.5-in. OD; wall thickness
= 0.203 in. (reeled)
Figure 3.88—Friction pressure losses in coiled tubing; 88.90-mm OD; wall thick-
ness = 5.156 mm (reeled)
i
Guy Lines and Base Support ................................................................... 4-26
Free-standing (Injector Supported by Telescopic Legs) / Crane ........ 4-26
Support Structure (Track Stack or Injector Stand) ............................. 4-27
Guy Lines ........................................................................................... 4-28
Anchors .............................................................................................. 4-32
Foundations (Well Location) for Support Structures and
Crane Outriggers ................................................................................ 4-33
Working Near Power Lines ................................................................. 4-35
Guy Line Placement ........................................................................... 4-36
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 104-in. Flange, 72-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor . 4-37
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 104-in. Flange, 72-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-37
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 128-in. Flange, 72-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-38
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 128-in. Flange, 80-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-38
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 142-in. Flange, 84-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-39
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 148-in. Flange, 84-in. Core Reel, 2 Motors 4-39
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 996.15954, 128-in. Flange,
80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-40
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 996.16074, 118-in. Flange,
72-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-40
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 997.02400, 128-in. Flange,
80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-41
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 997.02407, 138-in. Flange,
80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor ................................................................... 4-41
References ......................................................................................... 4-42
ii
Section 4
Operations Guidelines
Coiled Tubing Rig-up
Disclaimer: This section is intended as a good practice guideline only.Refer to HMS for latest standards.
Preface
Due to the physical size, weight, and nature of a coiled tubing unit, there is always some assembly
required before a job can be run. Depending on the unit and the application, this "rig-up time" may be
anywhere from 15 minutes to 6+ hours. The rig-up time should be considered beforehand, and in some
instances should be done the day before the actual job to allow sufficient time in the hole for the particular
application.
General Information
The primary function of the coiled tubing BOP and stripper are to maintain control of the well at all times.
The coiled tubing BOP and stripper must be properly maintained and kept in a state of operational
readiness. This is verified by functional testing and pressure testing before the start of the job.
Coiled tubing BOPs and stuffing boxes are designed and manufactured by a number of suppliers but are
mainly supplied by Texas Oil Tools (TOT). Although they differ in details, all BOPs and strippers
basically operate on the same design principle.
Standard coiled tubing BOPs are monoblock, quad-type with four sets of ram operators. Each set of rams
functions independently of the others by manual selection of hydraulic controls at the operator's console.
The BOPs are available in 5M, 10M, and 15M working pressure ratings. Most BOPs are rated for
10,000-psi working pressure and some newer ones have 15,000-psi working pressure ratings. The
working pressure of the BOP is determined by body design and the lower connection rating.
BOPs can also have a secondary function of connecting and deploying long tool strings in situations
where the lubricator is too short to accommodate the entire toolstring. BOPs used for tool deployments
are not considered pressure control components and must be used in addition to the necessary BOPs
stated below.
All pressure control equipment should be suitable for the environment (H2S, temperature etc.) they are
working in. (ie elastomers, stripper packers, ring gaskets etc).
When coiled tubing is used, the minimum standard pressure control stack should be configured with ram
sets that are arranged in the following order from the top down: (these configurations can be incorporated
into quad, triple-combi, dual-combi, etc. where combi means a single ram has a combination of functions
e.g. shear and seal).
Figure 4.2 illustrates the four different rams functions (in order from the top down).
•Ram No. 1—Blind rams (top rams)—Designed to seal off the wellbore
when pipe is removed from the BOPs.
•Ram No. 2: Shear rams (below blinds)—Designed to cut the coiled tubing
and/or wireline cables. The kill line outlet allows kill fluids to be pumped down
the outside of the CT when the tubing is intact, or allows kill fluids to be
pumped down the CT after the tubing is cut. This side outlet is not to be used
for taking returns, etc.
•Ram No. 3: Slip rams (below shears)—Designed to hold the pipe either in
the pipe-light (snub) or pipe-heavy position.
•Ram No. 4: Tubing rams (bottom rams)—Designed to seal off the annular
area around the coiled tubing.
Figure 4.2—BOP
ram functions
•Ram No. 1: Shear and blind ram—Designed to cut the coiled tubing and/or
wireline cables and seal the wellbore in one stroke. The kill line outlet allows
kill fluids to be pumped down the outside of the CT when the tubing is intact,
or allows kill fluids to be pumped down the CT after the tubing is cut. This side
outlet is not to be used for taking returns, etc.
•Ram No. 2: Tubing and slip ram—Designed to hold the pipe and seal off
the annulus around the coiled tubing.
Figure 4.4—Dual-combi
type BOP ram types
Positioned at the top of the pressure control stack is the stripper (either single or multiple), which allows
movement of the coiled tubing while keeping the well pressure contained. Figure 4.5 shows three
different types of stripper: (from left) the conventional top loader, the side door, and the over/under type
strippers.
Selection of the correct pressure control equipment based on the environment and well conditions is
important and should be based on the specifications in the following tables.
Note The high hardness required for any BOP shear ram blades makes them very
susceptible to sulfide stress cracking (SSC) in an H2S environment. For this reason,
the condition of the blades should be checked before each job after working in an H2S
environment.
The coiled tubing reel is also part of the well pressure-control equipment. A minimum of two valves are
required on the inside of the reel (see also the requirements later in this document for the use of a remote
valve inside the reel).
For selection of equipment, it is important to understand the following terms and be able to calculate them
for any anticipated coiled tubing operation.
The following currently available mechanical devices, or combination of mechanical devices, are coiled
tubing well control barriers:
• The combination of an annular sealing component, or pipe ram sealing component, and a dual check
valve assembly installed within the CT BHA.
• A single-blind ram and single-shear ram.
• The blind/shear combination ram.
When operations are carried out without a dual check valve assembly in the BHA an additional shear and
seal ram are required in the surface pressure control stack.(either a combination ram or two single rams)
The minimum number of barriers required depends on the pressure category of the well (see Table 4.4
on the following page for pressure categories).
• Pressure Category 1: Minimum of 2 barriers
• Pressure Category 2: Minimum of 3 barriers
• Pressure Category 3: Minimum of 3 barriers
Note Strippers, sub-surface safety valves, or kill weight fluids are not to be considered a
barrier.
Standard BOP
Dual Stripper
Blind / Shear
Flow Line
Pipe Ram
Kill Line
Stripper
Annular
MASP
P.C.b
H2 S
Dual Stripper
Bline / Shear
Combi BOP
Application
Quad BOP
Flow Line
Kill Line
Stripper
MASP
H2 S
Long Tool
Double valves
Deploy- < 3,500 No No 10K 10K 3 3 3 3 + check valve
—
ment
Double valves
< 3,500 No Yes 10K 10K X 3 3 3 + check valve
—
A lubricator can only be positioned between the standard BOP and the stripper. Some jobs may require
very long tool strings. If the rig up is to be free standing using a crane an additional full opening radial
stripper or annular BOP located at the bottom of the lubricator is recommended. This allows the tubing
to be safety pulled from the well in the event that a leak develops in the lubricator.
Riser—Section of pipe made up BELOW the coiled tubing BOPs or in BETWEEN separate sets of
coiled tubing BOPs. Normally used for spacing out of CT pressure control equipment. Connections are
always flanged.
A riser can be positioned anywhere in the pressure control stack below the standard BOP. If the riser is
positioned below the additional BOPs then a minimum of an extra shear/seal BOP is required just above
the wellhead.
Figure 4.6—Rig-up example showing riser (left) Rig-up example showing lu-
bricator (right)
Both flow tee's and flow crosses are designed as the primary outlet for production of the well. This
equipment is generally incorporated into the wellhead, but at times will be an integral part of the coiled
tubing blowout preventer equipment (BOPE). If at all possible flow should be taken off of the wellhead
flow tee or cross. If this is not applicable due to production line hookups then a flow cross will need to
be included in the CT rig-up. This will require additional BOPE; see Table 4.4 (Page 4-7), “Minimum
Pressure Control Requirements” for the required equipment.
All flow tees/crosses must be designed for the purpose and rated for the pressure and well conditions
present. Two plug valves must be used on any flow outlet between the flow tee/cross and the flow line.
High-pressure and H2S applications require that these valves are flanged. The inner valve is used as a
shut in device and can be equipped with either a hydraulic actuator or a manual valve to shut in the
flowline. The outer valve is used to open and close the flowline for normal operations. The outer valve
can be manually or hydraulically controlled but when a minimum of one remote operated valve is
specified this should be the outer valve.
Flow Line
Flow line is designated as any piping that is used to carry wellbore fluid from the well to the final
receptacle (tank, pit, pipeline). All flow line, assemblies and data headers have a direct impact upon the
safety of personnel. Therefore, the piping should be subject to certain testing and inspection procedures
before being placed into service. All flow back piping must comply with ANSI B31.3 and API-6A. It
must comply with NACE MR-01-75 if necessary, and if required, Det Norske Veritas (DNV) or
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS).
Ensure enough of correct size and pressure rated pipe is available for the surface rig-up. Piping may
consist of straight lengths, elbows, and crossovers. Additional assemblies may be needed to reduce flow
cutting and erosion in the flow system: target elbows, block tees, and lead targets. The pipe should be
pressure tested to working pressure prior to sending on a job.
Flow line should be made up of piping with integral union connections for up to 10,000 psi and flanged
or graylok connections for 10,000 to 15,000 psi. All piping should have a pressure rating of 1.5 times the
MASP of the well.
As flow line can be subjected to high velocity erosive fluids it is not to be used on the pumping side of
the rig up. All flow line assemblies should be marked with a distinctive color coding that designates it as
flow piping.
Each HES assembly will include painted identification bands to identify pressure rating and service. An
assembly should have a 12-inch band of the proper color for the working pressure of that particular piece.
H2S service is identified by a four inch wide green band with four inch wide bands of the pressure rating
bordered on each side. The pressure rating color code presently in use is:
• 10,000 psi Yellow
• 15,000 psi Orange
• 20,000 psi White
Chokes
Choke manifolds are used to control backpressure on the well returns and to direct the flow to various
downstream components. A choke is required on any job where wellhead pressure is anticipated. This
can be a fixed and variable choke or two variable chokes, depending on the job rig-up. If no choke is
installed on a rig-up and pressure develops on the wellhead, no circulating can be done until a choke is
installed. No valves can be used as a choke.
The choke manifold is the primary means of controlling the flow of the well and should be monitored
and operated by competent personnel. For low-pressure applications where flowback fluids are not
expected to contain solids, a single variable choke line is acceptable. The choke manifold must be rated
to 1.5 times the maximum expected shut-in pressure. It should be sour-service-rated if H2S is expected.
Figure 4.7 shows a typical choke manifold configuration. The manifold offers the option of directing flow
through either choke while isolating the other for choke changes, maintenance, or repair. Five valve
configurations allow the flow to be directed to either choke or through an unrestricted flow path through
the middle of the manifold with a total bypass of choke control. For high-pressure rig-ups, dual valves
would be used instead of the single valves shown in Figure 4.7.
Manipulations of the chokes should be done in conjunction with the company representative. It is
essential that perfect understanding and communication exists between the choke operator and the
service supervisor/leader.
Important Never flow through the manifold without either the adjustable choke seat or fixed
choke bean in place to protect the body threads.
Important Never use the valves in the choke manifold as chokes because this will damage the
gates and seats.
Before operation of the choke manifold, while in service or in testing, the entire installation should be
grounded by means of a cable which allows the static electricity to dispense and avoid flashes. The cable
should have a maximum resistance of 1 ohm per three feet. It should be connected to a place where there
is no paint, either on the vessel or on the rig. In the case of onshore testing, the ground should be a copper
earth electrode at least three feet long, driven into the ground and watered regularly to keep the earth wet
and provide good contact.
Adjustable chokes are not highly accurate and flow cut easily with abrasive fluids. Therefore, avoid using
adjustable chokes for extended periods. Where conditions permit use fixed chokes with the adjustable
used as a bypass system to allow fixed choke changes.
General Guidelines
• Rubber hoses should never be used in a flowback lines.
• If any type of gas is being flowed from the well the velocity of returns increases dramatically after
passing through the choke. It is always advisable to avoid any turns, if possible, downstream of the
choke.
• If the possibility exists for any type of gas and/or solids being flowed, no swivel joints should be used
in the flowback lines and 90º elbows should be avoided. In this situation, straight joints and tees with
plugs installed (target tees, see Figure 4.8) are the preferred components of flowback lines.
choke is a danger. Shutting down pumping operations can lead to solids falling back down the well
leading to the potential to stick the coiled tubing.
• When no gas or solids are anticipated in the flow returns, a remote operated choke can be connected
as close as possible to the flow line double valves near the spool outlets. This method minimizes the
amount of piping exposed to maximum well shut-in pressure.
• Ensure the maximum well shut-in pressure does not exceed 80% of the working pressure of the return
line/lines as well as choke/chokes.
• Remote operated chokes should be considered with pressures in excess of 3,500 psi and are necessary
for pressures in excess of 7,500 psi.
• Choke manifolds and flow lines shall be secured both up and downstream of the choke manifold.
• Remote operation choke control panels should be located away from the wellhead, a minimum of
50 ft (upwind if possible), and away from pressure containing flow/treating lines.
• A pressure sensor or gauge shall be located upstream of the choke. An isolation valve shall be rigged
up to permit repairs to the pressure sensing equipment.
• The choke manifold must be rated to the maximum expected shut-in pressure. It should be sour
service rated if H2S is expected.
• Never flow through the manifold without either the adjustable choke seat or fixed choke bean in place
to protect the body threads.
Function and Pressure Test Requirements for All Pressure Control Equipment
These test requirements cover all pressure control stack, pumping lines and flowback lines, and
manifolds. Function tests are required on all pressure containing equipment every time the hydraulic lines
are connected and every time the equipment is rigged up on location.
All pressure tests will be performed using a low-/high-pressure test sequence. The low pressure test will
be performed first on each pressure containing barrier in the stack up to a pressure of 200 to 300 psi (13.8
to 20.7 bar) and held for a minimum of 5 minutes to verify no leaks. The test pressure will then be
increased to the high-pressure level which will be either the working pressure of the wellhead equipment,
the surface equipment, 1.5 times maximum MASP or 80% of the coiled tubing burst pressure - whichever
is the least. The high test pressure will be held for a minimum of 10 minutes to verify no leaks. All
pressure tests will be recorded on a time incremented chart and logged on the job log.
All breaks in pressure containing barriers need to be tested (e.g. flanges, quick unions, etc.) before being
exposed to well pressure or flowback. Pressure testing is required for every pressure containing barrier
every time the equipment is rigged up unless documented proof is available that the barrier has been
tested either on location or in the workshop within the last 14 days. This includes any annular sealing
component such as an annular BOP or pipe rams, blind rams, combination blind/shear rams and all valves
in the flowback lines and pressure control equipment. Once installed, all pressure control equipment
should undergo a function and pressure test at least once every 7 days or prior to any well testing
operations. A period of more than 7 days is only acceptable when abnormal well operations (such as stuck
CT) lasting more than 7 days prevent testing, providing the tests are performed before normal operations
resume.
Pressure tests should be performed with non-corrosive, non-flammable fluids, preferably water.
Important In no case should the test pressure exceed the manufacturer’s rated working pressure
for the specified assembly. Rated test pressure is a factory test of the product and in
NO case shall be used as working pressure.
Various types of check valves exist such as the most common type of
double-flapper check valve (Figure 4.9) and dart types. They also exist for
applications where it is necessary to reverse circulate up the coiled tubing.
It is important to remember that balls are frequently pumped through the flapper
valve to tools below. Care should be taken to ensure that the type and size of
check valve chosen will allow the ball to pass through.
Important Check valves should be run on every coiled tubing job except
in certain special circumstances where the specific
application does not allow it. Appropriate safeguards and
approval are required for these operations.
Testing of the check valves should be done during each re-dress in the workshop
to the full working pressure. On location testing to the full working pressure is
often not possible due to the collapse rating of the coiled tubing.
To test on location, a minimum differential pressure of 500 psi should be held for
a minimum of 3 minutes.
On a typical rig up this can be done after connecting up the surface equipment to
the wellhead and testing the pressure integrity of the wellhead and riser
connections. After pumping through the coiled tubing with the pump to pressure
up the coiled tubing and wellhead, bleed off at least 500 psi through the pump.
This will result in the WHP gauge reading higher than the pressure reading at the
pump. If this test is satisfactory, bleed off the remaining pressure (if required)
through the choke manifold and not the pump to avoid possibly collapsing the
coiled tubing.
Figure 4.9—Double-
flapper check valve
Halliburton Note Throughout this section taken from API RP 5C7, various references are made to a
maximum loading of 80% of yield rating. Halliburton only accepts this policy for new
coiled tubing without any utilization.As the utilization increases, the maximum
loading should be lowered to a maximum of 64% of yield rating for coiled tubing with
100% utilization. More information on safety factors and allowable stress factors can
be found in Section 2 of this book, “Pipe Data Tables and Charts.”
The following emergency responses and contingency plans are offered as examples of typical responses
to various emergency situations due to coiled tubing equipment and/or wellbore problems. These
emergency responses and contingency plans are provided for information purposes only, and reflect
typical action to be taken during the specified event.
1. Stop pipe movement and close slip and pipe rams. If time and circumstances permit, review all
options with company and service representatives.
2. Stop pumping.
3. Close the shear rams to cut the coiled tubing.
4. Pull the coiled tubing out of the well control stack to a point above the blind rams.
5. Close the blind rams.
6. Set up to circulate kill fluid through the coiled tubing remaining in the well.
Note The decision to proceed beyond Step 1 should generally be made in consultation with
the company representative, except in a case where immediate danger exists for
personnel and/or equipment and the representative is not immediately accessible to
be involved in the decision.
Contingency Plans
A coiled tubing unit has several equipment components which can possibly cause serious damage and
injury if improperly used when correcting a developing problem. In addition, well control problems can
quickly grow into a much larger situation or add to the complexity of the situation if handled improperly.
Therefore, the operator and company representative should become familiar with potential problems and
solutions prior to performing the work.
The following are suggested contingencies to alleviate problems as described below. It is assumed that
surface pressure will be present at the wellhead during these equipment failure emergencies.
To replace the conventional top-entry stripper, the following steps should be taken:
1. Unscrew the split retainer cap.
2. Remove the old stripper elements.
3. Inspect upper bushings for wear.
4. Insert new stripper elements.
5. Replace the split cap and energize the stripper assembly.
6. Return injector to extraction and equalize the well control stack pressure.
7. Unlock and open the pipe rams.
8. Unlock and open the slip rams.
9. Resume operations.
To replace the side door stripper assembly, the following steps should be taken:
1. Open the side doors on the stripper. .
2. Apply approximately 100 to 200 lb per square inch gauge hydraulic pressure to open the pressure
containment cylinder.
3. Remove the stripper element halves one at a time. Be aware that the upper brass bushings may
fall down .into the window once the supporting stripper elements are removed.
4. Remove the split nonextrusion ring.
5. Remove the brass bushing sets from above and below. Check for wear, and replace if necessary.
6. Insert the brass bushings and split nonextrusion ring.
7. Insert the new stripper elements.
8. Apply hydraulic pressure to close the pressure containment cylinder.
9. Close the side doors.
10. Return the injector to extraction, and equalize the well control stack pressure.
11. Unlock and open the pipe rams.
12. Unlock and open the slip rams.
13. Resume operations.
When coiled tubing collapses, it will flatten, resembling a thin oval cylinder with the center touching.
This increase in OD (or major axis) is usually greater than the wear bushing ID in the stripper assembly,
and the collapse will usually be halted at the stripper. If the collapsed portion does make it into the
stripper assembly, be cautious of discharged pressure as the stripper element will not effectively seal on
the pipe.
In the case of collapse with coiled tubing shallow in the well, the following steps should be taken:
6. Reassemble the stripper assembly and finish pulling out of the hole.
7. Replace coiled tubing, and determine the cause of collapse before entering the well again.
In the case of collapse with the coiled tubing deep in the well, the following steps should be taken:
1. Be aware that moving the coiled tubing up and down over the tubing-guide arch rapidly weakens
the tubing. High pump pressures while working the pipe should be avoided if at all possible as
this greatly accelerates the fatigue problem (check fatigue cycle log to assess whether further
cycling is possible).
2. Check for fluid returns, and attempt to maintain circulation if possible. Check pump pressure
recorder to identify any pressure fluctuations.
3. Compare current tubing weight with previous pick-up weight.
4. Apply a tensile load to the coiled tubing of up to 80 percent of the pipe yield rating and hold.
Monitor the weight indicator for changes in weight.
Halliburton note Halliburton reduces this value for used CT (see Section 2 of this book for details on
"Allowable Stress Factor").
1. Stop the pump to determine if there is any flow or pressure at the surface.
2. If there is no surface pressure, pull out of the hole with the coiled tubing while pumping a
minimal amount to keep the hole full and to prevent swabbing. When the end of the coiled tubing
reaches the well-control stack, close the master valve and replace/repair the leaking riser section.
3. If, in consultation with the company representative, it is deemed unsafe to pull the coiled tubing
out of the hole with surface pressure present, the well should be killed.
4. The following steps should be taken to control and kill the well:
a. Prepare to pump the kill fluid.
b. Pump the kill fluid and lost circulation material (if required) downhole through the kill line
on the tree.
c. Displace the hole completely with kill fluid.
Note Ensure that tubing is sufficiently off the bottom so that when shear-seal rams are used,
the pipe will drop below the manual master valve on the Christmas tree.
3) Pick up the coiled tubing 1 to 2 feet and close the blind rams.
4) Open the slip rams to allow the coiled tubing to fall into the wellbore.
5) Close the master valve while counting the turns, to ensure that it has closed properly.
If the wellhead pressure exceeds the maximum allowable working pressure of the coiled tubing, go
directly to Step 6. Otherwise, follow these steps:
1. Record the tubing weight at the load cell to estimate the amount of pipe above the part.
2. Attempt to establish injection down the coiled tubing. Circulate the kill weight fluid into the
wellbore if available.
3. If fluid injection down the coiled tubing is not possible, pump the kill fluid through the flow tee
until the well is dead. If possible, bleed pressure as needed to minimize buildup of surface pres-
sure.
4. Pull the coiled tubing out of the well slowly; the location of the end of tubing is unknown. Be
prepared to close the master valve in case the coiled tubing is accidentally pulled out of the strip-
per assembly.
5. Discuss options for retrieving the lost coiled tubing and additional kill procedures if necessary.
6. If the wellhead surface pressure approaches or exceeds the maximum allowable well pressure of
the coiled tubing, begin pumping kill weight fluid through the coiled tubing. If fluid cannot be
pumped through the coiled tubing, pump fluids through the kill or return spool while slowly
pulling the coiled tubing out of the well. Do not exceed the rated collapse pressure of the coiled
tubing. Be prepared to close the master valve if the coiled tubing is accidentally pulled out of the
stripper assembly. Initiate or continue the kill procedure using the bullhead method.
7. If the wellhead pressure becomes critical (final alternative), halt the extraction of the coiled
tubing, close the slip and pipe rams, and activate the shear rams. Pick up the end of the coiled
tubing 1 to 2 feet, and close the blind rams.
8. Follow normal fishing procedures.
A Hole in the Coiled Tubing Above the Stripper (Run in the Hole)
In the case that there is a hole in the coiled tubing above the stripper, the following steps should be taken:
1. Stop the injector and the reel.
2. Reduce the fluid pump pressure as much as possible, but do not shut down the pumps completely.
3. Pull out of the hole and repair or replace the coiled tubing string.
4. If the hole is large and leaks significantly, continue to run in the hole with the coiled tubing and
position the hole between the stripper and pipe rams.
5. Close the slips and pipe rams.
6. Initiate a kill procedure down the coiled tubing to eliminate the surface pressure.
7. When the well is dead, pull out of the hole and repair or replace the coiled tubing string.
Halliburton note If the uncontrolled descent of the CT has just begun, attempt to regain control as
follows:
1. Stop the injector chains.
2. Place the control lever in the neutral position.
3. Increase linear beam pressure.
In the case that the uncontrolled CT descends into the well and the pipe hits the bottom or some
obstruction, the following steps should be taken:
Halliburton note On a Halliburton injector, this would mean increasing the linear beam pressure.
6. Inspect the chain blocks and remove any debris (paraffin, scale, and the like).
7. Reset the inside (and outside) chain pressures to the appropriate amounts.
Halliburton note On a Halliburton injector, this means set the linear beam pressures to the appropriate
amounts.
8. If the well is under control and there are no mechanical (surface) problems, then open the pipe
rams and slip rams. Change the stripper element if necessary.
Halliburton note If required, the stripper element should be changed before opening the pipe and slip
rams.
9. Pull out of-the-hole slowly to determine if the end of the coiled tubing can be pulled inside of the
production tubing string. If the coiled tubing entered into the casing at the bottom of the well,
there are probably some kinks or buckling. Check the pickup weight and drag compared to pre-
vious data.
10. If there are no suspected problems, then continue with the project. If there are indications of a
problem, then pull out of the hole, and inspect the coiled tubing.
Halliburton note The injector should also be given a close inspection at this stage.
1. Apply additional pressure to the stripper assembly. Prepare to lose the master valve in case the
coiled tubing is blown out of the well.
2. Attempt to increase the injector's inside chain pressure.
Note The chains should be moving in the same direction as the coiled tubing.
3. If these attempts are unsuccessful, put the injector motors in neutral and close the slip rams.
4. Once the pipe motion is halted, close the pipe rams and slips, if not already closed.
5. Pump the hydraulic cylinders open on the injector chain skates.
6. Inspect the chain blocks and remove any debris (paraffin, scale, etc.).
7. Reset the inside (and outside) chain pressures to the appropriate amounts.
8. If the well is under control and there are no mechanical problems, then open the pipe rams and
slip rams. (Change stripper element if necessary).
9. Reduce the hydraulic pressure on the stripper element and pick up the coiled tubing enough to
inspect the area of pipe held by the slips.
10. Determine whether it will be necessary to repair/replace that section of coiled tubing prior to
resuming the pipe extraction. Be extremely cautious while checking the area of pipe held by the
slips since the pipe may be weakened and may fail with high-surface pressure present.'
11. Continue to pull out of the hole and dose the master valve. Determine the cause for the uncon-
trolled movement of pipe prior to entering the well again. Replace or repair the coiled tubing
string as required.
12. If the coiled tubing is blown out of the stripper assembly, close the blind rams and master valve
as quickly as possible.
Crane Operations
Crane operation should be limited to personnel with the following minimum qualifications:
• Certified, designated, and competent persons.
• Maintenance and test personnel, only insofar as it is necessary for the performance of their duties.
• Supervisor or other coiled tubing crew member with designated experienced person present.
In addition to the above, the operator should meet the following requirements:
• Be able to demonstrate the ability to read comprehend, and interpret all placards, operator manuals,
safety codes, and other information pertinent to correct, safe crane operation.
• Possess knowledge of emergency procedures and implementation of same.
• Be familiar with all relevant safety standard codes and applicable governmental requirements.
• Recognize and be responsible for all maintenance requirements of the crane operated by him or
trainees under his supervision.
• Be thoroughly familiar with the crane being operated and its control functions.
• Have read and fully comprehended the operating procedures as outlined in relevant procedures and
standards
Where required by government regulations, crane inspections (and the frequency of these) must be
carried out by a recognized authority. Records of the dates and results of the inspections must be
maintained on the unit.
• Do not attach guy lines to the wellhead or process equipment of any kind. On onshore locations, guy
lines shall not be attached to anything mobile, such as a tank, pump, etc. Guy lines must not be
attached to jack-up boats.
• The guy lines shall be uniformly tensioned. Tension to 500 lb.
the injector to facilitate repositioning of the injector with the travel carriage is permissible without
having a crane attached. The injector must be correctly pinned to the travel carriage.
• Each guy line shall be attached to an anchor using shackles, thimbles, a turn buckle, and a minimum
of three cable clamps at each connection (as shown on the last page of this procedure).
• The hamper-type land stakes shall not be used.
• Temporary screw-type marsh anchors can be used. A 1-in. OD anchor rod, 5-ft long, with a 10-in.
blade, is recommended as a minimum. If temporary anchors are being used it may be necessary to
use eight anchors on land locations for greater stability on higher rig-ups.
• Do not attach guy lines to wellhead or process equipment of any kind. On onshore locations, guy
lines shall not be attached to anything mobile, such as a tank, pump, etc. Guy lines must not be
attached to jack-up boats.
• The guy lines shall be uniformly tensioned. Tension lines to the support structure to 500-lb
maximum. Tension lines to the injector to 500-lb maximum. Bring the tension up evenly on all lines
at 100-lb increments. Use load cells and tension pulleys on multi-line rig ups to ensure even
tensioning.
Guy Lines
Guy lines should be constructed of a minimum ½ inch 6 × 25 strand regular lay wire rope made of
improved plow steel (IPS) or better with independent wire-rope core (IWRC), not previously used in any
other application. They should be visually inspected at least monthly and removed from service if the
following damage, corrosion or wear exists:
• Three (3) broken wires are found within one (1) lay length.
• Two (2) broken wires are found at the end connection in the strand valley.
• Marked corrosion appears.
• Corroded wires at end connections.
• End connections are corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or improperly applied.
• Evidence of kinking, crushing, cutting, cold working, or bird-caging is found.
The following guidelines should be observed when working with guy lines:
• Guyline end terminations should be made in accordance with good guyline practice and the current
copy of API RP 9B.
• Never turn guy lines back over small radius eyes when making an end termination.
• Wire rope thimbles or appropriately sized sheaves should be used to turn back guyline ends.
• When wire rope clips are used, double saddle type clips are recommended and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using proper torque.
Note When a sheave is used in place of a thimble for turning back the wire rope, add one
additional clip.
• Guyline hardware such as shackles, turnbuckles, walking boomers, chain come-alongs, load binders,
etc., that remain in the live guyline system should have a safe working load capacity that meet or
exceeds 40% of the breaking strength of the guyline. The handles on walking boomers, come-alongs,
etc. should be positively secured to prevent accidental release.
• Guy lines should be pretensioned to 500 lb.
The catenary or "SAG" in the guyline may be used to estimate proper pretension.
Table 4.7
Loc Qty P/N Description
1 4 Crosby 1019533 Shackle
2 2 Crosby 1037719 Heavy wire rope thimble, galv. ½-in.
3 6 Crosby 1010532 Clamp, fist grip
4 100 ft Wire, 6 × 25 strand IPS, IWRC ½-in. OD galv.
Crosby 1048422 Turn buckle, ratchet-type
5 1
SAP 101344875
Anchors
Anchors should meet the following criteria for installation, use, and verification.
• Qualified persons using accepted engineering practices should design anchors.
• Steel components should be protected from corrosion.
• Anchors should meet the requirements of federal or state laws.
• Anchors should be designed to meet the structure manufacturer's recommendations or use API
recommended anchor values.
• Anchors should have a minimum capacity of at least twice the guyline load.
• Install the anchor so that
liquids drain away from
the anchor shaft.
• The capacity should be
verified every 24 months
or immediately prior to
use and rechecked if
changes occur that would
decrease the capacity of
the anchor.
• Verify anchor capacity by
pull testing or other
appropriate methods that
use accepted engineering
practices.
Most crane load charts are based on the outriggers being supported by 100% stable ground such as listed
for hard rock. The area of the manufacturer supplied outrigger pad will most likely require supplementary
blocking timbers or larger pads to increase the contact area for softer soils.
Timber blocks must be hardwood and free of decay, gum veins or termite galleries. Knots, knot holes and
borer holes must not exceed half an inch (12 millimeters) in diameter for the blocks to be considered as
suitable for supporting heavy equipment. The blocks must be at least 8 in. (200 millimeters) wide and at
least 4 in. (100 millimeters) high, with square edges so that they form a smooth, even, flat surface when
placed on top of each other to form a support for the outrigger jack. Timber which has become warped
must not be used for jacking.
The timber blocks forming a base must be bolted together through the face (the widest dimension) so they
stand "on edge" (ie, on the side with the narrowest dimension) to obtain the maximum strength from the
blocks. The reason the blocks should be bolted together is to avoid the possibility of soil being forced
between the blocks during jacking, thereby separating them and rendering them unstable. The bolts used
to join the timber blocks together should be a minimum of 5/8-in. (16 millimeters) in diameter.
Care should be taken when selecting the sleeper to ensure that it provides sufficient stability across the
width of the sleeper and there is no likelihood of the sleeper splitting under load. Handles of rope or steel
rod (preferably steel rod) should be fitted to make it easier to move and carry the blocks to reduce the risk
of manual handling injuries.
A stock of jacking timber is as much a tool as any other piece of equipment used for maintenance. This
jacking timber should therefore be stored undercover, well supported and off the ground to protect
against termite attack. The blocks should also be oiled to resist rot, weathering and premature warping,
which will render them unfit for use.
Use the total rig-up height for looking up the following tables and not the height of the connecting point
of the guy line.
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 15 17 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 33 35 36
15 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 32 34 36 38 40
20 21 23 25 27 29 30 32 34 36 37 39 41 43
25 22 25 28 30 32 33 35 37 39 41 42 44 46
30 24 27 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 49
35 25 29 32 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53
40 25 30 33 37 39 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
45 26 31 35 38 41 44 46 49 51 53 55 57 59
50 26 31 36 40 43 46 49 51 53 55 58 60 62
55 27 32 37 41 44 48 51 53 56 58 60 62 64
60 27 33 37 42 46 49 52 55 58 60 63 65 67
65 27 33 38 43 47 51 54 57 60 63 65 67 70
70 27 33 39 44 48 52 55 59 62 65 67 70 72
75 27 34 39 44 49 53 57 60 63 66 69 72 74
80 28 34 39 45 50 54 58 62 65 68 71 74 77
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 18 19 21 22 24 25 27 29 31 33 34 36 38
15 23 24 25 27 28 30 32 33 35 37 39 40 42
20 28 29 30 32 33 35 36 38 40 41 43 45 46
25 32 33 35 36 38 39 41 42 44 46 47 49 51
30 35 37 39 41 42 44 45 47 49 50 52 53 55
35 38 41 43 45 47 48 50 52 53 55 56 58 60
40 40 44 47 49 51 53 54 56 58 59 61 62 64
45 42 47 50 53 55 57 59 60 62 64 65 67 69
50 43 49 53 56 59 61 63 65 66 68 70 71 73
55 45 51 56 59 62 65 67 69 71 72 74 76 77
60 46 52 58 62 65 68 71 73 75 76 78 80 82
65 46 54 60 64 68 71 74 76 79 81 82 84 86
70 47 55 62 67 71 74 77 80 82 84 86 88 90
75 48 56 63 69 73 77 81 83 86 88 90 92 94
80 48 57 64 71 76 80 84 87 89 92 94 96 98
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 19 20 21 22 24 26 27 29 31 33 35 36 38
15 24 25 26 27 29 30 32 34 35 37 39 41 42
20 29 30 31 32 34 35 37 38 40 42 43 45 47
25 33 35 36 37 38 40 41 43 44 46 48 49 51
30 36 39 40 42 43 45 46 48 49 51 52 54 56
35 39 42 44 46 48 49 51 52 54 55 57 58 60
40 41 45 48 50 52 54 55 57 58 60 61 63 65
45 43 48 51 54 56 58 60 61 63 64 66 67 69
50 44 50 54 57 60 62 64 65 67 69 70 72 74
55 45 52 57 60 63 66 68 70 71 73 75 76 78
60 46 53 59 63 66 69 71 74 76 77 79 81 82
65 47 55 61 66 69 72 75 77 79 81 83 85 87
70 48 56 62 68 72 75 78 81 83 85 87 89 91
75 48 57 64 70 74 78 82 84 87 89 91 93 95
80 49 58 65 72 77 81 85 88 90 93 95 97 99
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 17 18 20 21 23 25 26 28 30 32 34 36 37
15 21 23 24 26 27 29 30 32 34 36 37 39 41
20 25 26 28 30 31 33 34 36 38 40 41 43 45
25 27 30 32 33 35 37 38 40 42 43 45 47 49
30 29 32 35 37 39 40 42 44 46 47 49 51 52
35 30 34 38 40 42 44 46 48 49 51 53 55 56
40 32 36 40 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 58 60
45 32 38 42 45 48 50 53 55 57 58 60 62 64
50 33 39 43 47 50 53 56 58 60 62 64 66 67
55 34 40 45 49 53 56 58 61 63 65 67 69 71
60 34 40 46 51 55 58 61 64 66 68 70 72 74
65 34 41 47 52 56 60 63 66 69 71 74 76 78
70 35 42 48 53 58 62 65 69 71 74 76 79 81
75 35 42 48 54 59 63 67 71 74 77 79 82 84
80 35 42 49 55 60 65 69 73 76 79 82 84 87
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 17 18 19 21 23 24 26 28 30 32 33 35 37
15 21 22 24 25 27 28 30 32 33 35 37 39 41
20 23 25 27 29 30 32 34 35 37 39 41 42 44
25 26 28 30 32 34 36 37 39 41 43 44 46 48
30 27 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 44 46 48 50 51
35 28 32 35 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 51 53 55
40 29 34 37 40 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 58
45 30 35 39 42 45 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62
50 30 36 40 44 48 50 53 55 57 59 61 63 65
55 30 36 41 46 49 53 55 58 60 62 65 67 68
60 31 37 42 47 51 54 58 60 63 65 67 70 72
65 31 37 43 48 52 56 60 63 65 68 70 72 75
70 31 38 44 49 54 58 61 65 68 70 73 75 77
75 31 38 44 50 55 59 63 66 70 73 75 78 80
80 31 38 45 50 56 60 64 68 72 75 78 80 83
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 17 18 20 21 23 24 26 28 30 32 33 35 37
15 21 22 24 25 27 28 30 32 33 35 37 39 41
20 24 26 27 29 31 32 34 35 37 39 41 42 44
25 26 28 31 32 34 36 38 39 41 43 44 46 48
30 27 31 33 36 37 39 41 43 45 46 48 50 51
35 28 32 36 38 41 43 44 46 48 50 52 53 55
40 29 34 38 41 43 45 48 50 51 53 55 57 59
45 30 35 39 43 46 48 50 53 55 57 58 60 62
50 30 36 40 44 48 51 53 55 58 60 62 64 65
55 31 36 41 46 49 53 55 58 60 63 65 67 69
60 31 37 42 47 51 55 58 60 63 65 68 70 72
65 31 37 43 48 52 56 60 63 65 68 70 73 75
70 31 38 44 49 54 58 61 65 68 70 73 75 78
75 31 38 44 50 55 59 63 67 70 73 75 78 80
80 31 38 45 51 56 60 64 68 72 75 78 80 83
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 996.15954, 128-in. Flange, 80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor
H—the height to the top of the gooseneck
L—the distance from the wellhead to the center of the reel
Locate the H and L (in ft) that correspond to your specific rig up. The radial distance from the wellhead
must be at least equal to the value (in ft) at their intersection
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 13 15 16 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 33 35
15 15 17 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 31 33 35 37
20 16 18 21 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 37 39
25 17 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 41
30 17 20 23 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44
35 18 21 24 27 29 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46
40 18 22 25 28 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 46 48
45 18 22 25 29 31 34 37 39 41 43 45 48 50
50 18 22 26 29 32 35 38 40 43 45 47 49 51
55 18 22 26 30 33 36 39 41 44 46 49 51 53
60 18 23 27 30 34 37 40 42 45 48 50 52 55
65 19 23 27 31 34 37 40 43 46 49 51 54 56
70 19 23 27 31 35 38 41 44 47 50 52 55 57
75 19 23 27 31 35 38 42 45 48 51 53 56 59
80 19 23 27 31 35 39 42 46 49 52 54 57 60
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 996.16074, 118-in. Flange, 72-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor
H—the height to the top of the gooseneck
L—the distance from the wellhead to the center of the reel
Locate the H and L (in ft) that correspond to your specific rig up. The radial distance from the wellhead
must be at least equal to the value (in ft) at their intersection
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 13 15 17 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 31 33 35
15 16 18 19 21 23 25 27 29 30 32 34 36 38
20 17 20 22 24 26 27 29 31 33 35 37 38 40
25 18 21 23 26 28 30 32 33 35 37 39 41 43
30 19 22 25 27 30 32 34 36 38 40 41 43 45
35 19 23 26 29 31 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
40 20 24 27 30 33 35 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
45 20 24 28 31 34 37 39 41 44 46 48 50 52
50 20 24 28 32 35 38 41 43 45 48 50 52 54
55 20 25 29 32 36 39 42 44 47 49 52 54 56
60 20 25 29 33 37 40 43 46 48 51 53 56 58
65 20 25 29 33 37 41 44 47 50 52 55 57 60
70 21 25 30 34 38 41 45 48 51 54 56 59 61
75 21 25 30 34 38 42 45 49 52 55 57 60 63
80 21 26 30 34 39 42 46 49 53 56 59 61 64
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 997.02400, 128-in. Flange, 80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor
H—the height to the top of the gooseneck
L—the distance from the wellhead to the center of the reel
Locate the H and L (in ft) that correspond to your specific rig up. The radial distance from the wellhead
must be at least equal to the value (in ft) at their intersection
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 13 15 16 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 33 35
15 15 17 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 31 33 35 37
20 16 18 21 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 37 39
25 17 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 41
30 17 20 23 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44
35 18 21 24 27 29 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46
40 18 22 25 28 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 46 48
45 18 22 25 29 31 34 37 39 41 43 45 48 50
50 18 22 26 29 32 35 38 40 43 45 47 49 51
55 18 22 26 30 33 36 39 41 44 46 49 51 53
60 18 23 27 30 34 37 40 42 45 48 50 52 55
65 19 23 27 31 34 37 40 43 46 49 51 54 56
70 19 23 27 31 35 38 41 44 47 50 52 55 57
75 19 23 27 31 35 38 42 45 48 51 53 56 59
80 19 23 27 31 35 39 42 46 49 52 54 57 60
Rig-up Chart, Halliburton 997.02407, 138-in. Flange, 80-in. Core Reel, 1 Motor
H—the height to the top of the gooseneck
L—the distance from the wellhead to the center of the reel
Locate the H and L (in ft) that correspond to your specific rig up. The radial distance from the wellhead
must be at least equal to the value (in ft) at their intersection
H
L 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
10 17 18 19 21 23 24 26 28 30 32 33 35 37
15 21 22 24 25 27 28 30 32 33 35 37 39 41
20 24 26 27 29 31 32 34 36 37 39 41 42 44
25 26 28 31 32 34 36 38 39 41 43 44 46 48
30 27 31 33 36 38 39 41 43 45 46 48 50 52
35 28 33 36 38 41 43 45 46 48 50 52 53 55
40 29 34 38 41 43 46 48 50 52 53 55 57 59
45 30 35 39 43 46 48 51 53 55 57 59 60 62
50 30 36 41 45 48 51 53 56 58 60 62 64 66
55 31 37 42 46 50 53 56 58 61 63 65 67 69
60 31 37 43 47 51 55 58 61 63 66 68 70 72
65 31 38 44 49 53 57 60 63 66 68 71 73 75
70 32 38 44 50 54 58 62 65 68 71 73 76 78
75 32 39 45 50 55 60 64 67 70 73 76 78 81
80 32 39 45 51 56 61 65 69 72 75 78 81 83
References
API RP 54—Recommended Practice for Occupational Safety for Oil and Gas Well Drilling and
Servicing Operations
API RP 4G—Recommended Practice for Maintenance and Use of Drilling and Well Servicing
Structures
API RP 9B—Recommended Practice on Application, Care and Use of Wire Rope in Oilfield Service
AESC—American Energy Service Contractors (Was AOSC) Recommended Safe Procedures and
Guidelines for Oil and Gas Well Servicing
i
ii
Section 5
The coiled tubing unit provides a means of circulating chemicals in a well to dissolve paraffin or any
other type of soluble deposits. Care should be taken to make sure the proper sealing elements are used in
the discharge iron, reel swivel, BOPs and stripper. The chemical is often some form of aromatic solvent
which may be highly flammable and toxic. If possible the coiled tubing unit should be located upwind of
the well and the fluid pumping unit. In the same way as pumping hot oil, all the safety requirements
pertaining to working with flammable fluids should be observed.
The most effective methods of dealing with paraffin and salt buildup are to melt the paraffin with hot oil
or hot water, or to dissolve the paraffin with chemicals.
Certain water-based chemicals have been successfully used to remove downhole paraffin deposits. These
chemicals, when added to water, have the ability to remove accumulated organic deposits and disperse
them for easy removal.
2—Parasperse Additives
Parasperse has proven very successful in both laboratory and field tests as a water-dispersible paraffin
removal agent.
One of the most successful applications of Parasperse® cleaner is periodic cleaning of the formation face.
Other applications include wellbore cleanout, flowline cleaning, paraffin inhibitor placement, and as a
preflush in fracturing. This material can be used as an alternative to hot-oiling downhole. Parasperse is
ordinarily used at a concentration of 2-10% in a water carrier. This water may be produced formation
brine or clean surface water.
Successful treatments have been noted when cold water was used. Preferably, the system should be
warmed to about 100-120°F to aid the cleaning action of the Parasperse solution. In laboratory tests, the
Parasperse solution removed more crude paraffin than is dissolved in conventional paraffin solvents.
Parasperse treatments are also less expensive than conventional paraffin solvents. Since water comprises
90-98% of the removal system, the chemical expense is very reasonable. In many instances, Parasperse
treatments have significantly increased the production of a well.
September 2005 Applications and Job Design 5-1
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Paraspserse T was designed for the removal of both paraffins and asphaltenes. It has the same
applications as Parasperse.
Parasperse LR was primarily designed for use in hydrocarbon-based fluids. However, it can also be added
to aqueous fluids and has the same general applications as the other Parasperse additives.
3—Solvents
The use of solvents to remove paraffin deposits is becoming more common in the oil field. Many
laboratory studies have been conducted on a variety of solvents in an attempt to determine the best
solvents for paraffin and how the solubility varies with different waxes.
In general, the solubility of different waxes in a given solvent at a definite temperature decreases as the
molecular weight and melting point increase.
The usual practice has been to dissolve paraffin accumulations using light, hydrocarbon solvents such as
kerosene, naphtha, gasoline, diesel fuel, etc. These solvents are very effective for dissolving purified
paraffins such as canning waxes. However, crude waxes are usually deposited with a considerable
quantity of asphaltenes present. Because asphaltenes are insoluble in most solvents, they tend to hinder
the dissolving of the waxes present in the deposit. This makes the solvent less effective in dissolving the
total deposit.
4—PARAGON Solvents
Tests show that aromatic solvents such as xylene and toluene dissolve both the wax and the asphaltenes.
These two solvents are excellent for treating crude paraffin deposits. Halliburton's Paragon is an effective
blend of aromatic solvents.
Paragon 1 and Paragon 100E+ effectively dissolve paraffin without using benzene, ethyl benzene,
toluene, or xylene (BETX). The use of one or more of these four materials may be restricted in certain
areas due to government regulation.
Paragon EA™ is a cost-effective solvent for the removal of excess pipe dope, paraffin deposits, and crude
oil residues. In most cases, Paragon EA will be applied as a neat solvent. Unlike Xylene and Paragon
100E+, Paragon EA does not contain any aromatic components and is environmentally acceptable.
The coiled tubing unit is rigged up in the standard manner. A high temperature element must be used in
the stripper/packer assembly and in the B.O.P.'s. The discharge line between the hot oil unit and the
coiled tubing on the reel must also have high temperature seals in the connections and the rotating swivels
of the chicksan's and tubing reel swivel. Hot oil should be circulated through the coiled tubing until the
tubing is hot prior to going in the hole. Hot oil should never exceed 230°F when pumping through coiled
tubing due to the seals on the reel swivel. Extreme caution should be used when working around hot oil
and when moving the coiled tubing while circulating hot oil.
Caution Whenever a flammable fluid is being pumped, follow HSE Category 2, Standard
4, “Hydrocarbon Pumping,” and consider having fire protection on location.
Salt buildups can also be a problem in a producing well. Salt buildups that are water soluble can be
removed with hot water in the same manner as described for paraffin.
Asphaltene Removal
Asphaltenes are classified as belonging to the bitumen category and are complex molecules. Crude oil
with a high concentration of asphaltenes will essentially behave as a suspended mixture. The organic
particles can precipitate out of the mixture when significant pressure drops occur, when crude oil comes
in contact with a lean gas source, or when a dramatic change in fluid pH occurs. The removal of the
asphaltene deposits generally requires mechanical washing or chemical re-suspension. In the past, the
only chemicals successful in dispersing asphaltene deposition were organic solvents (napha, xylene, or
tolulene) which restored the suspension capability of the particles.
Asphaltene precipitation is less widespread in the United States than is paraffin precipitation. It appears
that certain fields in Mississippi and California are the most susceptible to this type of deposition.
However, any well producing asphaltic base crude may experience this problem. Asphaltene deposition
is also a problem in many areas outside the United States. Where asphaltene precipitation is a problem,
the deposition usually occurs at the bottom of the well bore and adjacent to the producing formation. In
some instances the asphaltenes may precipitate within the formation itself and cause damage.
Targon® II Solvent
Targon II is an organic solvent used to remove asphaltene deposits. This solvent was designed for use
with an aromatic solvent carrier (Paragon). Targon II was designed to use as an additive in aromatic
solvents to enhance their asphaltene dissolution properties by breaking down the strong intermolecular
bonding that tends to aggregate (form) the asphaltene particles. The breaking of this bonding allows
better solvent penetration and increases the dissolution rate of the asphaltenes.
Targon II is used from 1–10% by volume of the carrier. It will not work in solvents such as kerosene,
diesel, gasoline, condensate, etc.
Regular inhibited acid solution is normally 15% hydrochloric acid that contains corrosion inhibitor. It is
the basic acid for preparing penetrating and non-emulsifying acid. It is not normally used for scale
removal.
Penetrating Acid
Penetrating acid solution is regular inhibited acid that has 1 ½ gal of Pen-5 or Pen-88 per 1,000 gal. Pen-5
and Pen-88 are surfactants that lower the surface tension of the acid solution to approximately 25
dynes/cm. Lowering the surface tension increases the acid's ability to contact the scale.
A penetrating acid solution can be successfully used on scales containing only a small amount of iron if
it does not form an emulsion with the formation fluids. When treating surface pipelines, gathering lines,
or other systems where the solution will not enter the formation, penetrating acid can be used for all acid
soluble scale. Under cold conditions, increasing the concentration of the hydrochloric acid will increase
the reaction rate. With most iron scales, it is usually best to use at least 20% hydrochloric acid.
Non-emulsifying acid solution is regular inhibited acid that has one or more of the non-emulsifying
chemicals added. Non-emulsifying acid can also have Pen-5 or Pen-88 added to the solution to help
obtain the desired wetting properties.
The non-emulsifying chemicals are added to help prevent the formation of emulsions between the
treating solution and the formation fluids. Non-emulsifying acid, like penetrating acid, is used when the
scale is primarily calcium carbonate and the iron concentration is low.
Fe Acid
Fe acid contains hydrochloric acid along with a blend of sequestering agents and a pH control agent.
During scale removal, the sequestering agent contained in Fe acid prevents the precipitation of the iron
by forming a complex with the iron and keeping it in solution. Fe acid is most suited for the removal of
iron compounds from disposal and injection wells.
These deposits normally occur near the well bore and gradually block the permeability. Hydrochloric
acid will dissolve iron scales and cause a temporary increase in injectivity. However, as the acid spends
on the formation during the course of the acidizing treatment, iron salts and oxides that were put into
solution as iron chlorides may form insoluble iron hydroxides. These iron compounds can deposit near
the well bore and cause even lower injectivity than before the treatment.
The pH control is based on the action of a weak acid that reacts much more slowly on the limestone scale
and other acid soluble materials than the hydrochloric acid reacts. While the pH remains low (less than
3), the iron will not precipitate.
MSA contains a 10% concentration of acetic acid. MSAs greatest attribute in scale removal treatment is
that it will not damage chrome-plated parts or alloy steels found in downhole pumping. Calcium
carbonate scales are readily dissolved by MSA.
Paragon acid dispersion (PAD) is a mixture that contains paragon (an aromatic solvent), acid, and a
surfactant. The acid phase may be prepared from a number of acid solutions and selection of the acid
phase depends on the conditions involved. In scale removal applications, the aromatic Paragon portion
of the dispersion is effective in removing paraffin, congealed oil and other organic deposits. This allows
the acid to contact the scale and react more completely. PAD has been injected as the first stage for
degreasing and removing acid-soluble material prior to a gypsol or liquid scale disintegrator job for the
removal of acid insoluble gypsum.
GYPSOL
Gypsol gypsum converter is a water solution containing 1/2 lb of OG-1 and 1/2 lb of OG-2 per gallon of
solution. A surfactant, Pen-5, is also added at one gallon per 1,000 gal of the solution.
With gypsol, gypsum (CaSO4 × 2(H20)) is converted to acid soluble calcium carbonate. Gypsol is
inexpensive and has been successfully used in many wells. However, the converting properties of Gypsol
are severely retarded when encountering dense, laminated gypsum scale. Because of this lack of
penetration, repeated application may be necessary.
Gypsol works only with gypsum deposits. Gypsol is normally placed in contact with the scale for 24 to
48 hours and allowed to convert gypsum to an acid soluble calcium carbonate. Before placing the gypsol,
the wellbore should be degreased with kerosene containing Hyflo IV or with DopeBuster M. After
pumping off the kerosene, the acid reactive scales and corrosion products should be removed with Fe acid
or MSA. PAD made with Fe acid or MSA can also be used to degrease the well bore to remove the acid
reactive materials present. The acid-containing solution should be completely pumped off before placing
the Gypsol. The converted gypsum can then be removed by dumping or pumping inhibited hydrochloric
acid or MSA. If the scale is extremely thick, successive treatments may be necessary with gypsol
followed by acid.
Liquid scale disintegrator or LSD, is an organic solution that is designed specifically for the removal of
calcium sulfate scales, gypsum and anhydrite. LSD reacts with gypsum to form a precipitate that won't
adhere to gypsum but forms a water dispersible sludge. The precipitate has a tendency to slough away
from the surface of the gypsum and increases the penetration of the solvent. Also, since the precipitate
does not adhere tightly and is readily dispersible in water, an acid stage may not be needed to remove the
sludge. If it becomes necessary to remove the LSD precipitate with acid, it is soluble at 1.2 lb per gallon
of 15% hydrochloric acid.
Laboratory and field tests have shown that most gypsum deposits can be removed with LSD in 24 to 48
hours. Also, LSD is more effective than gypsol for removing gypsum scale. A degreasing step with
paragon or a PAD solution with Fe acid as the acid phase is preferable prior to the scale removal
treatment. The degreasing step should be circulated for 12 to 24 hours before being pumped off. The LSD
solution is then dumped in the annulus. If the scale deposit is present in fractures some distance from the
well bore, a soaking period prior to circulating is recommended. If the scale deposit is considered
restricted to the well bore, circulation can be started immediately after dumping. Since the scale deposit
may be oil wet, the addition of a suitable surfactant would allow better wetting and contact.
Note Emulsion tests should be conducted with the LSD and non-emulsifiers added just as
they would be with an acid treatment. Wells on gas lift or flowing wells must have
the "spot and soak" technique applied.
LSD can be used at concentrations ranging from 10-50%. Concentrations and volumes used are
determined by the amount of scale present downhole. Figure 8.8 gives the theoretical amount of gypsum
removed by various concentrations of LSD in lb per gallon.
Note These are theoretical values and represent the maximum amount of gypsum that can
be removed. For instance, LSD-300 and LSD-500 solutions will theoretically remove
4.35 and 7.0 lb of gypsum per gallon, respectively. However, laboratory tests
conducted with field scale samples have shown that LSD-300 and LSD-500 solutions
will remove only 2-3 and 3-5 lb of gypsum per gallon in 24 to 48 hours under static
test conditions.
The best method in determining the most effective and economical concentration of LSD for a gypsum
removal treatment is to conduct disintegration rate tests with scale from the well. However, this is not
always possible under field conditions.
BaSO4lvent
BaSO4lvent, pronounced (bay-solvent), is a solution specifically designed to remove barium sulfate and
strontium sulfate scales from injection wells, disposal wells, gas wells, or producing wells. BaSO4lvent
solution is a one stage solvent; it does not require an additional acid stage for the removal of the scale.
The use of BaSO4lvent solution can minimize or eliminate costly and time-consuming pulling operations
and physical descaling of pumps and tubing. Deposits in perforations, SSSV, and gas-lift valves can be
removed with BaSO4lvent solution. By using BaSO4lvent, operators can more effectively remove
NORM (naturally occurring radioactive material) scale without exposure to its hazards and eliminate the
costly disposal of these materials.
BaSO4lvent solution can be applied neat or diluted to a 50% concentration consisting of freshwater,
seawater, or low-hardness brines. Higher temperatures increase the performance and reaction rate of
BaSO4lvent solution. Any means of agitation, such as circulation or periodical pumping of the material
back and forth through scaled perforations, will reduce the time required for scale removal. Formation
squeezes are effective for removing scale from the near-wellbore area. Soak and shut-in times of 8 to 48
hours are recommended. The actual time required can vary depending on the severity of the deposit.
Before the solvent is used in downhole well applications, well fluids should be pumped off or displaced
to minimize interference with the dissolving process at the problem contact point.
When the deposition of barium sulfate or strontium sulfate has been diagnosed, the most practical
solution to the problem is to eliminate the causes. For instance, barium sulfate is most often formed as a
result of high-barium content injection water being mixed with water that contains an excess of sulfates.
By isolating these waters, the problem could be eliminated. If the cause cannot be eliminated, the next
most practical approach is to treat the injection water or produced water with a scale inhibitor such as
LP-55 to help prevent the deposition of the scale.
Using pulsating pressure waves, the primarily use of this tool is for the removal of near wellbore damage.
This tool has also been used successfully to remove hard scale and it can also be used to remove paraffin,
asphaltenes and salts when used with the appropriate chemicals or fluids.
Using high-pressure fluid and a series of nozzles, the primary use of these tools is for the removal of hard
scale buildups. They can also be used for many other cleanout applications.
This calculation method is only suitable for cleaning out wells with all sections inclined less than 30º
from the vertical. See separate notes for cleaning wells with deviation greater than 30º.
It is important that the reservoir can support a full column of fluid. The well operator should know how
much fluid the reservoir can support before the well starts to take losses. If a well starts to take losses
during a cleanout operation it can cause the particles that are meant to be getting circulated out to fall
back down the wellbore potentially sticking the coiled tubing. The weight of the particles that are being
cleaned out by the fluid need to be taken into account to calculate the actual fluid weight during a
wellbore cleanout. More details are given later.
Using commingled fluid can lower the hydrostatic weight of the cleaning fluid. It is often thought that
commingling the fluid with gas improves the cleaning process but this is not usually the case. Adding gas
to a liquid increases the rate at which any solids will fall through the fluid. Any gains in annular velocity
are only achieved as the gas gets closer to the surface and is expanding. An increase in annular velocity
is most often desired in the larger casing annulus but here the gas is usually still compressed so adds little
to the annular velocity. Keeping the nitrogen ratio below 30% as it returns up the annulus to the surface
equipment avoids excess velocities and erosion. To avoid erosion, fluid velocities should be kept below
35 ft/sec (10.7 m/sec). Increasing the Nitrogen ratio also increases the chance of fluid refluxing in the
annulus. This occurs when the nitrogen rate traveling up the annulus gets so high that it forces the fluid
back down the annulus taking the solids down also.
4. Calculate using foam with nitrogen ratio between 60% and 95% in the wellbore.
The main advantages of foam are the better solids transport properties and low hydrostatic pressures that
can be achieved. Foams are basically commingled fluids with a higher ratio of nitrogen. To keep them
stable the addition of a foamer is required (such as a surfactant) which is often added using a foam
generator. More details about foams can be found in a separate section.
A variety of ways exist to calculate or estimate this but a simple way is often the use of the following
chart based on the equation from the Drilling Practices Manual. It should be noted that this chart is set
up for proppant with a particle SG of 2.65 and a fluid SG of 1. When fluid or solids vary from this the
actual calculation should be done using the equation on the chart. This is especially true for some of the
heavier types of proppant.
For non-Newtonian fluids it is necessary to use apparent viscosity estimated for the given conditions. Due
to the nature of coiled tubing operations, apparent viscosity for a fluid can usually be based on the
viscosity at a shear rate of 511 sec-1 (or Fann 35 speed of 300 rpm with R1, B1, F1 setup).
When using gelled fluids, be sure to find the viscosity while at the expected downhole temperature.
Elevated temperatures can have a major effect on a gelled fluids viscosity. It is often difficult to predict
the temperature a fluid will reach while getting circulated around a well, so an estimate of the worst case
needs to be done.
After this step, the particle settling velocity (or slip velocity) should have been estimated.
When the weight of the fill material is unknown, Table 5.2 can be used to provide an estimate.
Figure 5.2—Particle settling velocities (from Drilling Practices Manual). Particle SG = 2.65, Fluid SG = 1.
6. Calculate expected pump pressures, pump rates and therefore achievable annular velocities
with chosen fluid.
For Newtonian fluids (such as water, glycerin, salt water, acids, kerosene, diesel, alcohol and oil), the
pump friction pressures for the pump rates can be calculated using simple charts in the Coiled Tubing
Handbook. For non-Newtonian fluids (such as gels and some drilling muds) and friction reduced fluids
it is more accurate to consult specific fluid data sheets or computer software such as HalWin™ or
Cerberus™. In most cases friction pressure in the annulus for coiled tubing operations is negligible but
if the coiled tubing OD is close to the ID of the wellbore tubulars for any significant length then the
pressures can be substantial.
Once a maximum pump rate has been estimated the annular velocity can be estimated from the following
formula.
pump rate (gpm) × 24.51
Annular Velocity (ft/min) =
(ID prod 2 − OD coil2 )
Compare the slowest annular velocity calculated from Step 6 and compare to the fastest particle settling
velocity (slip velocity) from Step 5. If annular velocities above particle settling velocities can be reached
then it should be possible to clean out the wellbore. The time taken to clean out the wellbore is dependant
on the particles net rise up the wellbore. To determine the cleanout time in later steps the particles net
rise can be calculated as follows.
In situations where the annular velocities are high enough to reach the speeds shown below this will
usually be sufficient to easily lift most solids up the wellbore.
Straight gas (air, N2, natural gas etc) - 3,000 ft/min (50 ft/sec)
8. Add Friction Reducer to base fluid, increase viscosity of base fluid and / or use larger coiled
tubing.
The addition of friction reducing chemicals to base fluids can significantly reduce the amount of pump
pressure required to pump the fluid and can therefore increase the annular velocities that can be achieved.
Also, by reducing the pump pressures they allow us to pump faster and therefore decrease the time it takes
to carry out the operation. Different friction reducers are available to suit different fluids and
environments.
Gelling the base fluid to increase it's viscosity will decrease the velocity that a particle will settle meaning
that the annular velocity can be decreased while still lifting the solids up the annulus. Special attention
should be made to the well temperature as this can have a drastic effect on gels. Gel stabilizers may need
to be used.
Using larger coiled tubing allows increased pump rates and also decreases the size of the annulus around
the coiled tubing thus increasing fluid velocities. Using larger coiled tubing may not always be possible
due to various operational constraints such as downhole restrictions or surface equipment capabilities.
9. Calculate or specify the maximum allowable hydrostatic loading the reservoir can hold due to
sand loading.
When using commingled fluids the calculations should be based on liquid volumes only.
The equivalent circulating density (ECD) at the reservoir will change throughout a cleanout operation
and is dependant mainly on fluid weight, friction pressure in the annulus and wellhead pressure. It is
important to keep the ECD below the level at which the reservoir starts to take fluid losses or else the
solids being cleaned out may start falling back down the wellbore and bridge around the coiled tubing
causing it to become stuck. The wellhead pressure is easily determined and changed by looking at the
gauge and adjusting a choke if necessary. The annulus friction pressure is usually negligible for coiled
tubing operations but should be considered if the coiled tubing OD is close to the wellbore ID.
The main factor needed to calculate the ECD is the fluid weight. The fluid weight increases as it picks
up solids and begins to circulate them out so it is important to regulate the cleaning speed to ensure the
fluid weight does not become to great.
Before the operation try to determine the maximum allowable fluid weight based on the past history of
the well or similar wells to give an idea when the well will start to take losses. Allow an additional safety
factor of at least 500psi and never exceed the wells fracture gradient.
If unsure about anything with the job design try to plan for a fluid loading of 1 ppg. This means that using
an 8.33 ppg cleanout fluid the sand laden fluid will be 9.33 ppg. If well information and experience levels
are both good the amount of sand loading can be increased accordingly to perhaps 3 ppg to speed up job
times. The fluid loading can also be changed throughout the job if necessary, for instance if a well has
been fractured and the proppant has screened out (well is full of proppant) it may be beneficial to clean
the well with a fluid loading as high as 5 ppg but decrease this down to 1ppg when approaching the top
of the reservoir or the bottom of the production tubing. This depth will change depending on the
properties of the sand being cleaned and should be evaluated in each instance.
With foams the fluid loading should be kept below 1.5 ppg to avoid interfering with the foam quality.
If we know that a well will start taking losses when the hydrostatic pressure or wellhead pressure
increases by a certain amount, then the maximum allowable fluid weight for the cleanout operation
can be calculated using the following equation:
A well is filled with fresh water (8.33 ppg) and has a reservoir TVD of 10,000 ft. We know that an
increase in hydrostatic or wellhead pressure of 2,000 psi will start to cause losses.
What is the maximum fluid weight we can have in the well throughout the cleanout operation? (This
assumes the worst case in which the entire wellbore is filled with the maximum fluid weight).
Maximum pressure increase = 2,000 psi, but we want to apply a safety factor of say 500 psi so this
value decreases to 1,500 psi
1,500
Maximum Fluid Weight = 8.33 + = 11.21 ppg
0.052 × 10,000
Similar to the previous example, this method calculates the maximum fluid weight based on the
reservoir pressure and the maximum overbalance (OB).
A well has a reservoir pressure of 4,500 psi at a TVD of 10,000 ft. We have been told that the
maximum allowable overbalance on the reservoir is 2,000 psi. What would be the maximum fluid
weight in the wellbore be to keep below the maximum overbalance.
Max OB = 2,000 psi, but we should include a safety factor here of 500 psi; therefore, the Max OB =
1,500 psi
If we need to calculate the fluid weight that will be obtained during a wellbore cleanout operation at
a know RIH speed the following equation can be used.
Consider 7-in. 24-lb casing (ID = 6.336-in.) filled with 20/40 Ottowa proppant.
From tables:
(These numbers for bulk density and porosity are also good numbers to use if the actual sand or
proppant data is unknown)
If porosity = 40%, then 40% of volume is well fluid, let’s assume freshwater.
If we RIH into the sand at10 ft/min while pumping at 42 gpm, what will the new dirty fluid weight
be?
10. Calculate the CT travel rate for a given flow rate to ensure the fluid loading is kept low enough.
When using commingled fluids or foams, the calculations should be based on liquid volumes only.
From Step 9, the desired maximum fluid weight should now be known. From this, the maximum RIH
speed can now be calculated as follows:
RIH speed (while cleaning sand) to obtain the desired fluid weight =
11. Calculate the cleanout time based on clean rate, annular velocity and particle net rise velocity.
The total cleanout time is basically: (ignoring RIH and POOH, at the start and end of the job)
12. When POOH while circulating, ensure CT displacement is taken into account with fluid flow-
rate and annular velocity calculations.
Be sure to pull out of hole slower than the particle net rise velocity.
When calculating annular velocities while POOH, remember to subtract fluid volumes required to fill the
space left from the CT. These calculations should be based on the external displacement of the coiled
tubing. (While pulling the CT out of the well, we are also pulling the fluid inside the coiled tubing out of
the well and back onto the reel).
The POOH speed can be increased once the BHA has been pulled up out of the casing and into the
production tubing (if applicable) due to the higher annular velocities.
Example:
With 2-in. OD CT inside 4.5-in. 12.6# tubing, the annular volume is 476 gal/1,000ft.
The external displacement of 2-in. CT is 0.163 gal/ft.
If we POOH at 100 ft/min, what effect does this have on the annular velocity while pumping at 84
gpm?
The annular velocity while the CT is stationery is 176.5 ft/min
If we POOH at 100 ft/min, it takes 100 × 0.163 = 16.3 gpm to fill the CT displacement.
Therefore, the actual fluid rate in the annulus becomes 84 - 16.3 = 67.7 gpm
This gives an annular velocity of 142.2 ft/min while the pipe is being pulled out of hole.
To calculate the maximum POOH speed to ensure the BHA is always behind the sand being cleaned
out, use the following equation:
Solids are always being pulled downward by gravity. When a hole is deviated or horizontal, the
particulates tend to lie or wedge into the low side of the hole. When the hole is deviated by more than
35°, then the mechanism of movement upward is changed to a rolling, sand-dunning movement. The
wash fluids will tend to pass over the top of the particulates. Water in turbulence works best in this
situation but friction pressures are often too high to allow reaching the necessary annular velocity. Foams
will usually work the best. Gel-laden fluids keep the fluid in laminar flow and do not generate enough
energy to clean the sand out of the triangulated area. Gel fluids become the least successful means in this
scenario
If cleaning the wellbore with straight fluids, aim to have an annular velocity of 10 times the particle
settling velocity.
If cleaning the wellbore using a foam, aim to have a foam quality along the complete deviated section
above 80% and less than 95% on surface. This is when foam has the best carrying capacity.
with pressure trapped between plugs that will require back pressure to be held on the annulus to prevent
pressure surges at surface.
Working with hot fluids will require that extra care be taken when working around the coiled tubing
equipment and pump lines. In the case of hot oil a severe fire hazard exists and if possible, water should
be the choice of wash fluid over oil.
Due to the dangers of pumping flammable fluids, HSE Standard Category 2 Standard 4 - Hydrocarbon
Pumping should be followed and consideration should be given to having fire protection on location for
hot oil jobs.
1. Ensure that all personnel are aware of all hazards that exist. Tarpaulins should be rigged between
the reel and other critical components or any source of ignition to deflect the spray if a leak
should occur.
2. All elastomers in the well control equipment and reel inlet iron must be rated for the high tem-
peratures that will be encountered. Provisions to change out the stripper rubbers during the job
should be made as this is a likely occurrence.
3. Ensure that the flowline is made up of materials that will handle the heat involved.
4. Install a variable full opening choke in the flow line. Keep the choke away from the wellhead to
minimize exposure of the operator to leaks at the stuffing box.
5. With the well shut in, circulate the reel with hot fluid until the returns are hot. At this time any
back pressure required can be established.
6. Open the well and run in no faster than 20-30 ft per minute (5-10 m/min). Expect to encounter
obstructions at surface.
7. When encountering hard plugs, allow the heat to do the work in softening the plug. Do not apply
force with the injector. When moving downhole any large distance the fluid exiting the jet most
likely has been cooled by the wellbore. In some cases the wellbore will have to be heated up
before any further progress can be made.
8. Continue down at the prescribed tubing and fluid rates, checking tubing drag every 500 ft (150
m). Maintain returns throughout the cleanout program. If the observed returns decrease or cease,
pull up the hole until returns are reestablished.
9. When the final desired depth is reached, circulate a minimum of one annular volume prior to
pulling out of the well.
10. Pull the coiled tubing out of the hole while maintaining circulation. DO NOT shut the pumps
down for any reason, until you are out of the hole.
11. Flush the coiled tubing with heated CLEAN fluid to eliminated paraffin accumulations in the
pipe.
Try not to re-circulate fluids saturated with paraffin. Do not heat solvents or diesel when cleaning
paraffin. Be prepared for tubing slippage in the injector drive chains, as paraffin coats the OD of the
coiled tubing.
1. Ensure that the flowline is made up of materials that will handle the chemicals involved.
2. Install a variable full opening choke in the flow line. Keep the choke away from the wellhead to
minimize exposure of the operator to leaks at the stuffing box.
3. Open the well and run in the well pumping an inert fluid. Do not pump any chemical solutions
until they are required.
4. When encountering hard plugs, allow the chemicals to do the work in softening the plug. Do not
apply force with the injector.
5. Continue down at the prescribed tubing and fluid rates, checking tubing drag every 500 ft (150
m). Maintain returns throughout the cleanout program. If the observed returns decrease or cease,
pull up the hole until returns are reestablished.
6. When the final desired depth is reached, circulate a minimum of one annular volume prior to
pulling out of the well.
7. Pull the coiled tubing out of the hole while maintaining circulation. DO NOT shut the pumps
down for any reason, unless you are out of the hole.
8. Flush the coiled tubing with best available water source. If acid is used, a neutralizing fluid
should be used.
Post-job
There are several aspects of CT cleanout jobs that can cause problems on the next operation that is to be
performed by the coiled tubing unit. The majority of these problems come from materials and chemicals
left in the BOPs and reel. Materials can cause the BOPs to not function due to build up and corrosion
between the rams and bore. Corrosive materials left in the coiled tubing will cause pinholes or tubing
failures
1. After the well is shut in, flush clean water through the coiled tubing while moving the nozzle
across the bop rams. This will help clean out any chemical or sand that may have got in during
the circulation of the well.
2. Open all Lo-torc valves that have remained closed during the job and flush out any chemicals.
3. Lubricate the reel swivel and Lo-torc valves
4. After rig down and before the next job, disassemble any sealing component that has had contact
with chemicals or high heat and inspect the seals.
5. Disassemble, inspect, and clean the BOPs paying special attention to the elastomers.
There are two main situations when a well needs to be unloaded and these require different approaches
to the design of the operation.
1. Removing workover kill fluid—To return the well to production, you would need to remove a
small amount of wellbore fluid to get the well to an underbalanced condition. Typically, you
would plan an underbalance of 500 to 1,500 psi. Therefore, you only need to calculate the amount
of wellbore fluid that must be removed to reduce the bottomhole pressure (BHP).
Because gas lift has fluid fallback, you must run the tubing approximately 20% deeper into the
fluid than the amount of fluid you want to remove.
2. Jetting in a well after stimulation—Stimulation treatments often require injecting a large
amount of fluid into the reservoir. In many cases, it is necessary to jet back much of this fluid
before the well will produce on its own. Therefore, the jetting process becomes a longer-term gas
lift process.
Gas lift may be required at the deepest point in a vertical well or at the heel in a horizontal well.
If you inject nitrogen below the perforations, all the nitrogen may leak off to the zone rather than
gas-lift the fluid in the wellbore. Therefore, run the coiled tubing into the well while jetting nitro-
gen to a depth just above the perforations or at the heel of a horizontal well.
Unloading Considerations
When utilizing nitrogen to unload wellbores and initiate flow, it is important to recognize the effects of
lifting fluids in the coiled tubing / production tubing annulus. As the ratio of coiled tubing OD to
production tubing ID increases, pressure losses within the annulus increase. The amount of coiled tubing
run concentric within the production tubing will significantly affect the degree of annular friction
pressure loss and fluid head as compared to flow in an unobstructed tube. When the nitrogen injection
point is run deeper into the well, the expected response is an increase in BHP drawdown and a
proportional increase in liquid production rate. However this perception is not accurate.
As a volume of nitrogen is pumped down the coiled tubing, the pressure required to overcome the
hydrostatic pressure within the annulus causes the gas to compress. As the injection point of the nitrogen
is lowered deeper in the wellbore, the hydrostatic pressure will increase and cause the nitrogen to
compress further. When the nitrogen gas exits the coiled tubing and begins to lift liquids within the
annulus, the hydrostatic pressure of the flowing column will decrease, causing the nitrogen to expand.
The expansion of the nitrogen volume dispersed in the liquid will increase the velocity of the fluids,
resulting in a decrease of the hydrostatic pressure. The increase in annular fluid velocity also decreases
the degree of liquid slippage within the flowing well.
The volume of nitrogen within the liquid will continue to expand as it flows to the surface, causing the
degree of expansion to become dramatic. The fluid velocity and frictional pressure losses experienced in
the annulus increase significantly. These increased frictional pressure losses are a function of the
expanding gas in the system. Depending upon how deep the nitrogen injection point was in the wellbore,
there will be a specific point in the tubing annulus where the benefits of reduced hydrostatic pressure are
overcome by the increases in frictional pressure losses. The unloading system will then become limited
by the frictional pressure loss within the annulus and the fluid lift rates decline dramatically.
If this drop in produced fluids is not interpreted correctly, the natural reaction is to continue deeper into
the well bore with the coiled tubing and increase the nitrogen rates. This reaction to low fluid production
will, in fact, create greater frictional pressure loss in the annulus and in some cases, cause the liquid flow
to cease. In order to increase flow, the nitrogen circulation rate is cut back slowly while pulling the coiled
tubing back up the wellbore. Therefore, to minimize the effects of the aforementioned conditions, it is
recommended to use the smallest size of coiled tubing available for nitrogen unloading programs and to
perform the procedure with the lowest nitrogen circulation rates required.
The desired amount of hydrostatic pressure reduction should be indicated and a depth calculated that will
reflect the reduction of pressure.
Calculations
Example:
To regain production on a well that has recently been worked over, we want to reduce the bottomhole
pressure by 1,000 psi. The kill fluid density is 10 lb/gal and the completion is 3 1/2-in. OD, 9.3-lb/ft
tubing.
For example, if you chose a tubing RIH speed of 75 ft/min, up to 3 ½ completion tubing the nitrogen rate
would be 326 scf/min.
scf
N 2 = N 2 F × RIH × (ID 2 × 0.0009714)
min
N2 ft
RIH =
(ID 2 × 0.0009714) × N 2 F min
Example Job Procedure (unloading from downhole, e.g. immediately after a cleanout or stimula-
tion operation)
1. Perform the required cleanout or stimulation operations.
2. Once the well is completely cleaned out but while still circulating fluid through the choke, reduce
the choke size to achieve a low wellhead pressure (say, 100 psi). This setting should be sufficient
for the following unloading operation.
3. Start circulating nitrogen while pulling the coiled tubing to a pre-determined depth to obtain the
proper drawdown. Starting the nitrogen displacement at a shallow depth and then RIH to the
required depth as opposed to starting the displacement at a deeper depth requires less nitrogen
and will create less shock on the surface equipment as it reaches the top of the well.
4. Once the nitrogen starts to come up the annulus it will expand causing the hydrostatic pressure
and therefore pump pressure to decrease. Following these indications stop or slow the nitrogen
pump rate to reduce the pressure shock on surface when the gas reaches surface.
5. The expanding nitrogen moving up the wellbore will lower the hydrostatic pressure allowing the
nitrogen inside the coiled tubing to expand and therefore enter the wellbore. This expansion
alone may be enough to lift the well.
6. If required, continue to circulate nitrogen and RIH (using a nitrogen pump rate calculated in the
same way as the previous example) to the pre-determined depth until the well can sustain pro-
duction on its own.
7. Once the well is on production, slow the nitrogen rate to the minimum possible and pull the
coiled tubing out of the hole while maintaining circulation. If there is no possibility of any loose
solids in the annulus it may be safe to stop the nitrogen circulation.
8. If pumping through the coiled tubing is stopped, be prepared to start pumping again to pressure
up the coiled tubing if necessary. During the operation, wellhead pressure may increase to a level
where collapse of the coiled tubing is a concern.
9. Calculating the amount of nitrogen required to displace a well annulus is difficult because of the
continually changing pressures as the nitrogen expands. An estimate of the nitrogen volume
required for this operation can be done by calculating both the following quantities and using the
LARGER one only. (equipment losses should be calculated separately)
a. Volume of nitrogen required to displace the coiled tubing when the BHA is at the maximum
calculated depth. (due to nitrogen expansion and therefore pressure reduction in the annulus
this quantity will be enough in some cases)
b. Volume of nitrogen required to displace the coiled tubing / production tubing annulus (ignore
CT internal volume on reel and downhole) to the maximum calculated depth. Base this cal-
culation on a pressure equal to the maximum pressure we would anticipate on surface (say
1,000psi). If the annulus volume is large in relation to the CT volume then this may be the
quantity we require.
Important DO NOT automatically increase the nitrogen pump rate; this can lead to fluid
refluxing in the annulus which will make things worse.
Important DO NOT automatically go deeper into the well; this can also make things worse
due to fluid refluxing.
1. Ensure everything is in steady state, ie pump rate is constant and well returns are constant.
2. Measure the fluid returns and compare to the nitrogen rate being pumped into the well. If the ratio
of pumped gas to recovered fluid is greater than 1,500 scf/bbl, reduce the nitrogen rate and if the
ratio is less than 300 scf/bbl then increase the nitrogen rate. It may also be beneficial to jet nitro-
gen for a while then stop and let the well recover before jetting again (eg. Jet for 1 hour every 3
hours)
3. Gradually reduce the nitrogen rate while pulling the CT slowly up the well. Once expected
returns are seen start RIH again slower than before.
Equipment Considerations
Many nitrogen units are designed for pumping high rates of nitrogen. The minimum rate at which they
are capable of pumping may be too high for the planned operation with coiled tubing. Ensure the nitrogen
unit being used is suitable for the planned pump rates.
Pinpoint Stimulation
General Overview of Pinpoint Stimulation
As oil and gas producers are driven to improve return from their assets, coupled with continued decline
in discoveries of significant major reservoirs, their need to exploit more challenging reservoirs is
growing. Specific to stimulation, we are being challenged to more effectively and efficiently provide
solutions to this market segment.
Early efforts to stimulate multiple zones consisted of limited entry perforating, sand plugs separating
zones, as well as retrievable bridge plugs and packers. Although these solutions have been effective,
more speed and accuracy is needed. Recent development of composite (coiled tubing drillable) bridge
plugs has increased the speed and accuracy, yet more sophisticated solutions are required.
Today we offer Cobra Frac™, SurgiFrac™ and CobraMaxSM services; all are advanced solutions to
Pinpoint stimulation. Cobra Frac™ service combines coiled tubing and an exclusive bottomhole
assembly to easily and effectively stimulate multiple lenticular hydrocarbon-bearing reservoirs.
Typically, this can be done with a single trip in the well. Cobra Frac™ service saves time, but more
importantly it places the treatment directly in the zone of interest providing the Customer with a
stimulation treatment that will effectively drain the reservoir.
SurgiFrac™ service, typically used in openhole horizontals is a method used to surgically place fractures
in a wellbore without the need for mechanical isolation.
Cobra Frac™ and SurgiFrac™ services have all proven to be viable Pinpoint stimulation methods that
allow our Customers to generate the greatest return on their investment dollar.
Cobra Frac™
Cobra Frac™ is a stimulation technique for stimulating multiple zones individually using a straddle
packer assembly conveyed with coiled tubing. The straddle packer assembly is set across a perforated
zone and then the desired treatment is pumped down the coiled tubing. After treatment the assembly is
immediately moved to the next zone and the next treatment is pumped. Process continues for all zones.
Perforations are created prior to Cobra Frac™ and are not part of the Cobra Frac™ process.The Cobra
Frac™ bottomhole assembly offers:
• A specially designed straddle packer.
• An equalizing valve in the bottom packer to allow movement of tools without flowing the well or
circulating fluids (ideal for energized fluids, screenouts).
• A reciprocating J-slot that allows multiple sets on a single trip with no rotation to set.
• Packer does not drag sand or swab the wellbore when picking up.
• A top packer that acts like a check valve, allowing the well to be reverse-circulated to clean the tools
and wash out the underflush.
• A safety shear sub that allows the release of tools.
• A fracturing treatment that is optimized for each zone.
• A system that permits fracturing of missed or previously bypassed pay zones simple operation,
dependability and ease of field dressing.
• Available for 4 1/2-in. and 5 1/2-in. casing.
• Safety - with compression type tools, in an unplanned event the wellbore can be isolated to prevent
uncontrolled releases.
Operational Limitations
• Requires a minimum coiled tubing size of 2-in. (2 3/8-in. or greater preferred) due to the pump rates
required while pumping a frac fluid slurry.
• Suitable for cased hole, vertical and deviated wellbores up to around 45º
• Because of wear from dragging the cup in the well, reliable sealing between the cup and casing wall
cannot be certain on wells deeper than 8,000 ft.
• Current packer differential pressures are limited to 5,000 psi.
• Tools available for 4 1/2-in. and 5 1/2-in. casing
• If the well is unable to hold a column of fluid, special considerations need to be taken, such as reverse
circulate with N2 or the use of lost circulation materials to help in holding a column of fluid on the
backside. Holding a column of fluid on the backside allows you to monitor the treatments to help
assure there are not any communication concerns up hole.
Blast Joints
Knuckle Joint
2 7 (5 - 25 ft max.)
(Optional)
Shear Disconnect
Ported
3 (Optional DepthPro 8
Blast Joint
would fit below here)
4 Short Centralizer
RR4-EV Multi Set
Compression Packer
How is the Cobra Frac™ tool different from cup type tools?
The bottom packer acts as an anchor to prevent tool movement during the fracture treatment.
SurgiFrac™
SurgiFrac™ is a stimulation method that combines hydrajetting, fracturing and co-injection down the
annulus to create multiple fractures. The hydra-jetting tool is moved adjacent to the desired point of
treatment and the treating fluid is pumped through the tubing and out the jets into the formation while
additional fluid is pumped down the annulus. This process is performed without any form of a mechanical
sealing device such as a packer. Once the desired fracture is completed then the tool can be moved up
hole to pump additional fractures. The SurgiFrac™ process was developed to be able to treat the full
lateral length of horizontal wells and can be used on cased or open hole.
Usually requires a minimum coiled tubing size of 2 in. due to the pump rates required for the HydraJet
and frac operation while co-injecting down the annulus.
Currently, SurgiFrac™ service tools are available in four OD sizes: 3.06 in., 3.40 in., 3.66 in. and 4.50
in. The maximum standoff recommended for a SurgiFrac™ service application is 2.0 in.(radius);
therefore, for ID greater than 6.5 in., larger SurgiFrac™ service tools can be built on demand.
New procedures have been introduced to use SurgiFrac™ via coiled tubing to treat multiple intervals in
an unperforated vertical well. In a vertical well SurgiFrac™, all proppant laden fluid is pumped through
the coiled tubing with some additional clean fluid pumped through the annulus.
2 Shear Disconnect
Centralizer
4 Hydrajet Tool
Ball Sub
5
(Diverts all fluid pumped down the CT
through the hydrajet tool)
i
Test Pressure ..................................................................................... 6-37
Test Procedure ................................................................................... 6-37
Specifications ..................................................................................... 6-38
Quick-latches ........................................................................................... 6-41
Hydraconn Connectors ....................................................................... 6-41
Injector Connectors .................................................................................. 6-42
Operation ............................................................................................ 6-42
Hydraulic Releasing Connector .......................................................... 6-43
Unions and Flanges ................................................................................. 6-43
CB Unions .......................................................................................... 6-44
CH, CQ Unions ................................................................................... 6-45
CO Unions .......................................................................................... 6-46
Flange Dimensions ............................................................................. 6-47
Maintenance and Field Inspection ........................................................... 6-49
Suggested Maintenance Schedule ..................................................... 6-49
Field Inspections ................................................................................ 6-49
ii
Section 6
Preface
• Compact, solid block profile and two bolt bonnet design provides for easier handling and quicker ram
seal replacement
• Rams easily changed to accommodate all tubing sizes up to 2.375-in. diameter
• Oversized shear actuators, with multiplecut shear blades, allow for repeated shearing of tubing sizes
up to 2.375-in. at full 10,000-psi working pressure without the need for booster cylinders
• Hydraulic actuators include a quick union nut for easy and quick maintenance
• Slip rams have replaceable inserts with an interrupted tooth pattern that reduces slip damage to the
coiled tubing (CT) and maximizes grip area
• Available in the EN internally ported hydraulics configuration, or the EM model for use with
hydraulic hose bridles dual-combi BOP
Dual-Combi BOP
• Environmentally friendly, no loss of hydraulic fluids during ram change and routine cleaning
• Design makes it easier for the user to inspect and clean the unit
• Hydraulic pressure is utilized to back the actuator and rams away from the BOP body
• Hydraulic pressure moves the ram out of the bonnet to let you remove it easily
• Designed and manufactured for high-pressure CT applications
• Integral porting features inherent in the design use the existing open and close ports for all hydraulic
functions.
• Subsea wellhead intervention BOP which makes up an integral component of the lower wellhead
riser package
• Features a single line hydraulic system and an automatic, wedge-type, "Autolock" actuator system
• Autolock system secures rams in the closed position in the event of a hydraulic failure, or an
emergency situation that requires disconnecting from the subsea wellhead
• Built to customer's specific design requirements which generally include a dualbore valve block with
a combination of blind shear and pipe slip combi ram assemblies
• Combi rams offer increased functionality, and the ability to use a wide range of CT and wireline sizes
in a field-proven, compact design
• All pressure ratings and service applications are available including certification
• Reduced overall stack height by 50% over standard side door models
• Retractable packers and bushings enable full through bore capabilities for running tools through the
stripper packer
• Easy packer change. Hydraulic pressure is used to back the actuator and packer out of the body with
easy access to change the packer and bushings
• Tandem operability. The standard sidewinder can be run in tandem
• Low hydraulic pressures
Figure 6.11—Tandem
stripper packer
Hydraulic Quick-Latches/Connectors
Type JU Hydraconn Connector Unions
• Design facilitates a secure connection between the
coiled tubing BOP and stripper packer, providing an
elevated level of personal safety by minimizing the
need for operator assistance during rig-up of the
pressure control stack
• Constructed to provide a safe and reliable connection
in a compact, rugged design
• Incorporates a tapered seal bore that facilitates
stabbing the connection
• Safety latch with a manual override and an indicator
included to prevent an unintentional release while
operating with well pressure in the stack
• Available in 3.06-, 4.06-, 5.12-, 6 3/8-, and 7.06-in.
sizes in pressure ranges 5,000, 10,000 and 15,000 psi
Injector Connectors
Quick Disconnects
Work Window
• Hydraulic work window with large opening, convenient access and ample
working room
• Dual wellbore seals on reciprocating window, with back ups for the main
dynamic seal
• Cam lock window has a unique positive lock in the closed position
• Reliable, safe design based on TOT side door technology
• Electronic sensor to indicate the window is closed and locked
• Well pressure lock prevents hydraulic pressure from opening the window
Figure 6.18—Work
window
Specialty Equipment
Tubing Cutter
A BOP consists of several pairs of rams. Each type of ram performs a specific function:
• Blind rams isolate wellbore fluids and contain pressure when there is no CT in the BOP.
• Pipe or tubing rams seal around CT to isolate wellbore fluids and contain pressure.
• Shear rams have cutting blades to shear CT.
• Slip or gripping rams hold the CT to prevent it from being pushed out of the well or from falling down
the well.
Blind rams, and pipe or tubing rams are also known as sealing rams.
The number and type of ram pairs in a BOP is determined by the configuration of the BOP: single,
double, triple, quad, or quint. The standard CT BOP is a quad. From top down, the four separate ram pairs
are blind rams, shear rams, slip rams, and pipe rams.
The standard CT blowout preventer has two equalizing ports, one on each sealing ram. It also has a side
outlet between the slip and shear rams. This side outlet can be used as a safety kill line.
BOPs are available in several sizes. These sizes normally follow the API flange sizes. They start with the
2 9/16-in. and can be as large as 7 1/16-in. Currently the most commonly used size is the 3 1/16-in. quad.
Table 6.7 is a rule of thumb for the size of CT that can be used in each BOP.
Features
• Environmentally friendly, will not spill hydraulic fluid
when the bonnets are retracted from the BOP body.
• Hydraulic pressure will retract the actuators away from
the body making the maintenance easier.
• Corrosion resistant alloy body for severe harsh well
conditions.
• Keyless ram assemblies.
• Combination pipe and slip ram assemblies. One set of
rams will seal and hold the CT.
• Combination shear and seal ram assemblies. One set of
rams will cut the CT and seal on the open hole.
• Forged steel body
• Cam-lock cylinder to body connections.
• Integral side outlet flange for use as a kill port.
• Double seal for critical wellbore seals.
• Quick union ram access.
• Corrosion resistant alloys on the rams, piston rods, seat
and stems. These alloys should be highly resistant to
corrosion, drilling fluids, and well fluids.
• Separate well pressure and hydraulic seals on the piston
rods with a weep hole between them to prevent well
fluids from entering the hydraulic system and to indicate
leaks.
• Teflon coating on the body to minimize the onset of
corrosion on the BOP body.
Figure 6.21—BOPs
• Indicator rods on each piston to indicate the true position of the ram.
• Manual nonrising stems encapsulated in the hydraulic chamber. A special thread on the stem reduces
galling and makes it easier to close with full well head pressure.
• Solid block BOP body with no welds or threads on the BOP body.
• Integral equalizing valve that has no exposed tubing.
• Easy assembly and maintenance. A BOP should have ram change rods that make it easy for daily
maintenance. Actuators should only go together one way so they cannot be put together incorrectly.
Options
• Quick unions for all types of equipment. Quick unions exist for 5,000, 10,000 and 15,000 psi H2S
environments.
• A debooster is a safety tool to monitor well pressure without having the high pressure and well fluids
in the control cabin. A 4:1 debooster is available that will mount to the BOP body and connect to the
high-pressure port on the BOP body. Well pressure runs to the inlet of the debooster and is converted
to hydraulic pressure with a reduction of four.
• The hydraulic line is run to the control cabin and connected to a Martin Decker 1:4 gauges that
indicate the actual well pressure.
• Ram change rods to make it easier to pull the rams out of the BOP. The actuators can be pulled away
from the body without having to pull them off. Ram change rods are standard for some BOP models.
• Booster cylinders to shear large-diameter or heavy-wall CT. If the equipment you have cannot shear
required CT, you can add booster cylinders to the shear actuators. The type of model to use depends
on the hydraulic pressure.
• Side outlet flange to adapt to the treating iron.
Operation
A BOP operates with hydraulic pressure. You must connect two hoses to each actuator for proper
operation of a BOP. One hose is used to close the ram. The other hose is used to open it.
Preparation
1. Be sure the BOP has been fully serviced by a competent technician. Do not assume that a ser-
viceable BOP on the last job will be good for the next job. Well conditions and storage conditions
are the main contributors to premature corrosion and pitting.
2. Check the operation of the manual locks. Rotate the handwheel counter-clockwise to open the
manual locks.
3. Check all flange and union seals for damage that might impair sealing. Repair or replace items
if necessary.
4. Check all sealing surfaces and ring gaskets for scratches which may impair sealing.
5. Test all hydraulic functions. Open and close each set of rams.
6. Pressure test the complete stack before starting each job.
7. Close all equalizing valves.
The following is the procedure for closing and locking the rams:
1. Close the rams with hydraulic pressure. If the hydraulic system has failed, release the hydraulic
fluid in front of the piston, then close the rams manually. To release the fluid, either switch the
valve over to the closed position, or remove the hydraulic fittings from the front of the piston.
Then allow the fluid to drain.
2. Run the manual locks in and rotate the handwheel clockwise to lock the rams. Tighten the hand-
wheel down with a pipe wrench and torque it down to make sure it is locked.
1. Equalize the pressure above and below the rams. Do not open the pipe rams or blind rams with
a pressure differential across them.
2. Unlock the manual locks by rotating the handwheel counter-clockwise. Note that rotating the
handwheel clockwise will lock the rams.
3. Open the rams with hydraulic pressure. You cannot open the rams manually.
Caution Never open blind rams with a differential of pressure across them. The pressure
above and below the rams should be equal before opening them. If you open
blind rams with a differential of pressure, it will damage the rubber goods and
the BOP will no longer function properly.
Caution Never open pipe rams with a differential of pressure across them. The pressure
above and below the rams should be equal before opening them. If you open pipe
rams with a differential of pressure, it will damage the rubber goods and the
BOP will no longer function properly.
Slip rams grip the CT holding it and preventing it from being pushed out of the well or from falling down
the well. In addition to having a pair of slip rams in the BOP stack, you may want a backup set of slips
above the stripper packer as an extra safety precaution.
Slip rams consist of identical rams and slip inserts positioned opposite each other in a ram bore. Each ram
assembly contains a ram body, slip insert and a retainer pin. The slip insert slides into the ram and is held
in place with the retainer pin. The retainer pin does not take any loading; it merely prevents the insert
from falling into the well. The slips should hold the yield strength of the CT.
The slip inserts have a special tooth designed to minimize the stresses on the CT. The slip insert is
machined out of a NACE material and then hardened for gripping and holding the CT. This process
makes the slips highly susceptible to SSC (sulfide stress cracking). Since the slips may be exposed to H2S
during CT operations, the slip inserts are made with a soft core and hard case. The hard outer case will
be subject to cracking; however, the softer core will not be as likely to crack in an H2S environment.
When inspecting slip rams, make sure the slips are in good condition, .03-in. flat on the gripping edge or
crest of the teeth on the slip insert is insufficient. The insert must be replaced. Use the following steps to
operate slip rams:
1. Close the slips with hydraulic pressure to ensure that they will hold. The minimum hydraulic
pressure required is 1,500 psi.
2. Manually lock the slips by turning the handwheel closed and locking it in with a pipe wrench.
Closing the manual locks ensures that the slips will hold, even if hydraulic pressure is lost.
Shear rams have shear inserts to cut through CT, wireline, or cable.
Shear rams have right and left hand ram bodies. The ram assembly consists of ram bodies, shear blades
and socket head cap screws. The blades on both ram bodies are identical. The socket head cap screws
hold the blades in their proper place. The blades are made out of a material that is hardened after
machining. The base material used for the blades is a NACE approved material, and therefore the core of
the blades remains relatively soft. The material gives the blades the ductility required to prevent cracking
and still shear the CT. A single set of shear blades can cut multiple times. More than 30 cuts have been
made with one set of blades with no damage.
Shear blades for H2S service have special requirements, as noted in the NACE specifications MR-01-75:
"high strength and high hardness steels are required for ram shear blades to shear drillpipe during
emergency conditions. However the user shall be advised that these materials are highly susceptible to
SSC (sulfide stress cracking)." Since the blades may be exposed to H2S during CT operations, the shear
blades are made with a soft core and hard case. The hard outer case will be subject to cracking; however,
the softer core will not be as likely to crack in an H2S environment.
It is extremely important that you make sure your BOP will shear the CT you are using. A simple shear
test in the yard will prove whether or not this can be accomplished. If the blades chip or break, you need
to get new blades. High yield and heavy wall pipe require special blades and may require booster
cylinders.
Inspect the blades frequently; any chips or pitting on the blades is a good indication they need to be
replaced. Use extreme caution with the shear blades, if they look bad, they may not cut when you need
them to cut.
Extensive testing on shearing CT was performed at the Texas Oil Tools Conroe factory. The results have
been tabulated and are presented for your convenience. Separate tests were conducted to confirm the
additional pressure required to close the rams under wellbore pressure. In each case, where multiple cuts
were made, the highest observed pressure is shown. Wireline was placed inside the CT for many of the
cuts. Either 7/32 or 15/32 line was used and in every case the wireline cut at a lower pressure than the
CT. Several cuts were made with the slips set to determine if this increased the force required. It did not.
This tabulation of actual hydraulic operating pressures required to cut CT should serve only as a guide in
determining whether a booster is required.
unit is designed for hydraulic pressure of 1,500–2,000 psi WP and 3,000-psi test.
Shear seal rams are designed to shear the CT along with any wireline or cable and establish a blind seal.
The blades will cut the tubing and will continue to stroke until the rubber seals form a seal on the
wellbore. Left- and right-hand ram bodies are positioned opposite each other in the valve block. Both
rams contain a rear seal for sealing wellbore pressure from below and seals on the blades for sealing the
through bore.
As the rams close, shearing of the work string takes place between the upper and lower blades. After
shearing is complete, continued travel of both rams to the body center causes the leading edge of the right
hand blade to engage the elastomer sealing area in the left-hand insert and effect a wellbore pressure seal
from below. Once the seal is obtained, the pressure from below acts to keep the rams closed and maintain
the seal. Pressure from above the ram acts in the opposite direction, tending to open the rams and break
the seal. Accordingly, the rams are uni-directional and designed to seal pressure from below only. In
operation, the rams are not designed to be opened against full differential pressure. Before opening,
always ensure that the pressure across the rams is equalized. Failure to do so may result in mechanical
damage to the head of the ram rod and possible extrusion damage to the ram seals.
Two identical ram bodies are positioned opposite each other in the valve body. Each ram body contains
a front seal, rear seal, and slip inserts that work in unison to grip and seal around the CT. The front seal
contains the well pressure around the CT and the rear seal contains the well pressure from behind the ram
body.
A slip insert is installed above the front seal to hold the CT during sealing. The slip insert movement is
transmitted to the hydraulic actuator by the compression pin. The compression pin is held in place by the
retainer ring. An O-ring is installed to seal against wellbore pressure from below. The force created by
the O-ring seal assists in the setting of the slip onto the outside of the CT.
Normally use cold water for testing. However, you can use another fluid if it is nonflammable and not
harmful to any of the resilient seals.
Test Pressure
The test pressure should be limited to the lowest pressure determined by the following constraints:
• The rated working pressure of the BOP, open or closed. Do not confuse the manufacturer's rated
working pressure with the rated test pressure. The rated test pressure is a factory test to prove the
strength of the BOP shell; never use it as the working pressure.
• The lowest working pressure of any outlet or connection flanged or threaded.
The working pressure (with safety factor) of the tubing used in the test.
BOP Specifications
TOT 2.50-in. 5,000-psi Quad BOP
Table 6.10—TOT 2.50-in. 5,000-psi Quad BOP
-20 to 250°F H2S Service
-25 to 250°F North Sea Service
Temperature and Service
-50 to 200°F Arctic Service
75 to 500°F Steam
Connections
Top end 2.56-in. 5-M, R27 Studded flange
Lower end 2.56-in. 5-M, R27 Open flange
Side outlet 2.06-in. 5-M, R24 Studded flange
CT range 1.00 to 2.00 in.
Hydraulic operating range booster cylinder
1,500-psi Minimum; 3,000-psi Maximum
may reduce operating pressure
Hydraulic Volumes
Close 1 (one) pair of rams 31.4 cubic in.
Open 1 (one) pair of rams 27.9 cubic in.
Close booster shear rams 122 cubic in.
Ratio, hydraulic pressure:well pressure 9:1
Dimensions 33.30 in. tall × 61.3 in. wide
Weight 1,000 lb
Options
Debooster assembly External Only
Adapter flanges Top, bottom, and side; all standard unions
Test fixtures Blank box and/or lift plug
Stripper Packers
A stripper packer is a pressure-containing device designed to contain wellbore pressure during CT
operations. It is the upper tool in the pressure control stack. It is always mounted above the BOP, and as
close to the injector chains as possible. Its purpose is to seal around the CT in dynamic applications as
the CT is run in and out of the well.
A stripper packer has a hydraulic piston that squeezes the packer element around the CT. The injector
pushes the CT down through the stripper packer, and then the CT tools are installed on the end of the CT.
The injector and stripper are then installed on the wellhead either with a flange connection or a quick
union connection.
The latest innovations for CT stripper packers have been in high-pressure applications. New designs have
decreased the overall height and made them easier to use.
Operation
Hydraulic pressure is required to operate stripper packers. There is no manual backup or locking device
to use if hydraulic pressure is lost. These tools must be operated with a 4-way control valve. Packoff and
retract functions are required to operate safely.
Apply hydraulic pressure to the retract port. The force will allow the packer to relax and retract.
If the packer element begins to leak during a job, you can change it out with the CT still in the well.
The upper section of the stripper packer is called the split cap. This is
composed of a split housing containing the upper wear bushings. The
split cap is held in place with retainer pins or it is threaded into the body.
The split cap is designed such that the packer can be changed while
tubing is in the well.
The conventional stripper packer will accept either a single packer or the
split insert with energizer. To prevent extrusion at the higher pressure, it
has a hard teflon nonextrusion ring plus bronze bushing retainers that
overlap the seam in the split cap. The hydraulic packoff cylinder is long
Figure 6.28—Top loading
stroke and double acting to enable the operator to use hydraulic power
stripper packer
to change packers.
To accommodate all of the various packer combinations, your hydraulic hand pump should have a
5,000-psi working pressure.
You can operate the stripper packer with either a pump with a 4-way valve and 2 hoses, or a single pump
with one hose.
Important If you use a single hose, ensure that the quick-connectors do not have check valves.
Check valves will prevent you from operating the stripper packer normally.
To change the packer inserts while the tubing is in the well, follow these steps:
1. Make the last movement downward, with hydraulic pressure on the upper side of the piston. This
will help you remove all loading on the retainer pins.
2. Remove the pin clips and retainer pins.
3. Apply hydraulic pressure to the lower side of the piston (same as packoff). The force will push
the split cap and nonextrusion rings and approximately one-half of the energizer and packer
inserts up out of the housing for easy changing. Apply hydraulic pressure to the upper side of the
piston through the port on the edge of the flange. The force will move the piston down, making
it easy to reassemble the packer, nonextrusion ring, split cap and pins.
The side door stripper packer is available in 2.50-, 3.06-, and 4.06-in.
bore sizes with working pressure to 15,000 psi, accommodating up to
2.875-in. CT.
• The packing elements and bushings can be replaced through the open
door below the injector. Changing packers is easy through the side
door even with tubing in the well.
• New designs contain independent packer piston and retract piston.
• Well pressure assist. Working pressures up to 15,000 psi.
• An increased open door length to simplify the installation of hang-off Figure 6.29—Side door
slips, without the need for a separate window. stripper packer
• A threaded bottom connection allows convenient replacement in the
event one is damaged or to change connections.
• Removal of the packers and bushings leaves a full through bore for passage of larger tools.
• The packers actuated with two opposing rams, allowing the overall height to be reduced
substantially.
• Full through bore availability.
• Manual retract bushings or hydraulic retract bushings.
• Retracting the actuator out of the body exposes the packers and enables easy access to change the
packers.
The sidewinder stripper packer is available in 3.06-, 4.06-, 5.12-, 6.375- and 7.06-in. bore sizes with
working pressures up to 15,000 psi.
Anti-Buckling Device
CT can buckle between the chains and the top of the stripper packer when you use high snubbing loads.
This buckling of the CT at the surface can be avoided by minimizing the length of unsupported CT
between the stripper packer and the chains. The unsupported length should be held to a maximum length
of 4 in.
There are two ways to reduce the distance between the stripper packer and the chains.
Inhibitor Injection
Two common causes of packer wear are dry, rusty pipe, and dry gas. Putting dry, rusty pipe in the well
will cause excessive damage to the packer. The damage may be so severe that you will have to change
the packer before the job is complete.
Spraying the CT before it is stripped through the stripper packer will reduce the wear on the packer and
increase the life. One method of lubricating the CT is to spray lubricants on the CT as it comes off the
reel. However, some locations may prohibit this method for environmental reasons. Another method
involves making the upper section of the stripper packer into an injection inhibitor. While this method
requires special bushings and hoses, it is an environmentally acceptable method for spaying the pipe.
A stripper packer with an inhibitor injection device sprays a uniform film on the CT before it goes
through the stripper packer. An injection inhibitor can be incorporated in the stripper packer, or a special
adapter flange can be made to mount below the stripper packer. Because the port must be located below
the packer, it requires a high-pressure pump to pump the inhibitor in against well pressure.
Test Pressure
The test pressure should be limited to the lowest pressure determined by the following constraints:
Test Procedure
Test the stripper packer before starting each job.
1. Test all of the hydraulic functions. Ensure that the stripper packer opens and operates in a smooth
manner.
2. Install a test rod or CT in the stripper.
3. Packoff around the CT.
4. Apply the necessary test pressure.
September 2005 Well Control Equipment 6-37
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Specifications
TOT 2.50-in., 10-M "DS74" Side Door Stripper Packer
Table 6.18—TOT 2.50-in., 10-M "DT74" Tandem Side Door Stripper Packer
-20 to 250°F H2S Service
-25 to 250°F North Sea Service
Temperature and Service
-50 to 200°F Arctic Service
75 to 500°F Steam
Connections
Upper end Quick union or flange
Lower end Quick union or flange
CT range 1.00 to 2.00 in.
Hydraulic operating pressure 5,000-psi Maximum; depends on CT size
Hydraulic Volumes
Packoff 387 cubic in.
Retract 72 cubic in.
Ratio Hydraulic Pressure: Well Pressure
1.00-in. CT 2.45:1
1.25-in. CT 2.54:1
1.50-in. CT 2.67:1
1.75-in. CT 2.84:1
Dimensions/Weight
Dimensions 45.3 in. tall × 13.25 in. OD
Weight 300 lb
Table 6.21—TOT 3.06-in., 10-M "DTH4" Tandem Side Door Stripper Packer
-20 to 250°F H2S Service
-25 to 250°F North Sea Service
Temperature and Service
-50 to 200°F Arctic Service
75 to 500°F Steam
Connections
Lower end Quick union, flange, or Hydraconn connection
CT range 1.25 to 2.375 in.
Hydraulic operating pressure 3,000-psi Maximum; depends on CT size
Hydraulic Volumes
Packoff 16.5 cubic in.
Retract 21.5 cubic in.
Close window 225 cubic in.
Open windows 45 cubic in.
Dimensions/Weight
Dimensions 48.8 in. tall × 11.40 in. OD
Weight 450 lb
Quick-latches
Rigging up pressure control equipment is a time consuming task. Working with the cranes and slings to
lift the equipment and install it on the well can be dangerous. The quick-latch is a pressure control tool
that makes the rigging process quicker and safer. It is operated with a hydraulic source.
A quick-latch is like a very big air or hydraulic quick connect. It saves time because the operator does
not have to stab a flange connection or a quick union with a crane. It is safer because a person does not
have to stand to align the flange or quick union. Instead, the crane operator guides the mating pieces of
the quick-latch together.
The quick-latch is normally the last connection made during the CT rig-up.
1. Install the BOP and flow lines on the well head and mount the stripper to the injector.
2. Stab the CT into the stripper packer and make up the tools.
3. Pick up the injector, and use the quick-latch to stab it onto the BOP stack. Note that you do not
have to make up a flange or union.
Hydraconn Connectors
(Quick-latch located between the BOP and the stripper
packer)
Operation
Hydraulic pressure is required to open or unlatch the tool.
To close or latch the tool, release the hydraulic pressure
and allow the fluid to drain back into the handpump. The
tool has a spring return that will provide enough force to Figure 6.31—Hydraconn connector
close and lock the locking dogs into position.
Two models are in the field at this time:
• The most popular has a lock/indicator that prevents the tool from being opened until you move the
lock out of the way.
• The second model has a well pressure lock that operates with 200 psi. Well pressure of 200 psi will
force a lock into a position that will prevent the tool from being opened. Well pressure must be
released for this one to open. Hydraulic working pressure 3,000-psi maximum.
Injector Connectors
The injector connector is used as a tool to connect the pressure control equipment to the injector head. It
is mounted above the stripper packer and is therefore a nonpressure containing device.
Operation
Hydraulic pressure is required to open or unlatch this tool. To close or latch the tool, release the hydraulic
pressure and let the fluid flow back into the handpump.
The connector can be unlatched by hydraulically retracting the Figure 6.33—Hydraulic releasing
connector
cylinder and collet, allowing the skirt to be removed from the
center section. In the event of a hydraulic failure, a manual
override mechanism is attached to retract the collet by using
the three tension bolts that are provided on the manual override.
The seal between the stinger and skirt is formed by three independent seals each of which is capable of
sealing against the 15,000-psi working pressure or the 22,500-psi test pressure. The multiple redundancy
is to accommodate the heavy, sometimes brutal latching experienced when handling the large lift/frame
on a semi-submersible vessel in heavy seas.
There are several types of quick unions on the market being used for pressure control equipment. The
three most common are Bowen type, Otis type and TOT type unions. The following pages have drawings
of the unions along with sizes and pressure ratings. This is a quick reference chart that should help to
identify what type of union you may have.
The unions do not interchange with each other so make sure when ordering parts you know what type of
union you need.
CB Unions
Bowen Interchange
2.00 CB13 4.06-in. diameter/4 Acme 3.00-in. seal bore Standard 10,000
2.56 CB21 4.75-in. diameter/4 Acme 3.75-in. seal bore Standard 5,000
2.56 CB22 4.75-in. diameter/4 Acme 3.75-in. seal bore H 2S 5,000
2.50 CB23 4.75-in. diameter/4 Acme 3.75-in. seal bore Standard 10,000
2.56 CB24 6.31-in. diameter/4 Acme 3.75-in. seal bore H 2S 10,000
2.56 CB26 6.31-in. diameter/4 Acme 3.75-in. seal bore H 2S 15,000
3.06 CB31 5.50-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 4.37-in. seal bore Standard 5,000
3.06 CB32 5.50-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 4.37-in. seal bore H 2S 5,000
3.06 CB33 5.50-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 4.37-in. seal bore Standard 10,000
3.06 CB34 6.31-in. diameter/4 Acme 4.37-in. seal bore H 2S 10,000
3.06 CB36 7.00-in. diameter/5 Stub Acme 4.87-in. seal bore H 2S 15,000
4.00 CB41 6.00-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 4.87-in. seal bore Standard 5,000
4.00 CB42 6.00-in. diameter/4 Double Lead 4.87-in. seal bore H 2S 5,000
4.00 CB44 8.25-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 6.00-in. seal bore H 2S 10,000
5.00 CB51 8.25-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 6.75-in. seal bore Standard 5,000
5.00 CB52 8.25-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 6.75-in. seal bore H 2S 5,000
5.00 CB53 8.875-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 6.50-in. seal bore Standard 10,000
5.00 CB54 9.15-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 6.75-in. seal bore H 2S 10,000
6.00 CB61 9.875-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 8.00-in. seal bore Standard 5,000
6.00 CB62 9.875-in. diameter/4 Double Acme 8.00-in. seal bore H 2S 5,000
CH, CQ Unions
TOT Unions
CO Unions
Otis Interchange
Flange Dimensions
All parts exposed to the well fluids will have to be inspected by NDE methods. The preferred NDE test
would be a wet magnetic particle testing. Not all parts can be tested in this method. If the parts can not
be inspected with MPI then a dye penetrant test will have to be conducted.
All parts exposed to the well fluids, loaded by well pressure or pressure containing will have to be
inspected by NDE methods. The preferred NDE test would be a wet magnetic particle testing. Not all
parts can be tested in this method. If the parts can not be inspected with MPI then a dye penetrant test
will have to be conducted.
Note Halliburton recommends that a full disassemble and NDE on all critical items is
carried out every 3 years and not 4 years as stated above.
Field Inspections
TOT Coiled Tubing BOPs
Begin by disassembling the BOP. Refer to the proper technical manual for the detailed instructions for
disassembly. Clean all parts either with a steam washer, solvents, or other means. All of the dirt, rust, and
scale must be removed.
Corrosion is the main cause for a BOP to leak. How much corrosion is too much? Any corrosion that
causes pitting in the base material is too much. The pitting will directly effect the sealing capabilities of
the rear seal, O-ring, and polypak seals.
Critical areas that must be examined include the bonnet O-ring face, the bonnet seal areas, and the ram
bores. These areas are usually the areas that corrosion will start.
The following is an individual part detail of what to look for during inspections.
BOP Body
1. Visually inspect the ring grooves looking for pitting on the angles of the grooves. If the pitting
breaks the surface and into the groove it is too much. Ring grooves can be machined to remove
the corrosion.
2. Inspect the ram bores. On a quad the upper half of the ram bore is the sealing area of the rams.
If corrosion has allowed the pitting to get deeper than .010 in. this is too much.
3. Inspect the equalizing valve ports. There are two 3/16-in. drilled holes in each equalizing valve
that must be free of debris. If these holes are stopped up they must be cleaned out. You can use
a small 1/8 - 3/16-in. steel rod with a point on the end to help clean out the holes.
Caution Using a power hand-held drill or other power tool is not recommended. The drill
bit may break off in the equalizing port.
4. Inspect the equalizing valve seal bore, look for corrosion or scratches on the seal surface.
5. Check the area of the body where the bonnet O-rings seal. On most BOPs this is within a 1/2-in.
of the ram bore. Pitting in this area is unacceptable.
6. Examine the studs; make sure there are no damaged threads. If the threads are damaged, you can
used a small thread file (triangular in shape) to remove any sharp edges or burrs.
7. The last item to check is the well monitoring port. This must be free of debris like the equalizing
valve.
8. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Bonnet
1. Visually inspect the O-ring groove. Look for damaged areas including pitting. Visually inspect
the wellbore piston rod seal area. If there is corrosion that has caused pitting .010-in. deep, the
bonnet must be replaced. seal bore area. Inspect the threads, remove any nicks or burrs with a
small thread file. If the bonnet has hydraulic porting, inspect all of the ports. The leading 15°
bevel on the hydraulic ports is a seal area; this must have a good seal surface. Check the seal area
where the hydraulic ports go through the BOP body. Screwdriver pry marks are common on the
O-ring groove for this seal.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Rams
1. Most rams are stainless and should not have any corrosion. Inspect the guides on the pipe rams
they should not have any sharp edges. Inspect the rear seal groove, there should not be any cor-
rosion in this area. Any pitting on the OD or seal area and the ram should be replaced.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Slip Inserts
Slip inserts are one part of the BOP that will wear out. The teeth should be sharp. If the crest of the
tooth has a flat area of .02 in. that is too much. Of course, some areas of the slip insert may have teeth
that are dull. If 25% of the teeth have flat areas then the slip must be replaced. The outer edges of the
slip inserts will normally wear first.
Shear Blades
Shear blades are designed to shear the CT. If the blades have pitting on any area the blades must be
replaced. If the cutting edge of the blades are chipped or cracked they must be replaced. TOT shear
blades will cut several times without damage. These tests have been done on new blades not exposed
to well fluids. Well fluids will attack the shear blade and can cause damage to the blades.
Piston Rods
1. Inspect the area exposed to well fluids look for tiny pits in the stainless, this is a sign the well
fluids are attacking the metal and the parts should be replaced. Inspect the ram guides. If the ram
guides are damaged replace the entire piston rod. The ram guide and piston rod are normally sold
as a set. Normally you will have to polish the smooth sealing area of the piston rod, use a fine
emery cloth and polish lightly.
2. Inspect the woodruff (half moon) key slot in the piston rod. Remove any sharp edges that might
damage the seal when the rod is installed in the bonnet. Remove any burrs from the woodruff
key with a file.
3. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Cylinder
1. Inspect the threads, remove any nicks or burrs with emery cloth, or a polishing wheel.
2. Inspect the seal bore. There should not be any scratches in the bore, polish any nicks or scratches
with a fine emery cloth.
3. Perform a surface NDE on this part every 4 years
Nonrising Stem
1. The end of the nonrising stem that sticks out the back of the hydraulic cap is susceptible to envi-
ronmental corrosion. Water that collects in this area tends to start corrosion. A generous amount
of grease kept on this end will minimize the corrosion rate. Replace the stem if corrosion has
started. A leak on this stem can prevent the rams from closing properly. Examine the threads of
the sleeve nut and make sure the sleeve nut moves freely the entire length of the threads. The
thread is a left hand thread.
2. Perform a surface NDE on this part every 4 years.
Sleeve Nut
1. Rarely will this part get damaged. Make sure the sleeve nut threads easily on and off of the Non-
rising stem. The slots on either side of the sleeve nut that the hex keys slide into can get damaged,
use a small file and remove any nicks or burrs from the slot.
2. Perform a surface NDE on this part every 4 years.
Hydraulic Cap
1. Visually inspect the threads and the O-ring groove behind the threads.
2. Inspect the small ID of the hydraulic cap. This is where corrosion of the nonrising stem may also
cause damage to the hydraulic cap.
3. Inspect the indicator rod seal and seal retainer. Make sure you replace the indicator rod seal.
Caution When tightening the hydraulic cap on the cylinder, do not let the wrench grip
the cap in the area of the indicator rod. The wrench may damage the indicator
rod or the hole for the indicator rod.
Indicator Rod
The indicator rod may bend. Ensure that the rods are straight and there are no nicks or scratches on
the OD.
Begin by disassembling the stripper packer. Refer to the proper technical manual for the detailed
instructions for disassembly. Clean all of the parts either with a steam washer, solvents, or other means.
All of the dirt, rust, and scale must be removed.
Worn out packers and bushings are the main reason a stripper will leak. Examination of the packers and
bushing after each job is critical. The packer should be replaced after every job. Corrosion is another
cause for the stripper packer to leak. How much corrosion is too much? Any corrosion that causes pitting
in the base material is too much. The pitting will directly effect the sealing capabilities of the wellbore
seal, O-rings, and polypak seals.
Critical areas that must be examined include the wellbore seal groove and sealing area. The upper
bushing stack and bushing sleeve are susceptible to corrosion. The bushings themselves will not corrode
but the fluids get trapped between the bushings and the housing and tend to act as a catalyst for corrosion.
The following is an individual part detail of what to look for during inspections.
Bushings
Note There are special bushings available that are .050-in. oversized. These are not covered
in this procedure.
The critical bushings are those just above and just below the packer. They prevent the packer from
extruding. If these bushings are allowed to wear too much it will create a leak path for the packer.
Replace the bushings if they become worn. Worn is defined as wear that can be measured with a
caliper to be .10-in. larger than the CT size (i.e for 1.25-in. CT, 1.350 would be classified as worn).
Bushing Stack
The bushings at the upper end of the stripper packer are guide bushings and the main function is to
guide the CT and prevent it from buckling between the chains and the packer. The top one will
normally wear out faster than the others. It is important that you check the wear on these frequently.
The remaining sections are specific details for certain models of stripper packers.
Piston
1. After years of use, the lower end of the piston may become pitted. Replace if the pitting is too
excessive. The piston is stainless and does resist most standard corrosion problems. Replace if
the seal areas are damaged. All OD surfaces of this part are sealing areas be careful when han-
dling this item.
2. Perform a surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Sidewinder
1. The critical areas of the sidewinder are the packers, energizers, and bushings. Replace the bush-
ings if they become worn.
2. Inspect the manual bushing caps, the union nut that retains them and the manual stem. Corrosion
may be a problem. There is a grease port that should be greased regularly. The grease port is
located on the manual cap. Inspect the threads on the union nut and on the retainer that is bolted
to the body.
3. Perform a surface NDE on these parts every 2 years.
Stripper Body
1. Treat this part as you would a BOP body. Inspect the seal areas frequently. The bonnet seals are
in a counter bore of the main ram bore. Make sure this area is free of corrosion. The O-ring on
the manual caps seal inside the body; inspect this area for corrosion.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Bonnet
1. The bonnet on the sidewinder is similar in design to the bonnet on the BOP. There are wellbore
seals, hydraulic seals and a weep hole. All of these must be checked. Inspect the wel bore seal
and seal surface. Inspect the threads for the cylinder. Remove any nicks or burrs from the threads.
2. Perform a surface NDE on these parts every 2 years.
Cylinder
1. Inspect the cylinder threads, piston bore and hydraulic ports.
2. Perform a surface NDE on this part every 4 years.
All Other Parts
1. Visually inspect for any damage. If the parts are damaged, they should be replaced.
2. Perform a surface NDE on critical parts every 4 years.
Side Door
Stripper Body
1. This is the main body of the stripper packer. It consists of the two large plates and the four posts
that hold them together. Perform a visual check on the threads and the hydraulic ports.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Seal Sub
1. The seal sub is the item that retains the wellbore seals. Inspect the seal grooves for corrosion,
nicks, or burrs. Carefully examine this item for corrosion. If the seal sub has threads inspect the
threads for damage.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Piston
1. The piston or window is the item that comes down and covers the wellbore seals and pumps open
to provide access to the packers. Visually inspect this item for damage; look for nicks on the OD
and the ID. Both areas are seal surfaces. Inspect the retainer rings and split rings that hold the
window in the closed position.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Bushing Sleeve
1. The bushing sleeve provides the housing for the bushing stack and is the inner barrier for the
piston. This item is susceptible to corrosion; carefully examine the ID for corrosion. Examine the
OD threads and the seal surface. Visually inspect the OD for an adequate seal surface. The
threads on the upper end will thread directly into the cylinder. Inspect the threads
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
Cylinder
1. The cylinder is either an integral part of the body or a separate item. In either model the cylinder
has an ID sealing surface. Make sure if is free of corrosion, nicks, or burrs. Inspect the threads
and any hydraulic ports.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part after 5 years.
Lower Connection
1. The lower connection of the stripper packer may have either a quick union, flange, or Hydraconn
profile down. It will thread into the lower flange of the body. Inspect the threads on the union nut
and the section that threads into the body. Inspect all sealing surfaces. The ID will normally have
some corrosion. As long as the corrosion in the ID is minimized to less than .050 in. it is OK.
2. Perform surface NDE on this part every 2 years.
All other parts
Visually inspect for any damage. If the parts are damaged, they should be replaced.
i
CT Surface Inline Filters ..................................................................... 7-64
CoilSweep™ Sand Cleaning Tool ...................................................... 7-65
Pulsonix™ Oscillating Tool ................................................................. 7-66
Setting Tools and Downhole Force Generator ........................................ 7-68
Hydraulic Setting Tools ...................................................................... 7-68
PressureSetPro™ Tool ...................................................................... 7-70
Pressure-Activated Firing Head with Wireline .................................... 7-72
Setting Tools ...................................................................................... 7-72
X-Line® Hydraulically Activated Running Tool .................................... 7-74
Downhole Force Generator ................................................................ 7-76
Logging and Perforating .......................................................................... 7-78
Coiled Tubing Mechanical-Release Cablehead ................................. 7-78
Coiled Tubing Flow-Releasing Cablehead ......................................... 7-80
Deployment Bars ................................................................................ 7-82
Surface Termination Assembly .......................................................... 7-83
Depth Measuring Heads ..................................................................... 7-84
DepthPro™ Collar Locator Equipment .................................................... 7-86
DepthPro™ Coiled Tubing Collar Locator .......................................... 7-86
Surface Computer Package ............................................................... 7-87
Features and Benefits ........................................................................ 7-87
Warrior Software ................................................................................ 7-90
Universal Logging Kit ......................................................................... 7-91
Inflatable Straddle Packer ........................................................................ 7-93
Pin-Point Stimulation ............................................................................... 7-95
Coiled Tubing Connectors .................................................................. 7-95
Shear Disconnect ............................................................................... 7-97
Splined Quick-Connect ....................................................................... 7-99
Centralizers ........................................................................................7-100
Knuckle Joint ......................................................................................7-101
Blast Joints .........................................................................................7-102
Ported Subs ........................................................................................7-103
Top Cup Packers ................................................................................7-104
RR4-EV Packers ................................................................................7-106
SurgiFrac™ Jetting Tools ...................................................................7-108
Ball Subs ............................................................................................7-110
CT Thread Selection ................................................................................7-111
Dimensional Data for Recommended CT Tool Threads ..........................7-112
Coiled Tubing Thread Strengths and Recommended Makeup Torque ...7-113
ii
Commonly Used CT Threads Recognition ..............................................7-114
1.7 - 10 Stub Acme ............................................................................7-114
Stub Acme ..........................................................................................7-114
Ammt with O-ring Groove ...................................................................7-115
1 1/4-in. Ammt ....................................................................................7-115
API Regular with O-ring Groove .........................................................7-116
PAC ....................................................................................................7-116
External Fishing Necks ............................................................................7-117
Internal Fishneck Reference Table for CT Flow Activated "GS" ..............7-118
Guidelines for Selection of Seals and O-rings .........................................7-119
O-ring Selections ................................................................................7-120
Quality Checks ...................................................................................7-121
iii
iv
Section 7
Downhole Tools
Connectors
Coiled Tubing Service Connector Preface
Service connectors (Figure 7.1) use a single-ferrule lock ring and a threaded
CT end. They allow tools to be connected to the end of the CT.
The service connector can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The service connectors listed in Table 7.1 are used for standard service work
on CT.
7-2
Tool Part No. 100070872 100004082 120132898 101296041 100004083 100070892 100071095 100071092 100071129 100071159 100071135
OD (in.) 1.605 1.750 1.890 1.920 2.030 2.030 2.250 2.250 2.440 2.750 2.750
ID (in.) 0.750 0.859 1.109 0.864 0.859 1.218 0.859 1.312 1.312 1.680 1.750
Makeup Length
7.71 7.63 7.63 7.64 7.64 7.64 7.78 7.78 7.70 7.62 6.05
(in.)
1 1/2-in.- 1 1/2-in.- 1 1/2-in.- 1 1/2-in.- 1 1/2-in.- 1 3/4 1 3/4-in.- 2-in.-
CT Thread 3/4NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Downhole Tools
1.660-in.
Bottom OD, 2.25-lb OD, 2.25-lb OD, 2.40-lb OD, 2.25-lb OD, 2.25-lb OD, 2.25-lb OD, 2.40-lb OD, 2.40-lb OD, 5.30-lb OD, 5.30-lb
OD, 3.02-lb
Connection OECO OECO OECO OECO OECO OECO OECO OECO OECO OECO
"A" Pin
"A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin "A" Pin
Service Rating H2S H2S H2S Standard H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S
Tensile Rating
20,000 33,000 33,000 40,000 40,000 40,000 48,000 50,000 50,000 52,000 50,000
(lb)
Pressure
10,000 11,000 12,000 15,000 11,000 10,000 15,000 11,000 11,000 10,000 9,000
Rating (psi)
Torque Ratings
— 710 950 710 710 960 710 950 950 1,170 1,900
(lb/ft)
Nut 698.20002 698.20016 698.20016 101295898 698.20027 698.20027 698.24512 698.24512 698.24592 698.24592 698.24603
Bottom Sub 698.20003 698.20017 698.20019 101295922 698.20028 698.20036 698.24514 698.24501 698.24591 698.24671 698.24602
Lock Ring 996.07602 698.20013 698.20013 100070891 698.20029 698.20029 698.24513 698.24513 698.24593 698.24593 698.24504
O-ring 600.33958 600.33962 600.33962 100064798 600.33966 600.33966 600.33966 600.33966 600.34021 600.34021 600.34023
Backup Ring 996.04396 996.04397 996.04397 101081947 70.31739 70.31739 70.31739 70.31739 698.24594 698.24594 698.20053
1 9/16-in.- 1 9/16-in.- 1 3/4-in.- 1 13/16-in.- 1 13/16-in.- 2 2
1 3/8 -in.- 2-in.- 2-in.- 2 1/2
Nut Thread 12 Stub 12 Stub 12 Stub 12 Stub 12 Stub 3/16-in.-14 3/16-in.-14
16UN 12 UN 12 UN -in.-12UN
Acme Acme Acme Acme Acme UN UN
aRedress
Kit
698.20009 698.24561 698.24561 101296181 698.20026 698.20026 698.24520 698.24520 698.24599 698.24599 698.24601
Part No.
Threading
Ratchet 698.24541 698.24540 698.24540 — — — — — — — —
Assembly
Threading Pilot
— — — 698.24530 698.24530 698.24530 698.24530 698.24530 698.24530 698.24530 698.24530
Assembly
Threading Die
— — — 698.24531 698.24531 698.24531 698.24531 698.24531 698.24532 698.24532 698.24537
September 2005
Part No.
a
The redress kit includes an O-ring, backup ring, and lock ring.
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Applications
These connectors work well for all types of coiled tubing service
work. They can handle high torque, so they work well with mud
motors. They are easier to install on high-strength coiled tubing than
the coiled tubing service connectors because no threading is
required.
Figure 7.2—Double-slip
connector
(in.)
Downhole Tools
1.315-in. 1.315-in. 1.660-in. 1.660-in. OD, 2 3/8-in.
2 3/8 -in. 2 3/8 -in.
Bottom OD, 2.25-lb 1-in. AMMT OD, 2.25-lb OD, 3.02-lb 3.02-lb 2 3/8-in. OD, 5.30-lb 1-in.
EUE, 8-rd EUE, 8-rd
Connection OECO "A" Pin OECO "A" OECO "A" OECO "A" PAC Pin OECO "A" AMMT Pin
Tubing Pin Tubing Pin
Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
Service Rating H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S
Tensile Rating
56,000 33,000 33,000 37,000 56,000 56,000 65,000 56,000 65,000 39,000
(lb)
Pressure
10,000 10,000 10,000 12,000 15,000 10,000 15,000 15,000 14,000 10,000
Rating (psi)
Torque Ratings
710 710 710 710 960 1,340 960 1,300 1,300 400
(lb/ft)
Nut 698.24574 698.20016 698.20016 698.24512 698.24512 698.24512 101201224 100071096 101201224 100070890
Center Sub 698.24573 698.20018 698.20018 698.24557 698.24557 698.24557 101201350 100071114 101201350 101340727
Bottom Sub 698.24572 698.20006 101315550 698.24551 698.24553 698.24556 101201179 101315545 101227889 101345921
Lock Ring 996.07603 698.20013 698.20013 698.24513 698.24513 698.24513 100071097 100071097 101214816 100070891
O-ring 600.33962 600.33962 600.33962 600.33966 600.33966 600.33966 100012308 100012308 100012308 100012308
Backup Ring 996.04397 996.04397 996.04397 70.31739 70.31739 70.31739 100026301 100026301 100026301 100026301
19/16-in.- 19/16-in.-
1 13/16-12
Nut Thread 2-in.-12UN 12-stub 12-stub 2-in.-12UN 2-in.-12UN 2-in.-12UN 2-in.-12UN 2-in.-12UN 2-in.-12UN
Stub Acme
ACME ACME
Nut OD 2.25 1.75 1.75 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.25 2.03
cRedress Kit
N/A 698.20007 698.20007 698.24559 698.24559 698.24559 698.24559 698.24559 — 101348228
Part No.
aThis
connector is built from Incoloy 925
bThis connector is built from Incoloy 925 and has a metal-to-metal seal ring.
cThe redress kit includes an O-ring, backup ring, and lock ring.
September 2005
Table 7.2—Double-slip CT Service Connectors (Continued)
Tubing Size 1 1/2-in. CT OD (continued) 1 3/4-in. CT OD 2-in. CT OD
Tool Part
101344506 101344517 101353765 101343071 100071121 100071122 100071127 101310839 101312314 101376696 100071149 100071144
No.
OD (in.) 2.120 1.920 1.920 2.030 2.750 2.594 2.440 3.200 2.880 2.440 2.750 2.750
September 2005
ID (in.) 1.000 0.750 0.750 0.864 1.500 1.500 1.218 1.500 1.380 1.130 1.750 1.750
Makeup
9.84 9.69 9.69 10.53 10.42 13.32 9.53 8.91 9.53 9.73 10.41 13.85
Length (in.)
1.315-in.
2 3/8-in. 1.660-in. 2 3/8-in.
OD, 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8 -in.
Bottom 1 1/2-in. 1-in. 1-in. OD, 5.30-lb OD, 3.02-lb 2 3/8-in. IF 2 3/8 -in. ½-in. OD, 5.30-lb
2.25-lb EUE, 8-rd EUE, 8-rd
Connection AMMT Pin AMMT Pin AMMT Pin OECO "A" OECO "A" Pin PAC Pin AMMT PIN OECO "A"
OECO Tubing Pin Tubing Pin
Pin Pin Pin
”A” Pin
Service
H2S Standard H2S H2S H2S H2S H2S Standard H2S H2S H2S H2S
Rating
Tensile
48,000 37,500 30,000 42,000 63,000 52,000 60,000 63,000 63,000 53,000 55,000 55,000
Rating (lb)
Pressure
12,000 12,000 9,000 10,000 12,000 10,000 10,000 17,000 12,900 12,000 12,000 7,500
Rating (psi)
Torque
Ratings 650 400 400 710 1,270 1,270 960 1,270 1,270 960 1,800 1,800
(lb/ft)
Nut 101344509 101295898 101353620 100070890 698.24592 698.24592 698.24592 698.24592 698.24592 698.24592 698.24603 698.24603
Center Sub 101344553 101344568 101353636 101340727 698.24582 698.24582 698.24582 698.24582 698.24582 698.24582 698.24632 698.24632
Bottom Sub 101344558 101344579 101353631 101340725 698.24584 698.24583 698.24589 101310837 101311984 101374897 698.24634 698.24633
Lock Ring 100070891 100070891 100070891 100070891 698.24593 698.24593 698.24593 698.24593 698.24593 698.24593 698.24504 698.24504
O-ring 100012308 100064798 100064798 100012308 600.34021 600.34021 600.34021 600.34021 600.34021 600.34021 600.34023 600.34023
Backup
100026301 101081947 101081947 100026301 698.24594 698.24594 698.24594 698.24594 698.24594 101321949 698.20053 698.20053
Ring
1 7/8-in. 1 3/4-in. 1 3/4-in. 1 13/16-in.
2 3/16-in. 2 3/16-in. 2 3/16-in. 2 3/16-in. 2 3/16-in. 2 3/16-in. 2 1/2-in. 2 1/2-in.
Nut Thread 12 Stub 12 Stub 12 Stub 12 Stub
14UN 14UN 14UN 14UN 14UN 14UN 12 UN 12UN
Acme Acme Acme Acme
Nut OD 2.12 1.92 1.92 2.03 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.75 2.75
Downhole Tools
aRedress
101348228 101347793 101347793 101379944 698.24581 698.24581 698.24581 698.24581 698.24581 101378463 698.24631 698.24631
Kit Part No.
aThe
redress kit includes an O-ring, backup ring, and lock ring.
Coiled Tubing Handbook
7-5
Table 7.2—Double-slip CT Service Connectors (Continued)
2-in. CT OD
7-6
Tubing Size 2 3/8-in. CT OD 2-7/8-in. CT OD
(continued)
Tool Part
101317095 100071150 101215821 101327409 101276435 b101302063 101204481 101276664 101285527 101324943
No.
OD (in.) 3.200 3.09 3.09 3.09 3.20 3.20 3.60 3.60 3.60 3.80
ID (in.) 1.750 1.89 1.99 1.38 1.75 1.75 2.44 1.75 2.43 1.75
Makeup
9.77 11.09 14.24 11.23 9.36 10.39 13.43 10.65 13.43 11.48
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Length (in.)
Downhole Tools
2 3/8-in.
2 3/8-in. 2 7/8-in. 2 7/8-in.
Bottom 2 3/8-in. IF OD, 5.30-lb 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8-in.
EUE, 8-rd EUE 8-rd EUE 8-rd
Connection Pin OECO "A" PAC Pin IF Pin IF Pin IF Pin IF Pin
Tubing Pin Tubing Box Tubing Pin
Pin
Service
Standard H2S H2S H2S Standard Standard H2S Standard H2S H2S
Rating
Tensile
70,000 81,000 81,000 81,600 81,000 134,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 140,000
Rating (lb)
Pressure
17,000 8,200 8,200 8,200 13,000 15,000 9,000 10,000 9,000 10,000
Rating (psi)
Torque
Ratings 1,800 2,380 1,800 2,380 2,380 2,600 2,900 2,900 2,900 2,380
(lb/ft)
Nut 698.24603 698.24645 698.24645 698.24645 698.24645 101302060 698.24695 698.24695 698.24695 101325156
Center Sub 698.24632 698.24644 698.24644 698.24644 698.24644 101302061 698.24694 698.24694 698.24694 101325080
Bottom
101317141 698.24642 101215765 101327412 101276431 101302062 698.24692 101276665 101285528 101324977
Sub
Lock Ring 698.24504 698.24643 698.24643 698.24643 698.24643 100071153 698.24693 698.24693 698.24693 101204569
O-ring 600.34023 600.33974 600.33974 600.33974 600.33974 600.33974 600.33978 600.33978 600.33978 100003923
Backup
698.20053 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Ring
2 13/16-in. 2 13/16-in. 2 13/16-in. 2 13/16-in. 2 7/8-in. 3 5/16-in. 3 5/16-in. 3 5/16-in. 3 13/32-in.
2 1/2-in.
Nut Thread 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub
12UN
ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME
Nut OD 2.75 3.09 3.09 3.09 3.09 3.20 3.60 3.60 3.60 3.80
aRedress
698.24631 698.24641 698.24641 698.24641 698.24641 698.24641 698.24691 101204528 101204528 101204528
Kit Part No.
September 2005
aThe
redress kit includes an O-ring, backup ring, and lock ring.
bThis
connector has a 5° internal taper in the top of the nut.
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Splined Quick-Connect
Applications
Splined quick-connects allow CT toolstrings to be attached to CT. The
splined feature removes the need for toolstring rotation, allowing a quick
makeup to longer, heavier toolstrings. The splined quick-connect can also
be ordered with rotary shouldered connections for makeup of tool joints
or collars.
Operation
Perform the following steps to operate the splined quick-connect:
1. During makeup of the bottomhole assembly (BHA), attach the
bottom sub with the female splines to the top of the lower section
of the bottomhole assembly. Attach the remainder of the splined
quick-connect to the bottom of the upper section of the BHA.
2. To connect the upper and lower sections of the BHA, stab the
male splines of the splined quick-connect into its female splines
in the tool's bottom sub.
3. Tighten the makeup nut, and install the set screws.
Figure 7.3—Splined
quick-connect
101341479 3.50 1.38 17.55 2 3/8-in. PAC Box × Pin 122,000 12,000 4,000 Standard
2 3/8-in. OD, 5.30-lb OECO
698.24650 3.50 1.75 12.47 "A" Pin × 2-in. 55,000 10,000 1,900 Standard
CT service style connector
2 3/8-in. OD, 5.30-lb OECO
698.19110 3.50 1.75 12.43
"A" Box × Pin
100,000 10,000 2,600a Standard
2 3/8-in. API IF
101325972 3.80 1.75 20.80
Box × Pin
160,000 14,000 4,200a H2 S
aTorque ratings are limited by the OECO threads.
The roll-on connector can be used for a wide variety of applications, including those that do not
require O-ring seals.
Manufacturing
Table 7.4—Machining Dimensions, O-ring Sizes, and Part Nos. for CT Roll-on Connectors
Tubing Size (in.) 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.75 1.75
Wall Thickness (in.) 0.087 0.095 0.109 0.095 0.102 0.109 0.109 0.134
Dimension A 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.75 1.75
(in.) B 1.061 1.045 1.017 1.295 1.281 1.267 1.517 1.467
C 0.887 0.855 0.8 1.105 1.077 1.049 1.299 1.199
D 0.846 0.83 0.802 1.08 1.066 1.052 1.302 1.252
E 0.57 0.53 0.5 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.91 0.88
O-ring Size 211 211 211 215 215 215 218 218
Part No. 70.33959 70.33959 70.33959 70.33937 70.33937 70.33937 70.33962 70.33962
Table 7.6—Accessories
Description Part No.
Ridgid® Model 2A tubing cutter tool 130.11978
Crimping wheel 100071394
Crimping tool assembly 100071379
Locally manufactured roll-on connectors can allow operators to attach tubing to downhole tools easily,
inexpensively, and with little training. Table 7.7 provides machining dimensions for the roll-on connector
and O-ring sizes and part numbers for various tubing sizes. The dimensions for the connector's male end,
which fits inside the tubing, vary with the tubing size and wall thickness.
Manufacturing
To manufacture roll-on connectors, follow these guidelines:
• Use 4130 or 4140 alloy steel, 18-22 Rockwell "C," which is rated at 75,000-psi minimum yield
strength or equivalent.
• Use Table 7.7 to determine the machining dimensions A, B, C, D, and E marked on Figure 7.6. If
Table 7.7 does not list the tubing wall thickness you require, use the following formulas to calculate
the machining dimensions:
– A = Tubing OD
– B = Tubing OD - (wall thickness × 2) - 0.04 in.
– C = B - 0.32 in.
– D = Tubing OD - (wall thickness × 2) - 0.360 in.
– E = Roll-on ID
Applications
The primary use for this new connector is inside the coiled tubing reel.
Applications
The double-flapper check valve is normally used as a safety
feature in the bottomhole assembly.
Operation
The double-flapper check valve operates as a oneway check valve,
allowing free fluid movement down to the tools below. The
flappers are spring-actuated and close automatically when fluid
flow is stopped. Balls are frequently pumped through the flapper
valve. Choose a size that will allow the ball to pass through.
Figure 7.8—Double-flapper
check valve
Hydraulic Disconnect
Applications
Hydraulic-disconnect assemblies are used in at least two
distinct operational situations:
• The assembly allows mechanical packers, bridge plugs, and
tubing hangers for velocity strings to be run, set, and released
from coiled tubing.
• For an emergency disconnect, the hydraulic-disconnect
assembly can be incorporated into other CT bottomhole
assemblies, such as the heavy-duty workstring.
Operation
The ball-drop circulating valve can provide the following features and
benefits:
Applications
The tool is commonly run above a motor to circulate cuttings out of the
well after the drilling operation is complete.
Operation
When the tool is in the running position before the ball is dropped and
the inner sleeve is shifted, fluids will pass straight through the valve.
Perform the following steps when the tool is operated:
1. Run the tool into the hole. When the tool is in the running posi-
tion, fluids will pass straight through the valve.
2. Drop the ball and pump until it seats.
3. Increase pressure in the workstring above the ball until the
valve's shear pins are sheared. The valve will now divert fluids
through its side ports. Figure 7.10—Ball-drop circulat-
ing valve
The rupture disc sub can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
Operation
To operate the rupture disc sub, review the temperature- effect chart
for a rupture disc before selecting it for a job. The chart is packaged
with the disc. Temperature can affect the rating of the disc by as
much as 10 to 15%.
Figure 7.11—Rupture disc
sub
Applications
Even though this tool's name implies that it is used with motors, the
compact motorhead assembly is used on most jobs where toolstrings
are run into a well on coiled tubing.
Figure 7.12—Compact
motorhead assembly
September 2005
Maximum OD (in.) 1.75 1.75 2.12 2.12 2.88 2.88 2.88
1-in. 1.25-in. 1 ½-in. 1.50-in. 2 3/8-in. 1.75-in. 2.00-in.
Top Connection
AMMT box CT connector AMMT box CT connector PAC box CT connector CT connector
1-in. 1-in. 1 ½-in. 1 ½-in. 2 3/8 in. 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8-in.
Bottom Connection
AMMT pin AMMT pin AMMT pin AMMT pin PAC pin PAC pin PAC pin
makeup Length (in.) 26.77 32.36 26.12 31.68 32.29 36.42 36.94
Minimum ID (in.) 0.406 0.406 0.59 0.59 0.94a 0.94a 0.94a
Tensile Rating (lb) 31,000 31,000 45,000 45,000 50,000 50,000 50,000
Pressure Rating (lb) 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Temperature Rating (°F) 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
Torque Rating (ft-lb) 500 500 650 650 1,200 1,200 1,200
Disconnect Ball Size (in.) 5/8 OR ½ 5/8 OR ½ 7/8 7/8 1.25a 1.25a 1.25a
Circulation Sub Ball Size 7/16 7/16 5/8 5/8 1a 1a 1a
Circulation Sub Port Size 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.75 0.75 0.75
(in.) (2 holes) (2 holes) (2 holes) (2 holes) (2 holes) (2 holes) (2 holes)
GS Fishing Neck Size, 2 3/8 2 3/8 Special Special 3½ 3½ 3½
Nominal
GS Pulling Tool SAP No. 101317979 101317979 101356954 101356954 101321225 101321225 101321225
aWhen using the 2.88-in. OD motorhead on heavy-wall 1.75-in. or 1.50-in. CT, a lug prop and circulation sub sleeve with reduced ID are
required. Order lug prop SAP No. 101325192 and sleeve SAP No. 101325185. The new lug prop ID will be 0.82 in. and requires a 7/8-in.
ball for disconnecting. The new sleeve ID will be 0.69 in. and requires a ¾-in. ball to open the sleeve. The minimum ID through the tool will
be the sleeve ID, 0.69 in.
Downhole Tools
b
The motorheads can be purchased with the CT connector built onto the top, or they can be purchased with a box thread on top for thread-
ing onto a stand-alone CT connector.
Coiled Tubing Handbook
7-25
Coiled Tubing Handbook
If no tension value is given, use the following recommendations for a pull test:
Operation
Once the tool is assembled on the coiled tubing, normal coiled tubing operations can take place. If one
of these events occurs, follow the procedures given:
• The customer wants to circulate fluid through the circulation sub to the annulus above a motor.
1. Choose the correct ball size to shift the sleeve in the circulation sub. This size is normally the
smaller of the two balls that come with the motorhead.
2. Insert the ball into the coiled tubing and pump the ball all the way through the reel and down to
the motorhead. Surging the pump to move the ball through the flapper cartridges may be neces-
sary.
3. Pressure up slowly and watch for a pressure decrease indicating that the shear pins have sheared
and the sleeve has shifted.
4. Pump as needed through the side ports.
• The toolstring becomes stuck in the well and the customer wants to disconnect from the tools and
remove the coiled tubing.
1. Use your stretch charts to verify that the tubing is not stuck somewhere above the motorhead.
2. Set down weight on the tools. Do not pull tension into the motorhead while trying to release the
hydraulic disconnect.
3. Select the proper size ball to shift the sleeve in the hydraulic disconnect. This should be the larger
of the two balls that come with the motorhead.
4. Insert the ball in the coiled tubing and circulate it through the reel and down to the motorhead.
Surging the pump to move the ball through the flapper cartridges may be necessary.
5. Slowly pressure up until the shear pins in the hydraulic disconnect shear. You should see a pres-
sure indication when this happens because you will regain the ability to circulate through the
tool.
6. Slowly pick up on the coiled tubing until you are sure that the coiled tubing is free from the stuck
tools.
• The lower half of the motorhead is left in the well after releasing and the customer wants to fish the
tools.
1. The motorheads can be fished with GS pulling tools in conjunction with a jar and accelerator.
Select the proper tools from the Fishing Tool section of this manual.
2. Configure the jar and accelerator for jarring in the "up" direction.
3. Attach the GS pulling tool to the lower end of the fishing toolstring.
4. Trip into the well until the GS tool is about 50 feet above the lower half of the hydraulic discon-
nect.
5. Stop the tubing and begin circulating at approximately 0.75 bbl/min.
6. Slowly proceed down to the fish while circulating fluid to wash out the inside of the fishing neck.
7. Set down weight and then stop pumping.
8. Pick up weight so that the GS pulling tool engages the fishneck.
9. Jar up to release the stuck tools.
Applications
This swivel has premium thread connections and can be used for any
application where torque transmission is not required. Longer,
heavier toolstrings are easier to make up with a swivel in place.
Service Rating H 2S
Applications
The flow-through knuckle joint can be used in the following
applications:
• Fishing operations
• Running bottomhole assemblies through highly deviated intervals
• Other applications in which flexibility is required
Figure 7.14—Flow-through
knuckle joint
Flow-Control Tools
Ball-Drop Diverter Sub
Description
The ball-drop diverter sub (Figure 7.15) allows fluid circulation
until a ball is dropped. Circulation ports on the side of the tool
are open to the wellbore to allow the coiled tubing to fill while
running in the well. Fluid can also be pumped through the same
ports when needed. When the ball is dropped from the surface
and landed in the tool, the side ports are blocked from
circulation and flow is routed down through the bottom of the
tool.
Applications
This tool is commonly run in a toolstring below a hydraulic
disconnect tool. This sub allows a ball to be circulated to the
disconnect tool if the tools become stuck, helping ensure that
circulation is available. The tool also allows the coiled tubing to
fill while running in the well so that pressure can equalize.
Operation
Normal circulation can occur while the tool is run in the well.
When the coiled tubing is at the proper depth, a ball is circulated
to the ball-drop diverter sub. When the ball lands on the seat, all Figure 7.15—Ball-drop
flow to the annulus is blocked, and flow is diverted down diverter sub
through axial flow ports to perform services below the tool.
Applications
The flow-controlled circulating valve is run in toolstrings with
pressure-actuated tools that require circulation before operation.
Operation
To operate the flow-controlled circulating valve, perform the
following steps:
1. Assemble the toolstring so that the valve is located above the
pressure-operated tools and below the connector, double-flap-
per check valves, and hydraulic disconnects.
2. Increase the flow rate through the tool's ports and create a
pressure drop across the ports. The piston will shift down and
close the valve.
3. Release the pressure to allow the spring to push the piston up
and thereby open the flow ports and re-establish circulation.
Figure 7.16—Flow-controlled
circulating valve
Applications
This tool is designed to be used with tools that require a ball drop to
activate, such as some types of firing heads or inflatable packers. The
ball-drop tool can be used when a tool above it in the toolstring does
not allow a ball to pass through, such as the DepthPro™ collar locator
tool.
Operation
The ball is held inside the tool by three rocker arms, which are
attached to a cage. The cage and arms are supported by a spring. The
rocker arms are prevented from swinging open by the internal profile
of the outer housing. Below the predetermined flowrate, fluid simply
bypasses the cage and rocker arms and passes on through the tool.
When this flowrate is exceeded, the cage and rocker arms shift down
Figure 7.17—Downhole
against the spring and the rocker arms are allowed to swing open. As
ball-drop tool
the arms swing open, the ball is dropped out of the tool.
Applications
The GO packer can be used with wireline or tubing to find leaks in the
production tubing. When used with the tubing, the packer can be used for
stimulation. It can also be used in permanent installations with coiled tubing or
spacer pipe as a packer for holes in production tubing, as an anchor for a siphon
string, or as a downhole hanger for a siphon or velocity string.
Operation
To operate the GO retrievable packer, perform the following steps:
1. Start the packer in the hole in the run/release position (short slot on the
J-slot).
Important Do not pick up the packer more than 18 in., or it will set on the
next downward movement.
Figure 7.18—GO
retrievable packer
Applications
The TW Shorty RBP can be used as a plug below a treating packer when
isolating a zone or a section of casing during straddle packer operations. It
may be used to isolate zones for extended production testing or treating down
the casing in a multizone wellbore, without having a rig on location for tubing
manipulation. The TW Shorty RBP may also be used to aid in wellhead
repairs or other operations that require "lubricating in" the plug to isolate the
pressure below without having to circulate heavy fluids to kill the well.
The TW Shorty bridge plug can provide the following features and benefits:
• Set on wireline or coiled tubing for easy lubricating into the wellbore
without having to kill the well
• Short length for ease of makeup and running through "dog-legs"
• Hydraulically set for deviated or horizontal wells
• Setting and/or retrieving on coiled tubing or jointed tubing
• Equalizing valve in retrieving neck to equalize pressure across the plug
when engaged with the overshot retrieving tool for easy release
• Holds differential pressures from above or below without loading the
shear release system
• Rated to 10,000 psi 70 000 kPa
• Three-piece packer-type packing element system, with optional
compounds available
• Straight pull release system that enables slickline retrieval
• Simple design allows economical redress of bridge plug.
Figure 7.19—TW Shorty
retrievable bridge plug
The swab cup straddle tool can provide the following features and benefits:
• Simple operation.
• Adjustable straddle length.
• Swab cups that are readily available and inexpensive.
• H2S -compatible.
Applications
The swab cup straddle tool can be used to isolate a section of perforated pipe or
screen for stimulation.
Operation
Note Do not operate the tool deeper than 7,000 ft. By the time this
depth has been reached, cup wear will be significant enough
that the cups will no longer seal.
Figure 7.20—Swab
cup straddle tool
The SIP tool can provide the following features and benefits:
• Simple operation.
• Built-in concentric bypass for pressure equalization.
• Adjustable straddle length. Additionally, this tool is available for use with
common casing sizes of 3 1/2 in. and larger.
Applications
The SIP tool can be used to isolate perforations for acid stimulation or chemical
placement.
Operation
For detailed operating instructions, refer to the Service Tools Manual at the
following HalWorld link:
<http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespsttt/hespsttt_ServiceToolsManual/st_
home.htm>
Figure 7.21—SIP
tool
Table 7.26 (Page 7-46) provides the specifications for the RS coiled
tubing stimulation tool. This tool can provide the following features
and benefits:
Operation
Gauge Carrier
The gauge carrier (Figure 7.23) is an instream gauge carrier. It is capable of
holding 1.27-in. (32-mm) OD or smaller pressure gauges like the HMR™,
QR-2, and RPG- 3. Specifications for the gauge carrier are given in Table
4.6.A.
The gauge carrier can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
Operation
The gauge carrier can be placed anywhere in the toolstring to record the
annulus pressure.
Figure 7.23—Gauge
carrier
Fishing Tools
Up/Down Hydraulic Jar
Description
Up/down hydraulic jars (Figure 7.24) are used with the accelerator and
flow-through stem to form the coiled tubing heavy-duty workstring. The jar is
the time-delay device that allows energy to be stored in the accelerator or
stretched tubing. The stored energy creates a high-impact force.The hydraulic
jar specifications are provided in Table 7.28 (Page 7-49).
Up/down hydraulic jars can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
Operation
c. Stop pumping before firing the jar. d. Pull up with 1,000 lbf and wait until the tool releases
its impact force (fires).
Up/Down Accelerator
Up/down accelerators (Figure 7.25) are specifically designed for use with
coiled tubing hydraulic jars and the coiled tubing stem to form a heavy-duty
workstring. The accelerators store the energy required to shear pins, shift
sleeves, fish tools, and to pull or run plugs for jobs in which high-impact forces
are required. See Table 7.29 (Page 7-51) for specifications.
Applications
Operation
Figure 7.25—Up/do
wn accelerator
Tool Retrieval
Operation
To operate the pulling tool, perform the following steps: (1) Use coiled tubing to lower the pulling tool
into the well until you reach the target. As the pulling tool enters an internal fishneck on the target, the
engaging shoulder on the fishneck moves the dogs up, compressing the dog spring. As the core of the
pulling tool moves into the fishneck, the dogs retract against a reduced OD on the core, and the
compressed spring moves the dogs down past the engaging shoulder and onto the enlarged OD on the
core. The pulling tool is engaged in the tool to be retrieved. (2) Attempt to retrieve the downhole fish.
• If the fish cannot be retrieved, release the pulling tool by either jarring down or by first applying a
downward force of at least 500 lbf. Then apply hydraulic pressure with a ball to force the skirt up.
Both methods shear pins in the pulling tool and move the dogs up. The dogs then retract against the
reduced OD on the core and slip off the fishneck. When the ball is pumped down the tubing to release
the tool hydraulically, the drop in pump pressure gives a surface indication. Circulation is restored at
this point.
Note While retrieving the pulling tool, you may maintain circulation for well control. A
snap ring keeps the pulling tool in the released position after the pins are sheared.
Operation
8. If the fish cannot be retrieved from the well, release from the fish to allow retrieval of the coiled
tubing.
a. Set down weight on the fish.
b. Flow above 40 gal/min to retract the dogs.
c. Pull up on the coiled tubing to disengage from the fish.
9. If necessary, the fish can be re-engaged by repeating Steps 2 to 5.
Flow-Through Stem
Flow-through stems (Figure 7.28) are used as part of the coiled tubing
heavy-duty workstring to provide the additional mass necessary to generate
high-impact forces. Table 7.32 (Page 7-57) provides specifications for the
flow-through stem.
The flow-through stem can provide the following features and benefits:
Operation
1. Install the tool between the up/down accelerator and the hydraulic jar.
2. Operate the workstring as described throughout this section.
Maintenance
Clean the tool inside and out to help prevent corrosion. Protect the threads with
thread protectors at all times when the tool is not made up in a workstring.
Figure 7.28—HCT
flow-through stem
The Hydra-Blast Pro™ rotating tool (Figure 7.29) uses a series of nozzles,
high-pressure fluid from the coiled tubing, and a rotating tool to cut,
erode, or dissolve deposits on the tubing or casing wall without damaging
any of the surfaces. Table 7.33 (Page 7-59) provides the specifications for
the 1.75-in. tool, and Table 7.34 (Page 7-59) provides the specifications
for the 2.88-in. tool.
The Hydra-Blast Pro rotating tool can provide the following features and
benefits:
Applications
• For the 1.75-in. OD tools, see Manual No. 101241870 at the following
link:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/Hesps/hespspe/ hespspe_CT
/hespspe_ CTT/hespspe_CTT_manuals/ hespspe_CTT_manuals_
content/ 101241870/ 101241870.pdf
• For the 2.88-in. OD tools, see Manual No. 101274563 at the following
link:
<http://halworld.halnet.com/HES/Hesps/hespspe/ hespspe_CT Figure 7.29—Hydra-Blast
/hespspe_CTT/hespspe_CTT_manuals/ hespspe_CTT_manuals_ Pro™ rotating tool
content/101274563.pdf>
The Hydra-Blast indexing tool can provide the following features and
benefits:
Applications
Operation
Table 7.37 provides the specifications for the CT downhole inline filter. This
tool can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The primary application for this tool is for filtering the cleaning fluid used in
Hydra-Blast® service operations. However, the filter can be used in other
toolstrings when clean fluid is important.
Operation
1. Install the filter between the coiled tubing and the jetting tools.
2. Retrieve and clean the filter if pumping pressures rise during the job.
Figure 7.31—CT
downhole inline filter
CT surface inline filters can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The surface inline filter can be used on the surface to catch any
contaminants coming from the pumping unit and the pressure lines before
they enter the coiled tubing. This filtration is necessary on Hydra-Blast®
service operations to minimize jet erosion and reduce the number of CT
trips required to keep the downhole filter from plugging.
Operation
Install the filter at the point in the pumping line immediately before fluid
enters the tubing.
Figure 7.32—CT
surface inline filters
The CoilSweep sand cleaning tool has the following features and benefits:
Applications
Highly deviated wells with sand production problems are very difficult to clean
out with traditional circulation techniques. The sand tends to fall out and settle to
the low side of the hole, and a large percentage of the sand is never removed from
the well. The CoilSweep tool uses a computer-designed system of fluid blends
and this tool to suspend and sweep the sand from the well.
Operation
Figure 7.33—Coil
Sweep™ sand
cleaning tool
Table 7.40 (Page 7-67) provides the specifications for the Pulsonix
oscillating tool. This tool can provide the following features and
benefits:
Applications
Operation
Halliburton's hydraulic setting tools (Figure 7.36) can be used to set cast-iron
bridge plugs, Fas Drill® plugs and packers, permanent packers, or squeeze
cement retainers. Specifications for the hydraulic setting tool are provided in
Table 7.42 (Page 7-69).
Hydraulic setting tools can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
These setting tools can be used for any application where a conventional
wireline setting tool would be used. Because no explosives are required, no
special training is required to operate them. Horizontal wells and wells
without a rig that already have a coiled tubing unit in place are the most
common applications for these setting tools.
Operation
PressureSetPro™ Tool
The PressureSetPro™ tool (Figure 7.2.A) can be run above a wireline
setting tool to convert the setting tool from explosive to hydraulic
operation. Table 7.43 (Page 7-71) provides the specifications for this tool.
The PressureSetPro™ tool can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The PressureSetPro™ tool can be used for setting any device that is
normally set on wireline setting tools, including:
• Packers
• Bridge plugs
• Cement retainers
• Sump packers
• Whipstocks
Operation
Applications
The pressure-activated firing head can be adapted for use with TCP
guns, wireline setting tools, chemical cutters, and severing tools.
<http://halworld.halnet.com/HES/Hesps/hespspe/ hespspe_CT/
hespspe_CTT/hespspe_CTT_manuals/ hespspe_CTT_manuals_
content/101251577.pdf> Figure 7.38—Pressure-
activated firing head
Operation
1. Run in hydraulically activated running tools on coiled tubing until
the necessary nipple profile is reached.
2. When the tool is above the nipple where the flow control will be set
and below the nearest identical nipple, apply internal pressure.
3. The flow forces the check ball to seat, which increases the pressure.
4. The increased pressure shears a set of pins, allowing the piston of the
running tool and the fishneck of the lock to travel downward, which
expands the keys of the lock into the "locate" position.
5. A snap ring keeps the lock in the "locate" position, and a dampening
chamber prevents impact shear of the second set of pins.
6. The keys continue down the wellbore and locate in the nipple pro-
file.
7. Flow is reapplied to force the ball back on the seat.
8. Pressure builds in the running tool until a second set of pins shear
and force the piston to travel downward to engage the locking keys
into the nipple profile.
9. The retaining lugs of the running tool release from the fishneck of
the lock, and circulation grooves are uncovered to give the operator Figure 7.39—X-Line®
a surface indication that the lock mandrel is set. hydraulically activated
running tool
10. Tension is applied to the coiled tubing to activate the jars and release
the running tool from the lock mandrel.
The downhole force generator can provide the following features and benefits:
• The system passes through the nipple and sets in the tubing below.
• It can push and pull discriminately and repeatedly on the same run in the well.
• The magnitude of force is controlled by applied pressure acting on a known
area.
• It can create high pushing/pulling forces at the end of the coiled tubing string
in highly deviated and horizontal wellbores.
• Cyclic fatigue on the coiled tubing string is minimized when used in fishing
operations.
• Gentle shearing and shifting action eliminates impact loading.
• It is simple to operate.
Applications
The downhole force generator can be used for the following applications:
Operation
Before activating the tool, take an accurate weight reading by working the string
up and down close to the working depth.
Note To determine the output forces, refer to Table 7.48 (Page 7-77).
Figure 7.40—Down-
hole force generator
Pulling
1. To help ensure that the force generator is stroked out (fully extended), pull a recommended 300
lb on the tool being fished or set.
2. Start pumping slowly, and gradually increase the rate. (The velocity check-valve will close at
approximately 1/2 bbl/min).
3. When the valve closes, the amount of pressure applied will determine the amount of force being
applied to the tool. The hold-down slips will be forced against the casing or tubing and the tool
will stroke approximately 10 in. from this point.
Pushing
a
A consists of 3 ½-in. assembly with a 4 ½-in. holddown assembly
b
Use kits 698.25741, 698.25761, and 698.25807 for redress
Applications
• 1.50-in. OD cablehead
<http://halworld.halnet.com/HES/Hesps/hespspe/hespspe_CT/hespspe
_CTT/hespspe_CTT_manuals/hespspe_CTT_manuals_content/698350
50.pdf>
• 2.00-in. OD cablehead
<http://halworld.halnet.com/HES/Hesps/hespspe/hespspe_CT/hespspe
_CTT/hespspe_CTT_manuals/hespspe_CTT_manuals_content/698352 Figure 7.41—CT
50.pdf> mechanical release
cablehead
• Much of the assembly can be done offsite, which saves time rigging up
once on the wellsite.
• Very rugged design is ideal for conveying heavy gun strings.
• Three-step release process helps prevent accidental release during
perforating.
• Check valves allow for circulating while logging but prevent flow back up
the coiled tubing.
• Built-in quick-change on the cablehead eases makeup to the logging tools
or guns.
Applications
http://halworld.halnet.com/HES/Hesps/hespspe/hespspe_CT/hespspe_CTT/he
spspe_CTT_manuals/hespspe_CTT_manuals_content/101213514all.pdf
Deployment Bars
Deployment bars (Figure 7.43) are used in coiled tubing logging operations
when the toolstring is longer than the available lubricator. The deployment bar
can be run in between tool sections and allow the tools to be suspended in the
coiled tubing blow-out preventers (BOP). In addition, the bar allows for sealing
against wellbore pressure using the BOP seal rams.
Applications
Deployment bars are often used on coiled tubing logging or perforating jobs
where the toolstring length exceeds 30 feet. The bars are very useful on
production logging jobs where the toolstrings are long and the well is usually
logged while live.
Operation
A long toolstring should be broken into sections that are shorter than the
available lubricator length. There should be one less deployment bar than the
number of tool sections. For instance, if the lubricator length dictates that a
toolstring needs to be run in three separate sections, then two deployment bars
will be needed.
1. Attach a deployment bar at the top of each of the lower tool sections.
2. Deploy the first section into the well until the deployment bar straddles
the BOP rams.
3. Close the slip and seal rams, bleed the pressure off the lubricator.
4. Detach the lubricator and lift it up to allow the cablehead to be removed
from the deployment bar.
5. Attach the second tool section and repeat the process.
6. To remove the tools from the well, simply reverse the order of the steps.
Figure 7.43—Deploy-
ment bar
The surface termination assembly can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
Available surface termination assemblies are listed in Table 7.52. The surface termination assembly
should be used with a CTUs with electric line installed.
Operation
When the termination assembly is installed on the reel, it becomes an integral part of the reel and needs
no operating procedures. With proper maintenance, it can provide many hours of trouble-free service.
Table 8.5.A provides the part numbers for various depth measuring heads. Depth measuring heads can
provide the following features and benefits:
• Easy and quick installation
• Can run mechanical and electrical depth displays simultaneously
• Offer good depth accuracy
• Rugged design requires little maintenance
Applications
Depth measuring heads are useful on most coiled tubing jobs. The ability to accurately measure depth is
very important on coiled tubing logging jobs. The injector counter is usually preferred for depth-critical
applications because it measures the tubing in the stretched state.
For operations and maintenance instructions, refer to the following manual on HalWorld:
<http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespspe/hespspe_ct/hespspe_ctdas/hespspe_ctdas_content/
ctdmh.pdf>
The DepthPro collar locator (Figure 7.47) can provide the following features and
benefits:
• Provides a real-time reading of collar depths.
• Works on standard CT without the need of logging cable in the tubing.
• Will work on any coiled tubing unit.
• Creates an API-format log for correlation to existing logs.
• Eliminates the need for costly coiled tubing logging units.
Applications
Tables 7.54 and 7.55 provide specifications for the tool and equipment. The
DepthPro collar locator should be used for the following applications:
• Spot perforating guns on depth
• Locate nipples, end of tubing, and other equipment
• Spot production packers, bridge plugs, squeeze packers, and inflatable tools
• Spot chemical or jet-tubing cutters
• Place sand-laden fluids or chemicals
• Provide better depth control during fishing operations
Applications
The SCP is intended for use on DepthProSM logging operations. When the computer is loaded
with the Warrior logging software, the SCP serves to record and display logging information in
real time. When the logging operation is complete, hard copies of the logs can be printed using
the continuous-feed printer.
Operation
The SCP is set up at the wellsite. Most often, the SCP is located in the coiled tubing operator's
cabin, but it can be located in other areas if the cabin lacks room. Perform the following steps to
prepare the SCP for logging operations:
1. Find a location for the SCP where AC or DC power is available. Ensure that the location is within
reach of the data cables that will connect to the SCP.
2. Open the cover of the SCP, and then open up the laptop. Connect the power supply to AC or DC
voltage and turn on the laptop power switch.
3. Make sure the DC power supply plug for the laptop is plugged into the back of the laptop.
Warrior Software
The Warrior software is used to record DepthPro™
service collar logs. Warrior software is purchased from
Scientific Data Systems. This software was initially
developed for recording all types of well logging
information and is widely used throughout the
industry. Slight modifications were made to the
version of Warrior used with DepthPro™ tools so that
the software could better fit the logging needs of the
DepthPro service. Figure 7.49 shows the type of data
that can be obtained with Warrior software.
Features and Benefits
Applications
The ULK (SAP No. 101203876) can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The ULK is primarily intended for use on DepthPro logging jobs. It allows the DepthPro tool operator to
easily adapt the DepthPro service to any coiled tubing unit, regardless of the service company.
Operation
The ULK must be installed after arriving at the wellsite. Perform the following procedures to install the
kit on the coiled tubing unit:
1. Install the pressure transducer on a Fig. 1502, 2-in. connection somewhere between the pump
and the coiled tubing reel.
2. Install the levelwind counter on the levelwind traversing head of the reel.
3. Insert the coiled tubing in the counter and fasten the counter by closing the latches.
4. Attach a cable from the depth encoder to the surface computer package.
5. Attach a cable from the pressure transducer to the surface computer package.
6. Test the outputs with the surface computer package and Warrior software from each sensor by
rolling the wheel and applying pressure on the transducer.
Table 7.57 (Page 7-94) provides specifications for the inflatable straddle packer.
The inflatable straddle packer can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The tool is primarily used to perform selective acid stimulations with coiled
tubing in live wells. The tool can also be used to pump conformance chemicals.
<http://halworld.halnet.com/HES/Hesps/hespspe/hespspe_CT/hespspe_CTT/he
spspe_CTT_manuals/ hespspe_CTT_manuals_content/stradpac.pdf>
Figure 7.51—In-
flatable straddle
packer
Pin-Point Stimulation
Coiled Tubing Connectors
Description
Applications
These connectors work well for all types of coiled tubing service
work. They can handle high torque, so they work well with mud
motors. They are easier to install on high-strength coiled tubing than
coiled tubing service connectors because no threading is required.
Makeup 13.32 8.91 9.53 13.85 9.77 14.24 11.23 10.39 13.43 10.65 13.43 11.48
Downhole Tools
Length (in.)
Bottom 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8 -in. 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8 -in. 2 3/8 -in. 2 3/8-in. 2 3/8-in. 2 7/8-in. 2 3/8-in. 2 7/8-in. 2 3/8-in. IF
Connection EUE, 8-rd IF pin PAC pin EUE, 8-rd IF pin EUE, 8-rd PAC pin IF pin EUE 8-rd IF pin EUE 8-rd pin
tubing pin tubing pin tubing pin tubing box tubing pin
Service Rating H2S Standard H2S H2S Standard H2S H2S Standard H2S Standard H2S H2S
Tensile Rating 52,000 63,000 63,000 55,000 70,000 81,000 81,600 134,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 140,000
(lb)
Pressure 10,000 17,000 12,900 7,500 17,000 8,200 8,200 15,000 9,000 10,000 9,000 10,000
Rating (psi)
Torque Rating 1,270 1,270 1,270 1,800 1,800 1,800 2,380 2,600 2,900 2,900 2,900 2,380
(lb/ft)
Nut 698.24592 698.24592 698.24592 698.24603 698.24603 698.24645 698.24645 101302060 698.24695 698.24695 698.24695 101325156
Center Sub 698.24582 698.24582 698.24582 698.24632 698.24632 698.24644 698.24644 101302061 698.24694 698.24694 698.24694 101325080
Bottom Sub 698.24583 101310837 101311984 698.24633 101317141 101215765 101327412 101302062 698.24692 101276665 101285528 101324977
Lock Ring 698.24593 698.24593 698.24593 698.24504 698.24504 698.24643 698.24643 100071153 698.24693 698.24693 698.24693 101204569
O-ring 600.34021 600.34021 600.34021 600.34023 600.34023 600.33974 600.33974 600.33974 600.33978 600.33978 600.33978 100003923
Backup Ring 698.24594 698.24594 698.24594 698.20053 698.20053 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Nut Thread 2 3/16-in. 2 3/16-in. 2 3/16-in. 2 1/2-in. 2 1/2-in. 2 13/16-in. 2 13/16-in. 2 7/8-in. 3 5/16-in. 3 5/16-in. 3 5/16-in. 3 13/32-in.
14UN 14UN 14UN 12UN 12UN 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub 10-stub
ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME ACME
Nut OD 2.44 2.44 2.44 2.75 2.75 3.09 3.09 3.20 3.60 3.60 3.60 3.80
Redress Kit 698.24581 698.24581 698.24581 698.24631 698.24631 698.24641 698.24641 698.24641 698.24691 101204528 101204528 101204528
Part No.a
aRedress
kits include O-rings, backup rings, and lock rings.
bThis connector has 5-in. internal taper in the top of the nut.
September 2005
Coiled Tubing Handbook
Shear Disconnect
The shear disconnect (Figure 7.53) provides a predetermined
weak point in the toolstring in case the toolstring becomes stuck
in the well. Table 7.59 (Page 7-98) provides the specifications for
the shear disconnect.
Applications
Operation
If circulation capability is lost while the toolstring is in the well, the weak point will be affected by internal
pressure in the coiled tubing. Any applied pressure inside the coiled tubing will apply additional force to
the shear screws.
Splined Quick-Connect
Halliburton's splined quick-connects for coiled tubing (Figure 7.54) are a work-
and time-saving device created for coupling large CT toolstrings. See Table
7.60 for specifications.
Applications
Operation
Perform the following steps to operate the splined quick-connect:
1. During makeup of the bottomhole assembly (BHA), attach the bottom
sub with the female splines to the top of the lower section of the bot-
tomhole assembly. Attach the remainder of the splined quick-connect
to the bottom of the upper section of the BHA.
2. To connect the upper and lower sections of the BHA, stab the male
splines of the splined quick-connect into its female splines in the tool's
bottom sub.
3. Tighten the makeup nut, and install the set screws.
Centralizers
Centralizers (Figure 7.55) serve to keep the toolstring in the
center of the casing at all times, even in highly deviated wells.
Table 7.61 provides specifications for the various centralizers.
Applications
Figure 7.55—Centralizer
Knuckle Joint
Knuckle joints (Figure 7.56) give the toolstring flexibility.
This flexibility helps minimize the tendency of the coiled
tubing to decentralize the toolstring. This flexibility also helps
minimize high bending loads in the coiled tubing at the top of
the coiled tubing connector. Table 7.62 provides the
specifications for the knuckle joint.
Applications
Operation
Install the knuckle joint below the coiled tubing connector and
above the shear disconnect.
Blast Joints
Blast joints (Figure 7.57) serve as high-strength spacer pipe between the
packers on a straddle toolstring. They are available in a variety of lengths
to assist the tool operator in getting the exact amount of straddle length
that is needed. Table 7.63 provides the specifications for the blast joints.
Applications
Blast joints can be used in various types of fracturing operations to set the
straddle length to seal across the zones to be treated.
Ported Subs
The ported sub (Figure 7.58) serves as the exit point for fracturing fluids
between the straddle packer elements. Table 7.64 provides the
specifications for the ported sub.
The ported sub can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The ported sub is run on coiled tubing fracturing operations and allows
fluid to be pumped from the inside of the coiled tubing to the annulus.
The ported sub is most often run in the toolstring directly above the
lower packer.
The top cup packer can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The top cup packer is normally run on coiled tubing fracturing jobs
when a straddle packer is needed. Because of wear from dragging the
cup in the well, reliable sealing between the cup and casing wall cannot
be certain on wells deeper than 8,000 ft.
Operation
Install the top cup packer at the top of the straddle tool. Installing
centralizers above and/or below the cup packer to help the cup edges
maintain contact with the casing wall is a good practice. If the cup does
not make good contact, a seal is difficult to achieve.
RR4-EV Packers
The RR4-EV packer (Figure 7.60) is a specially designed packer for coiled
tubing fracturing operations. When the RR4- EV packer is combined with a top
cup packer, the resulting toolstring can be used for straddling zones for acid
treatments or for fracturing. The RR4-EV packer can also be run as a single
packer whenever acid or fracturing treatments are performed down the
annulus. Table 7.68 (Page 7-107) provides the specifications for the RR4-EV
packer. Table 7.69 (Page 7-107) provides available packer ring selections.
The RR4-EV packer can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
The RR4-EV packer is used when coiled tubing fracturing operations are
performed on monobore wells. The packer can also be used for acid treatments
with coiled tubing.
Operation
<http://halworld.halnet.com/HES/Hesps/hespsttt/ hespsttt_content/
D00006060.pdf>
Figure 7.60—RR4-EV
packer
SurgiFrac jetting tools can provide the following features and benefits:
Applications
Operation
Select and install the appropriate size and number of nozzles in the
SurgiFrac tool body. Consider the coiled tubing size, length, and
pressure rating when selecting the nozzles. The coiled tubing
parameters will dictate the maximum flowrate available, which will
determine the number and size of nozzles. When the SurgiFrac tool has
reached the proper well depth for perforating, begin pumping down the
Figure 7.61—SurgiFrac tool
coiled tubing at the appropriate flowrate and sand concentration.
Typical flowrates for perforating are in the range of 1.0 bbl/min per
3/16-in. nozzle in the tool. Typical sand concentrations range from 0.5
to 1.0 pound of sand per gallon of fluid.
Ball Subs
Ball subs (Figure 7.62) have a ball on a seat that serves as a
check valve. The ball prevents flow from passing down
through the tool, but it allows reverse circulation, which is
important during SurgiFracSM and CobraJet FracSM
stimulation jobs. Table 7.72 provides ball sub
specifications.
Applications
Ball subs are used during some coiled tubing fracturing jobs
to allow reverse circulation. The zones can be cleaned up after
treatment and sand can be washed off the top of the packer
before the toolstring is released and moved. The ball resting
on the seat acts as a check valve to prevent leakoff of the
sandladen fluid, which is being used to perforate the casing.
CT Thread Selection
The following factors should be considered when selecting a thread type or sizing a downhole tool.
• The outside diameter of the connection should allow the toolstring to pass through any downhole
restrictions in the production tubing.
• The outside diameter of the chosen connection should allow the toolstring to be "fishable" or
incorporate fishing necks into the design.
• The inside diameter of the connection should be large enough to allow the free travel of any balls or
plugs that need to pass through to operate other equipment in the tool string.
• The inside diameter should be large enough to provide minimal pressure drops when pumping fluid
at high rates.
• When in remote locations, can the chosen connection be machined at local facilities?
• Tubing connections and those with O-ring seals are not as dependant on the make up torque as a tool
joint style thread in high-pressure applications. Improperly made up tool joints can washout during
pumping operations.
• Can the chosen thread be torqued to it's recommended makeup torque with the available tools?
• In drilling and fishing operations, a tool joint style connection should be selected.
• For high-pressure applications, select a connection that is designed to retain internal pressure.
Historically Halliburton has used the OECO "A" Thread which is interchangeable with CS Hydril.
However Duncan Technology now follows the recommendations of the International Coiled Tubing
Association, (ICoTA) that are summarized in the table below.
Stub Acme
1 1/4-in. Ammt
PAC
1. Some chemicals and environments cause certain rubber types to lose elasticity, which can affect
setting or resetting packer elements. Usually, no other physical degradation of the rubber is
apparent. Service tools can be run in these environments if the packer or bridge plug is set within
8 hours of starting in the hole. The packer or plug cannot be reset after initial operations have
begun.
2. Some chemicals can cause physical degradation of certain rubber types. To keep these chemicals
from prolonged contact with the rubber, pump them into the workstring and the wellbore. Do not
allow them in the drilling or completion fluids. If fluids are spotted, do not spot these chemicals
across the packer seat (overdisplacement). Run a pup joint below a retrievable packer to provide
a fluid barrier for packer elements. Place sand above a retrievable bridge plug to provide a phys-
ical barrier to pumped chemicals.
3. Incompatibilities that previously existed with chemicals that are produced from an oil or gas well
may not exist in certain service operations if the well has been properly killed, and those chem-
icals do not exist in the wellbore. Further, pumping operations will keep produced chemicals
from entering the wellbore during the service operation.
4. Chemical incompatibilities may not be severe enough to cause concern, but explosive decom-
pression can damage seals or packer elements. Explosive decompression occurs when a sudden
pressure loss occurs after prolonged exposure to this chemical.
O-ring Selections
Table 7.79 provides pressure and temperature guidelines for selecting the proper O-rings for HES service
tools. These guidelines are for HES service tools only.
Quality Checks
To help ensure proper usage, perform field checks on packer elements and other rubber seal components.
Visual Inspection
Always inspect packer elements and seals before use, especially if they have been used before.
Important! Never reuse any packer element or seal that is run above 275°F (135°C).
Important! Never use cracked, blistered, bubbled, split, or torn packer seals.
When inspecting elements, check the OD of the packer element for swelling. ODs are listed in tool
manuals (Service Tools, Drillable Tools, etc.).
Durometer Check
Durometer is a measure of the hardness of an elastomer and is measured on a Shore "A" scale, which
displays values from about 45 to 100. Generally, most packer elements and seals vary from 50 to 95
Shore "A". ASTM 2240 provides information for properly testing rubber durometer.
Check the durometer of packer elements and seals if they are being reused. A durometer check also
ensures that the proper packer elements are being run on tools that allow for packer elements of various
durometers.
Conduct durometer tests on a thick section of rubber to ensure a proper reading. Readings must be taken
between 60° and 70°F (16 and 21°C) to correlate with the published durometers. Generally, readings at
higher temperatures will produce lower durometers. Tolerances on most packer elements and seals are ±
3 Shore "A".
Traceability
When redressing a service tool, always record the part number, batch number, cure date (by quarter of
the year), and purchase contract number of the seals found on the package label. This information is
especially important for packer elements.
Storage
To ensure traceability and improve the shelf life of seals, always store them in their original package. For
more information about packaging, identification, and storage, see Halliburton Specification 70.72000.
Minimum Linear Beam Pressure for Injectors with V-Blocks .............. 8-23
Maximum Linear Beam Pressure for Injectors with V-Blocks ............. 8-25
Tubing Guide Arches ............................................................................... 8-39
Overview ............................................................................................ 8-39
Selection and Job Considerations ...................................................... 8-39
48-in. Fixed-Radius Guide Arch ......................................................... 8-41
72-in. Fixed-Radius Guide Arch ......................................................... 8-41
72-in. Fixed-Radius Special Guide Arch ............................................ 8-42
96-in. Fixed-Radius Guide Arch ......................................................... 8-43
120-in. Fixed-Radius Special Guide Arch .......................................... 8-43
52-96 in. Progressive-Radius Guide Arch .......................................... 8-44
72-120 in. Progressive-Radius Guide Arch ........................................ 8-45
72-120 in. Segmented-Guide Arch ..................................................... 8-46
Coiled Tubing Reels ................................................................................ 8-47
Shaft-Type Reel Assemblies .............................................................. 8-48
Shaftless Type Reel Assemblies ........................................................ 8-49
Reel Swivels ....................................................................................... 8-53
Halliburton Reel Capacities ................................................................ 8-54
Reel Capacity Calculation .................................................................. 8-55
Shipping Spools ................................................................................. 8-56
i
Additional Reel Equipment ...................................................................... 8-57
Yard Spooling Device ......................................................................... 8-57
Coiled Tubing Embedded Reel Stand ................................................ 8-58
Bump Guard for Embedded Reel Stand ............................................. 8-58
Coiled Tubing Spreader/Lifter Bar with Slings and Shackles ............. 8-59
Coiled Tubing Hydraulic Power Packs ..................................................... 8-60
Standard 30K Hydraulic Coiled Tubing Power Pack .......................... 8-60
Universal High-Pressure Coiled Tubing Power Pack ......................... 8-61
Zone 2 Universal High-Pressure Coiled Tubing Power Pack
(Detroit Diesel 8V92TA) ..................................................................... 8-62
Zone 2 Universal High-Pressure Coiled Tubing Power Pack
(CAT 3406/CI5) .................................................................................. 8-64
Coiled Tubing Operator Houses .............................................................. 8-65
Standard 30K Coiled Tubing Operator House .................................... 8-65
Modular (Universal) Control House (60K CTU and Larger) ............... 8-67
Certified, Modular (Universal) Control House ..................................... 8-68
Trucks and Trailers .................................................................................. 8-69
Large Load Capacity Coiled Tubing Crane Truck .............................. 8-69
QMC 6070 High-Capacity Crane Trailer ............................................ 8-70
Standard Drop-Deck Coiled Tubing Reel Trailer ................................ 8-71
3-Axle International (Canada) Embedded Reel Trailer ...................... 8-72
4-Axle Embedded Reel Trailer ........................................................... 8-72
Offshore Skid Units .................................................................................. 8-73
Standard 60K Offshore Skid Unit ....................................................... 8-74
Certified 60K Offshore Skid Unit ........................................................ 8-78
Halliburton Fluid Pumps ........................................................................... 8-82
HT-150 (Coyote) ................................................................................. 8-82
HT-400 ............................................................................................... 8-83
HT-1200 (Bearcat) .............................................................................. 8-85
HT-2000 ............................................................................................. 8-86
HQ-2000 (Grizzly) .............................................................................. 8-87
Complete Pump Units ........................................................................ 8-88
General Statistics ............................................................................... 8-88
Unit Performance ............................................................................... 8-89
Centrifugal Pumps .............................................................................. 8-90
ii
Section 8
15K CTU
This unit (Figure 8.1) is a self-contained
single unit design with the advantage of a
very fast rig-up and rig-down giving it the
ability to perform multiple jobs in a single
day. This unit is mostly suited to shallow
work with the smaller coiled tubing sizes.
30K/38K CTUs
The 30 and 38K units have the capacity for most common coiled tubing requirements. They are available
in various configurations including trailer-mounted (Figure 8.2), truck-mounted split bodyloads (Figure
8.2), or offshore skid-mounted. The trailer-mounted embedded reel shown allows a larger capacity of
coiled tubing to be carried to location when required.
60K CTU
The 60K unit offers more flexibility than smaller units and is able to perform many more job types due
to increased pulling ability and capacities to handle longer tubing strings with larger ODs. This was
available as a trailer mounted unit (Figure 8.4) or skid mounted to suit offshore applications.
80K CTU
With a pull capacity of 80,000 lb, this unit (Figure 8.5)
was designed and built for applications in which more
load capacity was required than was previously
available. Although this unit is still in use, it has now
been superceded by the higher capacity V95HP CTU
(Figure 8.6).
V95HP QR CTU
With a higher capacity in a smaller lighter body, the V95HP unit (Figure 8.6) has taken over from the
previous 80K unit. It is available on a quick-rig-up designed trailer where the injector is mounted on the
same trailer as the reel (shown) or skid-mounted on four separate skids for offshore operations (shown
in Figure 8.7, Page 8-5 without the reel skid).
Figure 8.7—V95HP unit skid-mounted on four separate skids for offshore operations
(shown without the reel skid).
• Injector-mounted on tilt mechanism on reel trailer so tubing remains stabbed in injector at all times
to improve safety and decrease rig-up and rig-down speed.
• V95HP injector based on proven 60K technology.
• Increased hoist capacity (pull rating) to 95Klb.
• Micro-Fine hydraulic controls.
• Designed to allow maximum tubing length to meet local weight limits.
• Available as triple rear-axle truck for international locations (lift axle on forward rear set) or
quad-axle trailer for US locations (lift axle on forward set) trailer capacity up to 60,000 lb of tubing.
• New segmented tubing guide (over 120-in. effective radius) reduces fatigue and simplifies rig-ups.
• All pressure control equipment rated for 15,000-psi working pressure and H2S exposure.
• 4 1/16-in., 15,000-psi, H2S-rated BOP.
• Adapts easily to larger rental BOPs.
• 4 1/16-in., 15,000-psi, H2S-rated dual stripper (over/under) that allows redundant pressure control.
• 15,000-psi Flow cross also standard (4 Lo-Torq valves).
• All connections are flanged with metal-to-metal seals.
• Large reel core diameter (84-in.) to minimize pipe bending fatigue.
• Pump-through reel swivel (15,000-psi).
• 15,000-psi Working pressure manifolds.
• Remote-controlled isolation valve contains pressure inside the reel for added safety if the reel swivel
becomes damaged and needs to be re-dressed.
• Full-length, anti-buckling tubing guides between the injector chains and the stripper ensure no
buckling occurs during snubbing.
• Bi-directional dynamic braking control valves maintain positive control with tubing movement,
regardless of load direction or magnitude.
• Secondary static brakes engage to arrest tubing movement if primary control devices are rendered
ineffective.
Halliburton Injectors
15K Injector
The 15, 30, and 38K injectors are very similar in
design. However the 15K injector (Figure 8.9) has
only one hydraulic motor, whereas, both the 30K and
38K injectors have two.
60K Injector
Gearhouse
Motors
V-style gripper
blocks on
chains
Outer frame
Leveling legs
Figure 8.11—Photo of the 60K injector. Drawing shows the major components.
80K Injector
Now superseded by the V95HP injector (Figure 8.12), there are three different versions of the old 80K
injector still being used.
• Standard—First version of the 80K injector designed and built with 6,000-psi hydraulic motors.
• DNV—A modified version of the standard version. The standard hydraulic motors were substituted
with 3,500-psi hydraulic motors to attain DNV certification. Both the standard and DNV injectors
needed the dedicated 80K power pack to run.
• Universal—The hydraulic motors were changed out to 5,000-psi motors. This allows the universal
80K injector to be run with the newer 60K power pack (sometimes called universal power pack).
Figure 8.12—Photo of the 80K injector with protection gaurds. Drawing shows the major components.
V95HP Injector
100K Injector
V135HP Injector
To check for pin rotation ensure the cotter pins are aligned
vertically with the links as shown in Figure 8.18.
Rotated pins can be caused by the roller seizing on the Figure 8.17—Injector chain diagram
pin because of corrosion or galling and is often a sign of
poor lubrication. When rotation occurs, the pin is likely to
fracture rapidly. Replace all rotated connector links. Once one connector link starts to rotate it is common
for more links to rotate soon afterwards, therefore serious consideration should be given to changing the
entire chain and a thorough inspection of the chain lubrication system should be done. Also note the
correct makeup of the chain showing alternating end caps with cotter pins.
As soon as chains are installed on the injector and have been operated, they begin to stretch. Chain stretch
cannot be avoided, but it must be monitored and managed. Regular inspections should be conducted to
verify that chains have not stretched beyond their allowed length. The allowable stretch for these types
of chain is 3% (shown in Table 8.1). Figure 8.19 shows an example of how to measure an ASA 200
chain for allowed stretch. From the table the nominal length for this size of chain is 15.00 in. over six
links after proper tension is applied. If the measured length of the chain is actually 15.45 in. (as shown
in Figure 8.19), it has reached its maximum allowable length and should be replaced. Links should not
be removed or spacers installed to try to extend the chain life. It should also be noted that new chains
stretch faster than old chains.
Figure 8.20—Views of the standard two-hole V-Block® gripper blocks. Last view shows an installed
gripper block with the single hole pointing upward and the double holes pointing downward.
Table 8.10—Minimum Linear Beam Pressure for Injectors with V-Blocks (Continued)
Required Required Linear beam Cylinder Pressure (p) for Injectors
Hoisting Hoisting
Gripper 60K and 100K and
Load 15K 30/38K 80K Load
Load V95HP V135HP
Q P=p/20.98 P=p/53.72 P=p/127.6 Q
P=Q/(2f) p=P/78.34 p=P/127.59
lb psi psi psi lb
lb psi psi
64000 100000 780 1280 780 64000
66000 103125 810 1320 810 66000
68000 106250 830 1360 830 68000
70000 109375 860 1400 860 70000
72000 112500 880 1440 880 72000
74000 115625 910 1480 910 74000
76000 118750 930 1520 930 76000
78000 121875 960 1560 960 78000
80000 125000 980 1600 980 80000
82000 128125 1000 82000
84000 131250 1030 84000
86000 134375 1050 86000
88000 137500 1080 88000
90000 140625 1100 90000
92000 143750 1130 92000
94000 146875 1150 94000
96000 150000 1180 96000
98000 153125 1200 98000
100000 156250 1220 100000
102000 159375 1250 102000
104000 162500 1270 104000
106000 165625 1300 106000
108000 168750 1320 108000
110000 171875 1350 110000
112000 175000 1370 112000
114000 178125 1400 114000
116000 181250 1420 116000
118000 184375 1450 118000
120000 187500 1470 120000
122000 190625 1490 122000
124000 193750 1520 124000
126000 196875 1540 126000
128000 200000 1570 128000
130000 203125 1590 130000
132000 206250 1620 132000
134000 209375 1640 134000
136000 212500 1670 136000
Based on friction factor of f=0.32
Cylinder areas are (Acyl)*(0.95) efficiency of 95% assumed
Table 8.11—(70-kpsi CT) Maximum Linear Beam Pressure for Injectors with V-Blocks
Specified (Nominal) Cross-section Area Injector Size
Wall Weight 60K/ 100K/
OD ID Outside Wall Inside W 15K 30/38K 80K
Thickness V95HP V135HP
D d Ao At Ai lb/ft
t
(in.) (in.) (in.2) (in.2) (in.2) Linear Beam Pressure [psi]
(in.)
1.750 0.145 1.460 2.405 0.731 1.674 2.486 2511 1471 1210 661 743
1.750 0.156 1.438 2.405 0.781 1.624 2.656 2886 1691 1391 759 854
1.750 0.175 1.400 2.405 0.866 1.539 2.944 3589 2103 1730 944 1062
1.750 0.188 1.374 2.405 0.923 1.483 3.136 4109 2407 1981 1081 1216
1.750 0.204 1.342 2.405 0.991 1.414 3.368 4791 2807 2310 1261 1418
The tubing guide assembly receives the workstring tubing from the reel and guides it to the
tubing injector on the controlled minimum radius to prevent the tubing from running off the edge
of the roller assemblies and can be rotated on the horizontal to any desired position.
The tubing guide portion swivels in the horizontal plane on a large ball bearing to maintain
orientation with the tubing reel and compensate for fleet angle changes during the spooling
operation.
The tubing guide arch pins to the top of the stationary injector outer frame and is therefore fixed
with respect to the wellbore centerline. The basic injector models are modular, but the frames
may differ in the interface dimensions.
Configured for Proper Tubing Size
Each tubing guide arch is equipped with rollers or wear blocks along the arch length. These are
contoured to support the tubing OD. The rollers are designed to accommodate a range of tubing
diameters. Tubing sizes outside this nominal range may require replacement of some or all of
the roller sets. The backshell may need adjustment to accommodate the large tubing diameters.
Care should be taken to make sure that tubing exits the guide arch on center with the chains.
Arch Radius
The tubing guide arch radius is defined as the radius of curvature of the centerline of the inner
rollers (this determines the amount of bending fatigue damage). The bending radius of the tubing
guide arch is more important than the bending radius of the reel because twice as many bending
cycles occur at the tubing guide arch as occur at the reel. For coiled tubing used repeatedly in
service and drilling applications, the tubing guide arch radius should be at least 30 times the
coiled tubing diameter. This factor may be less for coiled tubing which will be run only a few
times (e.g. permanent installations).
It is important that the tubing exit the bottom of the guide rollers in line with the gripper chains.
Depending on the tubing diameter, it may be necessary to make adjustments in the injector
mechanism or the guide arch rollers.
Stabbing Techniques
It is often desirable to keep the tubing stabbed into the guide arch while transporting the unit.
At the job site it is easier to hoist the guide, with tubing affixed, onto the injector to facilitate
stabbing the tubing into the gripper chains. The tubing should be clamped to the guide arch
securely while being hoisted to the injector.
Straightener
Halliburton units are not equipped with straightening devices, because the injectors are designed
to accommodate some bending curvature, straightening reduces service life, and the additional
friction affects the weight indicator reading. Straightening devices can be considered for some
special applications like permanent completions where it is desired to eliminate the residual
bend for mechanical purposes.
Safe Hoisting Technique
A single point lifting bail is attached to most types of tubing guide arch. This is designed to hoist
the tubing guide onto the injector and can be used to support the combined weight of the tubing
guide, injector and small stripper assembly. It is not designed for lifting large BOP assemblies
that are attached to the injector. Lift slings should be used for this.
Due to the large radius tubing guide used on some of the Halliburton injectors, it is necessary to
have two balance points for lifting. When lifting only the tubing guide, it is necessary to connect
the balance link from the lift bail to the guide arch.
Note The tubing in the injector will tend to tilt the assembly forward. Do not reconnect the
balance link to compensate for this shift. If the balance link is connected, the guide
arch will tilt, damaging the pipe in the lower guide rollers.
Warning In addition to probable tubing damage, leaving the balance link connected when
lifting the injector assembly puts abnormal stress on the bolt to which the bal-
ance link is connected. This high stress could bend or break the bolt. This would
result in the injector swaying, due to the balance point change, and could result
in damage to equipment and/or personnel.
While being hoisted, the pivot lock should be engaged to prevent rotation of the guide arch.
After the guide arch base is pinned to the injector, be sure to disengage the pivot lock to allow
the guide to rotate from side to side to compensate for fleet angle changes.
Lift Slings
Four leg wire rope lifting slings are available for most newer types of tubing guide and is the preferred
method of lifting the tubing guide and injector. The sling should never be used to pick up the tubing guide
alone because of the instability created by the location of the tubing guide balance point.
For CT used repeatedly in service applications, the tubing guide arch radius and reel core diameter should
be at least 30 times the coiled tubing diameter. This factor may be less for coiled tubing which will be
run only a few times (eg. permanent installations).
Reel Swivels
Figures 8.36 and 8.37 show the
shaft-type and shaftless reel-type
swivels. These swivels allow
fluids to be pumped under
pressure through the coiled
tubing while the reel is rotating.
Two-inch swivels have an ID of
1.3 in. and 3-in. swivels have an
ID of 3 in. This should be
considered when calculating the
maximum flow for a particular
application.
Shaftless-Reel Swivel
The shaftless-reel swivel is available in 2 or 3 in., 10 kpsi or 15 kpsi (Figure 8.37) shows the 3-in.,
15-kpsi version).
Shipping Spools
The HES yard-spooling device is transportable and has circulating capability with a 6-in. (152-mm)
spooling shaft. Optional specifications include:
• Transport cradle
• Remote-control stand
• 4-in. Spooling shaft
• Side platform
• Platform for extended levelwind access
• Total weight: (estimated): 6,000 lb (2722 kg)
Power packs found in the field may differ due to various customer requirements and upgrades as higher
pressures and larger CT sizes have evolved and improvements have been made.
Figure 8.48—Photos show modular (universal) control house (60K CTU and Larger), control house in
offshore lift frame with hose reels, and interior control panel.
Figure 8.50—The large load capacity crane truck (Part No. 101207472)
• The trailer will carry a standard skid-mounted 1 1/4- or 1 1/2-in. reel (reel not included).
• The trailer can be used for 30K applications. However, anticipated tubing weight, fluid weight, and
the weights of the control house/power pack/tubing guide should be totaled to ensure that the payload
does not exceed the maximum design capacity.
• Depending on the tubing size and wall thickness, the physical reel capacity may exceed the design
and legal weight capacity.
1. Reel skid
2. Operator house skid
3. Hydraulic power package skid
4. Auxiliary equipment skid.
The reel skid contains the reel assembly and the coiled tubing on the reel. The operator house skid holds
the operator house, hydraulic accumulators, and two hose reels with the house hydraulic hoses. The
hydraulic power package skid holds the hydraulic power package and the hose reel with the injector drive
hoses. The auxiliary skid holds the injector, tubing guide, stripper, BOP, fuel tank, and a toolbox.
The specs shown are for the 60K Standard CTU and the 60K Zone 2 CTU. These figures will be very
similar to the V95HP CTU except the V95HP injector weighs about 1,700 lb more than the 60K injector
and larger strippers and BOPs may be used.
Figure 8.57—Operator
house skid
Figure 8.58—Hydraulic
power package skid (all
units in in.)
Reel assembly
Lift frame
Auxiliary lifting
Operator house frame
Injector
drive
hose reel
Auxiliary
Injector Tubing guide lifting frame
Stripper
BOP
Tool
box
HT-400
Figure 8.65 shows the HT-400 pump. Table 8.41 lists the pump specifications.
HT-1200 (Bearcat)
Figure 8.66 shows the HT-1200 pump. Table 8.42 lists the pump specifications, and Table 8.43
provides the pump pressure ratings.
HT-2000
Figure 8.67 shows the HT-2000 pump. Table 8.44 lists the pump specifications.
HQ-2000 (Grizzly)
Figure 8.68 shows the HQ-2000 pump. Table 8.45 lists the pump specifications, and Table 8.46
provides pump pressure ratings.
Note The FPR-B is also known as the Twin Panther and the FPS-B is also known as the
Panther pumping skid. The FPR-J is also know as the Grizzly trailer and the FPS-J is
also know as a Grizzly pumping skid.
Skids
Unit Performance
Pumping equipment performance shown is at rated engine speed and horsepower for specific
conditions of atmospheric pressure and temperature established by the engine manufacturers.
Changes in elevation, temperature, and engine speed will affect the actual performance.
Centrifugal Pumps
Halliburton 6 x 5 x 11 (Figure A)
• with mechanical seals and 10-in. impeller (Part No. 350.1241)
• with lip seals and 10-in. impeller (Part No. 350.1242)
• with mechanical seals and 11-in. impeller (Part No. 350.1243)
• with lip seals and 11-in. impeller (Part No. 350.1244)
Halliburton 8 x 6 x 14 (Figure B)
• with packing, 300 BHP power end, and 14-in. impeller (Part No. 350.201)
• with lip seals, 100 BHP power end, and 14-in. impeller (Part No. 350.202)
Halliburton 4 x 4 x 12 (Figure C)
• with lip seals and 12-in. ductile impeller (Part No. 350.205)
i
Foam Generators ............................................................................... 9-20
What Affects the Fluid Loss During a Cleanout? ................................ 9-21
How to Change Velocities and Downhole Circulating Pressures ....... 9-21
Miscellaneous Guidelines ................................................................... 9-22
Nitrogen Equipment ................................................................................. 9-23
Terminology ........................................................................................ 9-23
Nitrogen Converter Performance Summary ....................................... 9-23
MPU-60A Nitrogen-Converter Truck .................................................. 9-24
MPU-90A Nitrogen-Converter Truck .................................................. 9-25
MPU-660A Nitrogen-Converter Truck ................................................ 9-26
TPU-300A Nitrogen-Converter Trailer ................................................ 9-27
TPU-340FA Nitrogen-Converter Trailer .............................................. 9-28
TPU-660 Nitrogen-Converter Trailer .................................................. 9-29
SPU-60B Nitrogen-Converter Skid ..................................................... 9-30
S120-15F Nitrogen-Converter Skid .................................................... 9-31
SPU-180F (Wellnite Design) and NCS-180F (ISO-compatible)
Offshore Nitrogen-Converter Skids .................................................... 9-32
SPU-340F Nitrogen-Converter Skid ................................................... 9-33
BLT-3700 Nitrogen Transport Truck ................................................... 9-34
TLT-2000 Nitrogen "PUP" Trailer ....................................................... 9-35
ST-72-LNSM MVE/LOX Liquid Nitrogen Trailer ................................. 9-36
TRS-74-P-85 CRYENCO Pressure-Off Liquid Nitrogen Trailer ......... 9-37
Offshore Skid Tanks ........................................................................... 9-38
NTS-2150, -3000, and -5000 ISO-Framed Offshore Nitrogen Tanks . 9-39
Nitrogen Purge Tube Trailer ............................................................... 9-40
Nitrogen Losses ................................................................................. 9-41
High-Pressure N2 Tank vs. Low-Pressure N2 Tank and Boost Pump:
Which is best? .................................................................................... 9-44
Membrane and PSA Nitrogen Generating Equipment -
Non-Cryogenic Production of Nitrogen ............................................... 9-46
Tank Contents Gauge Charts ............................................................. 9-47
ii
Section 9
Temperature Characteristics
At atmospheric pressure (14.7 psia), liquid nitrogen will "boil" at -320.5°F. In other words, it begins to
vaporize to a gas above -320.4°F.
The critical temperature (where all properties of the coexisting vapor and liquid phases become identical)
= -232.8°F
Volume Characteristics
If you had one gallon of liquid nitrogen (at atmospheric pressure) and allowed it to vaporize entirely into
gas, you would then have 93.11 scf (standard cubic feet) of nitrogen gas. Standard conditions are
considered to be at 14.7 psi (1 atmosphere) pressure and 70°F.
Our conversion tables tell us that one gallon is equal to 0.1337 cubic feet. Our one gallon of liquid
nitrogen is also 0.1337 cubic feet of liquid nitrogen. If it is allowed to entirely vaporize to a gas (at 14.7
psi and 70°F), you would still end up with 93.11 scf of gas. This is equivalent to 696.5 gal of gas.
Remember, 93.11 cf / 0.1337 cf/gallon = 696.5 gallon.
Conversion Data
Table 9.1 lists some conversion data. To use these conversions, select the units from the top row that
you want to convert from and then move down the rows to the unit you want to convert to. This is the
conversion factor you need and should be multiplied by your original number to obtain the new units you
require.
Table 9.1—Conversions*
1 lb 1 kg 1 SCF **1 Nm³ 1 Gal 1L
Liquid Liquid Gas Gas Liquid Liquid
lb Liquid 1.0000 2.205 0.07245 2.757 6.745 1.782
kg Liquid 0.4536 1.0 0.03286 1.2506 3.060 0.8083
scf Gas 13.803 30.42 1.0 38.04 93.11 24.60
**Nm³ gas 0.3627 0.7996 0.02628 1.0 2.447 0.6464
Gal Liquid 0.1481 0.3262 0.01074 0.4080 1.0 0.2642
L Liquid 0.5606 1.2349 0.04065 1.5443 3.785 1.0
*All values rounded to nearest 4/5 significant numbers. SCF (standard cubic foot) gas
measured at 1 atmosphere and 70°F. Liquid measured at 1 atmosphere and boiling
temperature. All values are consistent with standards adopted by the Compressed Gas
Association on June 6, 1962.
**Nm³ (normal cubic meter) gas measured at 1 atmosphere and 0°C.
Nitrogen Characteristics
Nitrogen weighs approximately 3% less than air (at atmospheric temperature). It is odorless, colorless,
and tasteless. Nitrogen is also nontoxic and nonflammable. Table 9.2 provides additional nitrogen
characteristics.
Safety
Wear protective clothing to cover as much of the body as possible, including:
• Safety goggles
• Thermal or leather gloves
• Long sleeve shirts
• Cuffless trousers (don't stick your pants in your boots)
Warning Avoid skin contact. Liquid nitrogen is hazardous. Contact with human tissue
will destroy the tissue in a manner similar to high temperature burns. Freeze
burns will result from contact with the actual liquid or contact with the cold sur-
faces of piping and equipment containing the liquid.
Warning Liquid nitrogen causes immediate damage to your eyes. Eye damage is usually
beyond repair.
Warning A well ventilated work environment is essential. Without proper ventilation, ni-
trogen can displace oxygen to cause dizziness, unconsciousness, or even death
when inhaled.
First Aid
Observe the following guidelines if N2 contact occurs.
• Remove any clothing that may restrict blood circulation to the affected body area.
• Do not rub the affected area as this may cause further tissue damage.
• Apply cold compresses if possible.
• Get to a physician for treatment.
Oilfield Applications
The following are some common N2 oilfield applications:
Pressure testing
Treating Iron
Carbon steel becomes brittle at approximately -40°F (-40ºC).
Warning Do not allow LN2 or nitrogen gas at this temperature into carbon steel treating
iron. It is one of the most dangerous mistakes an operator can make because any
shock could cause treating iron to break like glass.
Carbon steel cannot withstand rapid contraction. Nitrogen can shrink the inside of treating iron faster than
the outside, causing it to separate.
Nitrogen Calculations
MP
The density (or volume factor) of nitrogen at a given temperature and pressure is: ρ =
ZRT
V'
Density or volume factor can be expressed as: ρ or
V
Once the constants and unit conversions are included, this equation can be written for
198.6P (psia)
English units as: ρ (scf/bbl) =
Z(460 + °F)
2.8416P (kPa)
In metric units it can be written as: ρ (sm 3/m 3 ) =
Z(273 + °C)
Nomenclature
M = molecular weight of nitrogen = 28.0134
P = absolute pressure (psi for English units, kPa for metric units)
R = gas constant (1,545 ft./lb/lb mole °R - for English units, 0.08206 atm-liters/gm mole °K)
T = absolute temperature (°F + 460 for English units, °C + 273 for metric units)
Note Both of these densities express the weight or mass as a "standard" volume. Standard
conditions are defined as atmospheric pressure (14.7 psia or 1 atm) and 60 ºF or 15
ºC. SCF stands for standard cubic feet and scm or sm3 stands for standard cubic
meters.
The “Pressure vs. Depth for a Well Filled with Nitrogen” graphs were based on a surface temperature of
70ºF (21ºC) and a gradient of 1.6ºF per 100 ft. (2.92ºC per 100 m). Variations in the well temperature
from these values make relatively small changes in the pressures.
The following examples show how the graphs in this section can be used to solve nitrogen problems.
Example 1 E
How much nitrogen is required to fill a 12,500-ft reel of 2-in. OD × 0.156-in. wall CT to 3,500 psia at an
average temperature of 75ºF?
1. From the Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements tables (Section 2, Page 2-52), read the
internal volume for the size: 2.768 bbls/1,000 ft.
2. Multiply this value by 12.5 thousand feet to obtain a total volume of 34.6 bbl.
3. Using the Volume Factor, Medium Pressure graph (Page 9-10), read the volume factor as 1,200
SCF/bbl
4. Multiply the volume of the reel by the volume factor to obtain 41,520 SCF. This is the amount
of nitrogen needed.
Example 1 M
How much nitrogen is required to fill a 3,810-m reel of 50.8-mm OD × 3.962-mm wall CT to 24,100 kPa
at an average temperature of 24ºC?
1. From the Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements tables (Section 2, Page 2-52), read the
internal volume for the size: 1.4438 liters/m, which is the same as 1.4438 m3/1,000 m.
2. Multiply this value by 3.81 thousand meters to obtain a total volume of 5.5m3.
3. Using the Volume Factor, Medium Pressure graph (Page 9-10), read the volume factor as 221
scm/m3.
4. Multiply the volume of the reel by the volume factor to obtain 1,215 scm. This is the amount of
nitrogen needed.
Example 2 E
The same reel of CT as Example 1 E is being used to place nitrogen in a well. The CT will be run to 7,500
ft. Nitrogen will be pumped until the pressure at the end of the CT reaches 3,500 psia, filling both the
well tubular, which is 3.5-in., 12.95 lb/ft EU tubing, and the CT.
1. From the Tubing Sizes, Volumes, and Displacements table (Section 2, Page 2-56), read the inter-
nal volume for this size tubing as 7.35 bbl/1,000 ft.
2. Multiply this value by the depth of 7.5 thousand feet to obtain a well volume of 55.125 bbl.
3. From the Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements table (Section 2, Page 2-52), read the inter-
nal volume for this CT size as 2.768 bbl/1,000 ft and the external displacement as 3.886
bbl/1,000 ft.
4. Multiply these values by 7.5 thousand feet to obtain an internal volume of 20.76 bbl and the
external displacement as 29.145 bbl.
5. The total volume in the well to be filled with nitrogen is 55.125 - 29.145 + 20.76 = 46.74 bbl.
6. From the Pressure vs. Depth for a Well Filled with Nitrogen graph (Page 9-13), find the point
where the pressure is 3,500 psia at a 7,500-ft depth. Follow the curves upward to read an approx-
imate surface pressure of 2,750 psia.
7. The average pressure is (3,500 + 2,750)/2 = 3,125 psia.
8. The estimated bottomhole temperature is 70ºF + 1.6 × 75 hundred feet = 190ºF. The average tem-
perature is (190 + 70)/2 = 130ºF.
9. The volume factor for this average temperature and pressure is approximately 950 scf/bbl.
10. Multiplying this volume factor by the well volume from Step 5 yields a nitrogen requirement of
44,400 scf.
11. For the remaining 5,000 ft of CT on the reel, assume the pressure will be the same as the wellhead
pressure, which is 2,750 psia, and the temperature is 75ºF. Using the Volume Factor, Medium
Pressure graph (Page 9-10), read the volume factor as 990 scf/bbl.
12. The volume of this section of the coiled tubing is 2.768 × 5 thousand feet = 13.84 bbl.
13. Multiply the volume of this section by the volume factor to obtain 13,700 scf.
The total nitrogen required is 13,700 + 44,400 = 58,100 scf
Example 2 M
The same reel of CT as Example 1 M is being used to place nitrogen in a well. The CT will be run to
2,285 m. Nitrogen will be pumped until the pressure at the end of the CT reaches 24,100 kPa, filling both
the well tubular, which is 88.9 mm 19.27 kg/m EU tubing, and the CT.
1. From the Tubing Sizes, Volumes, and Displacements table (Section 2, Page 2-56), read the inter-
nal volume for this size tubing as 3.832 liters/m, which is the same as 3.832 m3 per 1000 m.
2. Multiply this value by the depth of 2.285 thousand meters to obtain a well volume of 8.756 m3.
3. From the Coiled Tubing Volumes and Displacements table (Section 2, Page 2-52), read the inter-
nal volume for this CT size as 1.4438 liters/m and the external displacement as 2.0268 liters/m.
4. Multiply these values by 2.285 thousand meters to obtain an internal volume of 3.3 m3 and the
external displacement as 4.631 m3.
5. The total volume in the well to be filled with nitrogen is 8.756 - 4.631 + 3.3 = 7.425 m3.
6. From the Pressure vs. Depth for a Well Filled with Nitrogen graph (Page 9-13), find the point
where the pressure is 24,100 kPa at a 2,285-m depth. Follow the curves upward to read an
approximate surface pressure of approximately 19,000 kPa.
7. The average pressure is (24,100 + 19,000)/2 = 21,550 kPa.
8. The estimated bottomhole temperature is 21ºC + 2.92 × 2.2.85 hundred meters = 88ºC. The
average temperature is (88 + 21)/2 = 55ºC.
9. The volume factor for this average temperature and pressure is approximately 170 sm3/m3.
10. Multiplying this volume factor by the well volume from Step 5 yields a nitrogen requirement of
1,262 sm3.
11. For the remaining 1,525 m of CT on the reel, assume the pressure will be the same as the well-
head pressure, which is 1,900 kPa, and the temperature is 24ºC. Using the Volume Factor,
Medium Pressure graph (Page 9-10), read the volume factor as 175 sm3/m3. The volume of this
section of the CT is 1.4438 × 1.525 thousand meters = 2.2 sm3/m3.
12. Multiply the volume of this section by the volume factor to obtain 385 sm3.
The total nitrogen required is 385 + 1,262 = 1,647 sm3
Metric
Metric
Metric
Metric
Metric
Metric
Gas liquid ratio, GLR—This term is commonly used in the field when an operator is needing to adjust
the nitrogen rates to correspond with the fluids being pumped by other equipment on location.
Often on a commingled or foam treatment the operator is instructed to pump at a certain scf/bbl (GLR)
and then slows or increases the scf/min of gas depending on the rate the fluids are being pumped.
In tests, a nitrogen-gel ratio of approximately 350 SCF/bbl was selected. Fluid was pumped at 2,500 psi.
The fluid with nitrogen penetrated a 1/2-in. thick steel plate, a 3/4-in. thick sheath of Hydromite
(synthetic resin and gypsum) cement and a Berea sandstone core to a depth of 10 in. in just 30 minutes.
Under the same conditions, fluid without nitrogen penetrated only 5-1/2 in. in 30 minutes.
In the second technique, inhibitor is displaced into the formation with a commingled nitrogen fluid. In
low pressure wells, nitrogen gas alone can displace the inhibitor fluid. The nitrogen allows the well to be
placed on production faster, and without swabbing.
Nitrogen eliminates fluid-loss material usually needed for balanced or under-pressured drilling. It is
chemically compatible with all mud systems and increases cement circulation height.
Nitrogen-Assisted Unloading
It is common to unload wells with nitrogen circulation through coiled tubing. Although this technique is
commonly called "jetting," it starts flow by reducing hydrostatic pressure and not by "jetting" fluids to
surface.
The compressed nitrogen gas serves as a source of energy that helps push treatment fluids back out of the
formation when the well is opened up.
When nitrogen is used as the spearhead or in the breakdown fluid in fracturing, it provides a way to help
flow the well clean without having to make a cleanup trip with the tubing.
In acidizing services, nitrogen helps increase the velocity of returning fluids. That helps remove
precipitates, a common acidizing by-product, and insoluble fines, that, unless removed, can cause
formation damage.
During the job itself, nitrogen, by increasing the treatment volume, helps increase penetration. The
nitrogen bubbles, by blocking port spaces temporarily, also reduce fluid loss so the treatment fluid
becomes more efficient.
Often nitrogen is used in well-completion fluids because nitrogen can reduce hydrostatic weight of the
fluid, increase fluid velocities, improve rheology characteristics, and separate from the solution readily
at the surface.
Here we will discuss foam cleanouts. Foams are most often used in a cleanout when encountering low
bottomhole pressured reservoirs and water sensitive zones, and where velocities are limited in the bottom
of the well. Foams can hold much more solid material in suspension, and when used in an overbalanced
condition, fewer fluids will be lost to the reservoir because of foam diverting properties.
What is foam?
Foams consist of a base fluid such as water (external phase), a stabilizing surfactant (foaming agent), and
a gas (internal phase). The viscosity of the foam is greater than the liquid or gas components if the latter
are used separately. Foam viscosity depends on a number of variables, including quality, viscosity of the
external phase, and texture. The most important parameter in a foam cleanout is foam quality. Foam
Quality is the percent volume occupied by the internal gas phase. The formula for this is:
N 2 Volume
Quality =
(Liquid Volume + N 2 Volume)
Because of the compressibility of the gas, the quality of the foam will vary throughout the tubulars and
annulus during a cleanout. During pumping, the friction pressure, temperature, and hydrostatics are
changing in various sections in the well, causing changes in quality, velocities, and foam viscosity. In a
foam cleanout, we need to keep the quality of the foam between 60% and 95% in the annulus. To do this
the calculations can become very complex. Software programs are necessary to properly design foam
cleanouts. This can be done in programs such as FoamUp, Cerberus, and Mudlite.
Often we can not circulate fluids in a well because the bottomhole pressure is lower than the hydrostatic
weight of a full column of fluid. In this case, gas is commingled or foamed in with the fluid to reduce
hydrostatic weight. If the quality is above 52% gas and a foamer is added, we consider the fluid and gas
to be a foam. In most cleanouts, we are trying to balance the bottomhole circulating pressure with the
bottomhole reservoir pressure.
A typical configuration for a producing well is to have a packer set on tubing above a set of perforations
in the production casing. A producer may elect to clean the fill out with coiled tubing rather than kill the
well and trip the producing tubing in and out of the hole. In cases such as this, we will often see high
friction pressures caused by the small ID of the CT string, small annular space between tubing and CT,
a deep well, or great reel length. These factors limit the velocities we are able to obtain in a cleanout.
Compounding the problem is the large effective area below the packer between the CT string and the
production casing which limits the obtainable velocities in the annulus below the packer.
Water-Sensitive Reservoirs
Unless a well is cleaned out in an underbalanced condition, we will lose some of the circulating fluids
into the reservoir. Foams will minimize the fluid losses into the reservoirs because: (1) foam is a high
viscosity system; (2) foam bridges at the formation face in low-permeability rock; (3) foam leaks off
slowly in high-permeability rock since losses occur in a two-phase flow regime.
A large portion of the foam that does leak off is nitrogen. Nitrogen is inert and will not react with
reservoir hydrocarbons or matrix rock. For extremely water-sensitive zones, foams can be generated with
a hydrocarbon as the liquid phase. These jobs need preplanning to help ensure safety, specialized foamer
availability and lab testing to assure that the hydrocarbon can be foamed.
When a hole is deviated past 30°, the fill material being circulated upward tends to gravitate to the lower
side of the annulus. Continued upward movement of the particulates becomes very difficult once the hole
angle is greater than 60°. Viscosified non-compressible fluids do not work well under these conditions.
Tests in the late 1980s showed that in horizontal wells water worked best if high velocities were
obtainable (170+ feet/minute) and foams to be the best at lower rates. Centralization in the horizontal
section can greatly improve cleanout efficiencies.
Nitrogen is inert and only slightly soluble in water and other liquids. Once nitrogen is recirculated back
to the pits, it dissipates into the air. Because of the sensitive nature of some reservoirs, the necessary
completion fluids can become very expensive. Foam treatments can save completion fluid costs by
reducing the hydrostatic weight of the circulation fluids and replacing a portion of the fluids with a gas.
For foam fluid to carry particulates, it must remain as foam and not break out into its separate constituents
of fluid and gas. It is important to use a foamer designed around conditions such as temperature,
reservoir-liquid influxes, and the base fluid to be used.
Temperature
Some foamers cannot be used at higher temperatures. As the temperature increases, the foamers are more
soluble in the base liquid and increased foamer concentrations are necessary to stabilize the foam. Tables
9.3 and 9.4 can assist in the selection of the proper foamer and concentration.
Base Fluid
In foam cleanouts, we typically do not viscosify our base liquid system because base gel viscosifiers (or
friction reducers) help keep the fluid in a laminar flow regime rather than in a preferred turbulent regime.
If the base fluid is viscosified with a gel, additional foamer and a foam generator may be necessary.
Foam Generators
In foam cementing and many of the foam fracturing applications, a foam generator is necessary to impart
energy into a foam system when the base fluid is high in viscosity or if low shearing energy is expected
while pumping. In cleanout applications, a foam generator is typically not necessary because the base
fluid is low in viscosity and we achieve high shearing while pumping down the tubulars. However to
ensure a stable foam and particularly when high temperatures will be encountered the use of a foam
generator is recommended . A foam generator would be necessary if a hydrocarbon is used as the base
liquid to be foamed.
The foam generator is the point at which the nitrogen is introduced to the stimulation slurry. The
generator consists of a standard high-pressure hammer-union tee with a choke holder nipple and ceramic
choke. The energy generated by the gas jetting through the choke causes an extremely high shear
condition which provides the high energy mixing action needed to form the small bubbles of a stable
foam. No further mixing downstream of the foam generator is required. The foam generator should be
rigged up as shown in Figure 9.14, with the stimulation slurry coming in from the side, and the nitrogen
jetting down the straight section of the pipe. If the nitrogen is injected from the side, perpendicular to the
slurry flow stream, the high-velocity gas jet will quickly erode away the body of the tee. The considerable
energy from the nitrogen jet should be expended on the stimulation slurry, not the steel of the tee. At least
10 ft of straight discharge line should be used immediately downstream of the foam generator to help
prevent undue wear on swings.
Circulating Fluid
Straight gases have very low viscosities (usually < 0.2 cp). The reservoir will start taking gas very quickly
if the well is in an overbalanced condition. This seldom happens because of the low friction pressure and
minimal hydrostatic weight of gas. Foam systems also have low hydrostatic weights, usually in the range
of one-fourth that of water. Viscosity of foam is excellent; depending on reservoir conditions, a well can
be circulated with minimal fluid losses with a foam. Foam's superior performance is the result of its
excellent viscosity, diverting capability, and its slower two-phase flow with the small volume of foam
leaking off into the matrix. In acidizing, foam is often used as a diverter. In some cases, the foam has
diverted at pressures up to 800 psi over reservoir pressures. We see this same effect in well cleanouts.
Reservoir Characteristics
Zones that are higher in porosity, permeability, and zone height will lose more fluids.
The higher the quality of a foam above 52%, the more viscosity the foam will have. Viscosities continue
to increase with quality until the quality is around 96%. At 96% gas, the fluid surfactant layers around
the bubbles are to thin and the bubbles begin to coalesce (join together), causing the foam to break into
a non-viscous mist.
To increase the downhole circulating pressures: Increase the rate of water, decrease the rate of gas,
choke back the annulus, increase the weight of the base cleanout fluid, and increase the foam rate.
To decrease the downhole circulating pressures. Decrease the rate of water, increase the rate of gas,
open up the annulus to a larger choke size, increase the weight of the base cleanout fluid, and decrease
the foam rate.
Regulating the pressure on the backside annulus choke. When regulating the annulus choke with a
foamed system, it is important to determine what is happening to the foam as it expands upward. The
foam will be increasing in quality as it moves upward because of less influence from hydrostatic and
friction effects. The foam may increase to above 96-quality, where it will lose all viscosity and turn to a
mist. In this case, the velocities will need to be above 50 ft/sec to keep the sand from falling or bridging.
With this high velocity and the abrasive nature of the particulates, additional safety and well-control
concerns should be considered.
Miscellaneous Guidelines
• Do not use rubber hoses with compressible fluids.
• Do not leave tubulars stationary for long periods of time if particluates are only partially circulated
out.
• Do not exceed design pressures.
• Ensure that you have enough fluid, foamer, and nitrogen before doing the job (include losses).
• Ensure that the backside is well secured.
• Ensure that a spare choke is available. If using a positive-displacement choke, have a variety of sizes
available.
Figure 9.15—Foam density vs. pressure, 100°F, 8.4 lb/gal liquid density
Nitrogen Equipment
Terminology
For nitrogen converters, the numbers following the acronym indicate the maximum rate the unit is
capable of pumping.
Example TPU660 stands for a Trailer Pumping Unit that can pump 660,000 standard cubic feet per hour.
Alphabetic letters that follow the rate indicate a modification, except for "F" which represents Flameless.
For nitrogen transport units and tanks, numbers following the acronym represent the tank capacity in gals.
Flameless Vaporization
The MPU-60A truck uses waste heat from the engine coolant and engine exhaust gas to vaporize the
nitrogen. Additional waste heat is collected from the hydraulic system, where an engine-loading system
allows for added vaporizing capacity.
Flameless Vaporization
The MPU-90A uses waste heat from the engine water jacket and engine exhaust gas to vaporize the
nitrogen. Additional waste heat is collected from the hydraulic system, where an engine-loading system
allows for added vaporizing capacity.
This truck also includes a 2,000-gal medium pressure (86 psi) liquid-nitrogen tank and a full set of ground
manifold. All components are mounted on a Kenworth T800W chassis. Major components of the truck
include:
Note This unit is being phased out and replaced by the TPU-340FA
Flameless Vaporization
The TPU-340F nitrogen converter uses waste heat from the engine water jacket and exhaust to provide
flameless vaporization. Additional waste heat is collected from the hydraulic system, where an engine
loading system allows added vaporizing capacity. A second heat engine is also used to produce the
needed vaporization heat energy.
This trailer includes a 3,000-gal medium pressure (86 psi) liquid nitrogen tank and a full set of ground
manifold. All components are mounted on a Halliburton LoBoy trailer.
Flameless Vaporization
The SPU60B nitrogen converter uses waste heat from the engine water jacket and exhaust to provide
flameless vaporization. Additional waste heat is collected from the hydraulic system, where an engine
loading system allows added vaporizing capacity.
Certification
The SPU-180 in particular has a very large turndown capacity because of its twin triplex pump
arrangement. The twin pumps also provide standby backup on low-rate jobs.
Flameless Vaporization
Table 9.15—SPU-180F and NCS-180F Skid Information
To provide flameless vaporization,
the SPU-180 and NCS-180 nitrogen Performance Characteristics
converters use hot water heated from Maximum rate 180,000 scf/hr (3,000 scf/min)
waste heat from the engine water Maximum pressure 15,000 psi
jacket and exhaust. Minimum rate 100 scf/min
Dimensions
Overall length 8.0 ft.
• SPU-180: 20,000 lb (dry)
Weight
• NCS-180: 20,300 lb (dry)
Width 8.0 ft
Height 10.0 ft
Note—ISO frame is available.
Flameless Vaporization
The SPU-340F nitrogen converter uses waste heat from the engine water jacket and exhaust to provide
flameless vaporization. Additional waste heat is collected from the hydraulic system, where an
engine-loading system allows added vaporizing capacity. A second heat engine is also used to produce
the needed vaporization heat energy.
Transports have an ASME coded inner tank, an outer tank, and a high vacuum insulated space between
tanks. The transport will also conform to CGA 341 for all USA over the road service, with additional
structures for oil field service. Each transport is complete with all necessary liquid nitrogen piping, pump,
and cryogenic safeties. The transfer pump is hydraulically driven and powered by a PTO mounted on the
chassis transmission. Nominal tank volume is 3,700 gal, but the actual legal volume will depend on local
bridge laws.
Remote Operation
The TLT-2000 trailer is available with remote controls that can be operated from the walkway of the
nitrogen pumper. These controls feature valve operators, a tank level gauge, and a tank pressure gauge.
The controls can be powered by any 12-Vdc system.
Mounted Equipment
• Engine: Lister Model HR3 diesel
• Starting: electric
• Instrumentation: liquid level gauge, tank and pump discharge gauges, and pressure-building coil
system
• Tank: 7,247-gal (27.43-m3) capacity ASME-coded for 38-psi (262-kPa) working pressure.
• Pump: ACD centrifugal transfer pump 2 × 3 × 6-in. (51 × 76 × 152-mm) hydraulic drive, 200 gal/min
(12.62 L/s)
Table 9.18 lists the trailer’s dimensions and weight.
Mounted Equipment
• Instrumentation: liquid level gauge, tank pressure gauge
• Tank: 7,500-gal (27.43-m3) capacity ASME-coded for 85-psi (586-kPa) working pressure
• Pressure-off load system: pressure-building system designed to offload 240 gal/min (908.50 L/min)
LN2 regulated to 80 psig
Table lists the trailer’s dimensions and weights.
• Lift frame designed to provide safe lifting points for a full liquid nitrogen tank. Some frames also
provide additional protection from typical offshore crane operations.
• Pressure building systems provide minimal pressure building capabilities; however, these systems
can be specified with additional capacity if needed.
• Self-regulating pressure building systems are available by special order.
• Typical tanks instrumentation includes operating valves and safeties, tank pressure gauge, and tank
level gauge.
• Tank fill and withdrawal connections are USA standard compressed gas associated fitting, or as
specified by customer.
The tube trailer (Figure 9.32) is a mobile source of compressed nitrogen gas designed for providing a
high-pressure inert gas. This nitrogen gas is typically used to flush and purge coil tubing after a job. The
nitrogen forces the fluid from the tubing, and leaves a residual nitrogen purge.
Design
This system uses high-pressure nitrogen gas cylinders mounted on a gooseneck trailer. This unit is
designed to be pulled by a properly equipped pick-up truck. The trailer is built to existing Halliburton
standards for axles, brakes, wiring, and suspension. The cylinders are DOT 3A 2400 tubes, and are
manifolded together in the piping compartment. The unit also is equipment with discharge IRON, for
attachment to the coil tubing, or other components requiring the inert gas source. When charged, this unit
is capable of holding approximately 10,000 cubic feet of nitrogen gas.
Nitrogen Losses
Nitrogen is lost when it escapes back into the atmosphere before it can be used as a well treatment fluid.
This loss cannot be totally avoided, but it can be minimized. This section attempts to show the sources
of, operations involving, and economics of nitrogen loss.
Throughout most of the oil/gas well servicing industry, nitrogen is stored as a liquid, pumped as a liquid,
and then heated up to a gas. It is as a high-pressure compressed gas that it has value as a well treatment
fluid. The coldest temperature at which the liquid nitrogen is stored is -320ºF (-196ºC), its boiling point
at atmospheric pressure. This boiling liquid is induced to flow without cavitating by being pressurized.
This pressurization occurs inside its tank and, possibly further, by a boost (centrifugal) pump. The
pressurized liquid then flows into a high-pressure (downhole) pump. Downstream of the high-pressure
pump the liquid nitrogen is heated, which causes it to expand into a gas. This high-pressure source of gas
is then available for well service.
Sources
The primary sources of nitrogen loss are heat energy, kinetic energy, and direct loss. Heat energy and
kinetic energy both cause the liquids temperature to rise, while direct loss is any liquid or vapor that
escapes directly into the atmosphere. All of these result in nitrogen that is lost, and therefore is not
available to be pumped downhole.
Heat energy flows into the nitrogen from the atmosphere. This is usually from warmer air surrounding a
colder nitrogen tank or pipe. Heat is always transferred from a warmer object to a colder object, and the
air temperature on earth (record low of about -100ºF/-73ºC) is always warmer than that of liquid nitrogen
(stored at about -320ºF/-196ºC). As heat enters, the nitrogen's temperature and pressure will both
increase.
Kinetic energy is energy contained in the motion of a fluid. This motion causes the nitrogen molecules
to bump into each other more frequently (releasing heat energy), which results in a temperature rise in
the liquid. Examples of causes of this motion are sloshing inside a tank or a boost pumps impeller turning.
All of the energy that has been gained as heat must be removed before the liquid nitrogen can be
effectively pumped. If the heat energy is not removed, bubbles will form as the liquid nitrogen boils.
These bubbles will buildup and cause the high-pressure pump to operate poorly and/or loose prime.
Direct losses of nitrogen are primarily caused by leaks, cooldowns, and trapped liquid or vapor. All of
these result in nitrogen that flows back into the air, such that it cannot be used. A cooldown is where the
temperature of an object, like the high-pressure pump, must be reduced (literally cooled down) to near
that of liquid nitrogen in order for it to work properly. Nitrogen may become trapped, either as liquid or
cold gas, inside some portions of its piping. As these trapped fluids eventually warm up and expand they
are vented into the air.
Operations
Several operations are involved in Halliburton's handling of nitrogen. Many of these result in the loss of
some nitrogen. The following is a list showing many of these operations, the source(s) of their nitrogen
loss, and a brief explanation.
A new liquid nitrogen storage tank is expected to have a Normal Evaporation Rate (NER) of between 0.5
to 1.0 % (of a full tank) per day. For a 1,000-gal (3.79 m3) tank this is a loss of 466 to 931 scf (13.2 to
26.4 scm) of gas per day. This is from heat entering the nitrogen through the walls of this highly insulated
tank. A tank that is not in good condition can lose substantially more than this.
During the transportation of liquid nitrogen to a job site, not only does heat energy enter through walls
of the tank, but kinetic energy also enters as the liquid sloshes around inside the tank. As was stated
earlier, the addition of heat, whether it is from heat energy or kinetic energy, causes the temperature and
pressure in the liquid nitrogen tank to rise. When the pressure exceeds the setting of the road relief valve
(usually 15 psi/103 kPa), vapor will vent into the air.
In order to pressurized a tank, an amount of liquid nitrogen is allowed to flow through an air-to-nitrogen
heat exchanger called a pressure building coil. The heat energy gained by the nitrogen here causes it to
expand. This expanded gas then flows back into the tank, where it pressurizes the gas pocket at the top.
The piping system acts as a heat exchanger to let heat energy flow into the liquid nitrogen as it passes
through. Kinetic energy also enters as the liquid is stirred up during its movement through the piping
system, especially at tees, elbows, and valves. If a boost pump is used to help move the fluid, then
significantly more kinetic energy enters the fluid from the rotating impeller. Also, when using a boost
pump, as liquid is recirculated back into the tank it carries heat with it, causing the tank liquid's
temperature to rise faster than normal. Some liquid and vapor is lost directly into the air from leaks. Other
liquid is lost as it becomes trapped between valves in the piping system, as liquid flow ceases. These
losses apply to flowing liquid from the tank to the high-pressure pump, transferring liquid from one tank
to another, and several other situations.
The physical loss of nitrogen occurs during the blow down operation. The actual loss has already
occurred prior to this, and is due to the heat gained by the liquid in the tank from heat energy and kinetic
energy. As stated before, the addition of heat causes the temperature and pressure in the liquid nitrogen
tank to rise. This heat must be removed before the liquid can be effectively pumped. As the tank pressure
is relieved to atmosphere (literally blown down), the liquid nitrogen boils. This thermodynamic process
carries heat out with the venting vapor and actually cools the liquid back down to its atmospheric boiling
point (-320ºF/-196ºC). In blowing a tank down from 15 psig (103 kPa) to 0 psig (0 kPa) about 6 % of the
tanks contents are lost. For a tank that contains 1,000 gal (3.79 m3) this is a 5590 scf (158 scm) loss of
gas. In blowing a tank down from 75 psig (517 kPa) to 15 psig (103 kPa) about 14 % is lost. For 1,000
gal (3.79 m3), the loss of gas is 13,040 scf (369 scm).
In cooling down, cold nitrogen liquid and vapor is flowed through objects in order to reduce their
temperature. The nitrogen used for this vents into the atmosphere and is lost. Objects that are cooled
down are the high-pressure pump, its suction piping, and a "hot" (empty for a time) nitrogen tank. To cool
each pound of stainless steel from 75ºF (24ºC) to -320ºF (-196ºC) requires 2.65 scf of gas (0.166 scm/kg).
The portion of liquid nitrogen that enters into the high-pressure pump and is used to lubricate the piston
rings is called blowby (what has blown by the rings). In moving by and lubricating the piston rings, this
nitrogen gains a significant amount of kinetic energy. As piston rings become worn, seen as high blowby
pressure, more and more nitrogen is lost as it blows by the rings.
Economics
In the following examples, nitrogen is assumed to cost about $0.34 per 100 scf ($0.12/scm). The cost is
what it costs to replace the product, not the lost revenue.
1. A 2,000-gal (7.57 m3) tank has an NER of 1 %. The tank loses 1862 scf (52.7 scm) of gas per
day. This is $6.33/day in lost product.
2. A tank containing 2,000 gal (7.57 m3) is blown down before a job from 15 psig (103 kPa) to 0
psig (0 kPa). The gas lost is 11,170 scf (316 scm). This is $37.98 in lost product.
3. A nitrogen pumping unit, containing 1,000 lb (454 kg) of stainless steel in its high-pressure pump
cold ends and suction piping, is cooled down before a job. The gas lost is 2,650 scf (75 scm).
This is $9.01 in lost product.
4. A tank containing 1,000 gal (3.79 m3) is blown down after a long job from 75 psig (517 kPa) to
15 psig (103 kPa). The gas lost is 13,040 scf (369 scm). This is $44.34 in lost product. If the
above four examples all occured to the same pumping unit in the same day, the total loss of gas
would be 28,722 scf (812.7 scm). This is $97.66 in lost product.
Liquid nitrogen, used in oil field service work, must be transferred from its storage tank to the
high-pressure triplex pump. Since liquid nitrogen is stored at its boiling point of -320 Deg F, it can not
be placed under a "suction", but must be "pushed". Nitrogen that is drawn into a pipe or pump at less than
atmospheric pressure will boil and cause the pump to loose prime. This pump characteristic is call net
positive suction pressure (NPSH), and is true for all pumps, positive displacement or centrifugal.
Generally, two different approaches have been developed to supply liquid nitrogen to the triplex pump.
These are a high-pressure tank, and a boost pump.
Halliburton USA (run by Wellnite in a joint venture) and Halliburton international generally use different
operating systems for their liquid nitrogen converters. These differences have come about mainly due to
the random development of nitrogen operations internationally. Many areas outside the US have
developed their nitrogen business using European cryogenic practices, rather than methods developed by
Wellnite for Halliburton a few years ago.
• Halliburton International (outside the USA) normally use a boost pump to raise suction pressure
to the triplex pump. Normal tank pressure is 25 psi / 1.5 bar, with a boost pump output of about
90-100 psi / 6.2-6.9 bar.
• The Halliburton-Wellnite system does not use a boost pump. The required suction pressure for the
triplex pump is supplied entirely by the tank vapor pressure. Normal tank pressure is greater than 65
psi / 4.5 bar.
Detailed Description
The high-pressure tank system uses a properly sized pressure building system to produce and maintain
tank pressure. This pressure is used to push the liquid nitrogen out of the tank, through the piping, and
into the triplex pump. The pressure building coil or heat exchanger is sized to maintain the desired flow
at a pressure compatible with the triplex pump's NPSH requirements. This system frequently used a
pressure regulator to control the tank pressure to a specific set point regardless of pumping rates, which
provides an automatic liquid nitrogen flow and pressured to the triplex pump, with virtually no moving
parts.
The low-pressure tank and boost pump system also uses a tank pressure building system to supply liquid
nitrogen to the centrifugal boost pump. The boost pump then provides increased pressure to the flow to
the triplex pump. The pressure building system in this application is necessary, since the boost pump has
its own NPSH requirement. The boost pump system usually requires a means for returning excess
nitrogen flow back to the tank. This is necessary since the centrifugal pump operates best at a specific
flow and pressure. If the flow needed by the triplex is less than the optimum flow for the centrifugal, the
excess flow is re-circulated back to tank.
Which is Best?
Each system has its pros and cons, usually the losses during a job are very similar between both systems.
In some specific cases though one system can be better than the other. Some triplex pumps are designed
to operate best with fairly high suction pressures. This higher pressure is easier provided with the boost
pump system. However for triplex pumps designed for no recirculation and little venting, the boost pump
system would not operate. Table 9.22 lists some of the general pros and cons.
Table 9.22—Pros and Cons of Boost Pump System and High-Pressure Tank
Boost Pump System High-Pressure Tank
System complexity Requires low-pressure tank hydraulic Requires high-pressure tank
pump drive and recirculation piping and larger pressure building
system
Operating efficiency Centrifugals best volumetric effi- 100% flow to the triplex
ciency is 65% plus recirculation
losses
Tank operating pressure 25 psig 70–90 psig
“Ht” nitrogen flow returned to Varies, can be as high as 90% of unit 0%
tank rated capacity. Adds excess heat,
which can cause additional losses.
Percent of unused nitrogen left 0.3% 1%
in empty tank (due to operating Example: 2,000-gal tank waste is 6 Example: 2,000-gal tank waste
pressure) gal of product. is 20 gal of product
Effectiveness on offshore work Fair, but affected by rough sea condi- Poor, in rough sea conditions
vessel tions.
Tank relative weight Low Medium to high
Reliability/maintenance Good/moderate maintenance Very good/no maintenance
Components to be cooled down Centrifugal pump, pump isolation flex None
(excluding triplex pump, suction hoses, centrifugal prime piping, recir-
piping, and prime piping) culation valve and recirculation piping
Membranes
Nitrogen can be produced from air in essentially a filtering process. Atmospheric air is compressed and
then cooled. The air then enters a series of filters designed to remove particulates, hydrocarbons, and
water vapor from the flow stream. The dried and particulate-free air proceeds to an oxygen filter
membrane that separates the nitrogen from the flow stream and vents the oxygen to the atmosphere. The
membrane functions as a filter allowing the "faster" or lighter molecular weight nitrogen to pass while
rejecting the heavier oxygen molecules by selective permeability. The approximately pure nitrogen gas
then enters a gas booster where the pressure is increased to working pressure. Typical nitrogen purity is
95% nitrogen at flow rates up to 40,000 scf/hr. Units can be coupled to increase purity and flow rates.
Pressure swing absorption (PSA) is another type of air-filtering process. Molecular sieve material is used
as the filter media.
Air enters a vessel containing a bed of molecular sieve material that captures oxygen molecules and
allows nitrogen to pass. Certain pressure characteristics are required to capture the oxygen. When the bed
of molecular sieve material has absorbed all the oxygen it can, the flow of air swings to another vessel.
At that point, some of the nitrogen stream from this bed flows through the first vessel to remove the
absorbed oxygen. Different pressure characteristics allow the absorbed oxygen to be released by the
molecular sieve materials and be swept away by the nitrogen. This cycle repeats itself continuously to
produce a nitrogen stream of about 95% purity. Various sizes of vessels can be made to give various flow
rates of nitrogen.
i
ii
Section 10
The following tables show the components of CTWin that would normally be used while carrying out a
coiled tubing operation.
One or more of the following communications modules are required to bring data into (or out of) CTWin.
The following modules are required to process the data taken in from the communications modules and
make it look presentable.
The following additional modules of CTWin are generally not required for normal operations but their
function is described below.
File Types
• .rtd - Real Time Data, raw data files.
• .wda - Job File, what your job looked like.
• .wdt - Windows Data Template, job templates.
• .ssd - Serial Setup Data, matching Unipro scripts.
• .gtm - Graph Template, template layout for HTG.
• .hgw - Graph File, needs .rtd file also.
• .csv - Comma Separated Variable, Excel data listing.
• .udl - Unipro DownLoad, data before it is processed.
• .emf - Windows Enhanced Metafile, picture file.
• .wmf - Windows Metafile, picture file.
Note High-level access is required to change the Application Factor and the Fatigue
Reliability.
4. For Corrosion, neither Wall Reduction Method or String Life Reduction Method need to be
checked. The Halliburton version of Cerberus takes this into account based on information put
into the job manager.
5. Check the String History Log for correct information. This contains details of all the jobs previ-
ously run on the string and also information on any cuts that have been made. Note: Cuts can
only be done in multiples of the String Segment Length (usually 10ft / 3m). If cuts are done
shorter than the segment length they should be manually recorded and then cut from the string
records once the length of cuts reach or exceed the segment length.
6. Check the chart of the Strings Fatigue Life to ensure that the string has enough life left to handle
any planned operation.
7. Lock the String [use the padlock icon]
is no need to specify a concentration of these gases as it will make no difference to the calcula-
tions.
4. If any acid is to be pumped through the CT it is important to specify that the job type is Matrix
Stimulation. This allows for more accurate corrosion tracking. The selection of any other job
type than matrix stimulation has no effect on corrosion and will be used for information only.
More information is included later in this section about how H2S, CO2 and acid affect the corro-
sion rates of Coiled Tubing.
5. Lock the Job [use the padlock icon]
Open CTWin
1. Select Mode of Operation: Real-Time
2. If a suitable template is known for the equipment and job type then 'New Job from Template'
should be selected here, if not select 'New Job (Blank)'. These procedures will assume that no
suitable template exists.
3. Select a suitable name such as the ticket number for the Data Storage Directory then select OK.
4. Confirm the name and select OK.
Setup Communications
1. Insert a New Halliburton Object based on where the information is coming from, ie select
UniCom for Data coming from a UNIPRO II, CompuCom for Data coming from a Compupac
or GenCom for some other Generic Serial Communications. Any number of these can be set up
if multiple data sources are present and the computer can handle the number of inputs through
the COM ports.
2. Once the communications module is selected the Serial Port Communications Setup screen
appears. From this screen a port needs to be selected that corresponds with the port that the com-
munications device is linked to. All the other setting should remain the same (except when using
GenCom, the Flow Control option should read 'None'.) Select OK
3. A message should appear stating the Port is SUCCESSFULLY opened, select OK.
4. If the communication device is setup correctly data should appear to stream in which will be fol-
lowed by an option to Load Variables Setup.
5. Load Var. Setup should be selected and the correct Variable Setup File should be selected. (This
setup file is normally stored in the C:\HalWin\Template directory). For normal coiled tubing
operations select coil_tub.ssd, if using HydraRig equipment with Pipe Light / Pipe Heavy weight
indicator equipment use Hydratub.ssd and if using the Compupac select the Compupac.ssd file.
The Display Name for the variables and the Storage Units are now shown. The Display Name
can be changed using this screen but Storage Units should NOT be changed at this point. Select
OK
6. The option now appears for setting up Stage Advance Sources, this can normally be left alone
and is only required to be changed if for instance stages are being inputted on a UNIPRO II on a
remote cement unit. Changing this option will not affect anything to do with Coiled Tubing Cal-
culations.
that 'Start Recording' was selected in the DAC. If it wasn't, close down the CT Module, go back
into the DAC and 'Start Recording' before re-starting the CT Module.
2. From the fatigue plot, go to the 'Options' pulldown menu and select 'Model Preferences'. Ensure
that the option to 'Use Estimated Reel/Gooseneck Pressure' is not checked. If it is checked,
un-check it then 'Save as Defaults' before closing then re-starting the CT Module.
Important Check the version of HalWin being used to record the CT job data. HalWin version
2.8.1 and newer differs from earlier versions. These newer versions automatically
calculate the gooseneck pressure based on the inlet and wellhead pressures and uses
this for the fatigue calculations. For earlier versions of HalWin, the option 'Use
Estimated Reel/Gooseneck Pressure' should be checked.
• HalWin Verion 2.8.0 and older. Unfortunately, the way that fatigue is calculated in real-time, no
account is taken for the Wellhead Pressure throughout the job. If the wellhead pressure has been very
low throughout the job (below 500 psi), then saving the fatigue data to the string at this point is
acceptable. If there has been any wellhead pressure during the job then do not save the fatigue data
at this point but re-run the job later by following the instructions for 'Updating CT Fatigue After a
Job' found later in this section making sure to add the average wellhead pressure for the job in the
Job Log in Job Manager.
• HalWin Version 2.8.1 and newer. These newer versions more accurately calculate the gooseneck
pressure from the actual measured wellhead and reel inlet pressures during every step of the job.
Because of this it is safe to save the fatigue data to the CT string on completion of the job when
calculating the fatigue in real time.
1. Once this file has been retrieved it is necessary to follow Steps 1–3 from above but stop at Step
3 just before locking the job.
2. Open up the Job Log page by selecting the icon. Go to File from the pull down menus and select
'Import Orion File'.
3. Choose the fatigue.mdb file created for this job and import it. All the data now appears on the
Job Data Page. (If no fatigue.mdb file has been made then all the job data from the manual
records should be inputted into the job log screen) It is then necessary to go back to the main
screen in Job Manager, select wellsite geometry, check this is correct and close it again. Now
look at the job log again and you will notice that the start and end depths have been adjusted to
account for the wellsite geometry.
4. In the top right hand corner of the Job Log screen is a box to input the 'Wellhead Treating Pres-
sure'. The value to enter here depends on the version of HalWin that was used to record the CT
Job data.
• HalWin Version 2.8.0 and earlier. An estimate of the average WHP for the entire job is
required. This is used to calculate the gooseneck pressure for each step of the job based on
the actual reel inlet pressure.
• HalWin Version 2.8.1 and newer. These versions calculate the gooseneck pressure from the
reel inlet and wellhead pressure for each step of the job and it is this calculated gooseneck
pressure that is recorded as the pressure in the fatigue.mdb file. 'Wellhead Treating Pressure'
in the Job Log should be kept as 0 when using these versions.
5. From the main screen in Job Manager, lock, save and exit the job.
6. Open up the Fatigue Simulator from the Cerberus Main Screen.
7. Load the Job and check the box 'open in execute mode' if you require the fatigue data on the string
to be updated now.
8. From the pull down 'Options' menu select 'Model Preferences'. Ensure the option to 'Use esti-
mated reel/gooseneck pressures' is either checked or un-checked depending on the version of
HalWin used to create the fatigue.mdb file. See important note below.
Important Check the version of HalWin used to record the CT job data and create the fatigue.mdb
file. HalWin Version 2.8.1 and newer differs from earlier versions. These newer
versions automatically calculate the gooseneck pressure based on the inlet and
wellhead pressures and uses this for the fatigue calculations. Therefore if HalWin
Version 2.8.1 or newer is used the option 'Use Estimated Reel/Gooseneck Pressure'
should NOT be checked. For earlier versions of HalWin (2.8.0 and earlier) the option
'Use Estimated Reel/Gooseneck Pressure' SHOULD be checked.
9. Select the 'String Viewer' icon to view the string with it's existing fatigue.
10. Select the VCR control button 'Run All' and watch the fatigue for this job being added to the
string. New fatigue for this job will be added in a blue colour above the existing fatigue in grey.
11. Once the job has finished running, save the job which will add the permanent record of this job
on to the history log and exit.
To calculate the rate at which the fatigue will accumulate for a de-rated section, simply divide 1 by the
de-rating factor.
Eg. A De-rating factor of 0.5 means that fatigue will accumulate 1/0.5 = 2 times faster than a section with
no de-rating. Basically the lower the de-rating factor the quicker fatigue will accumulate.
Application Factors
The application factor is simply a safety factor applied to fatigue calculations only.
Eg. A coiled tubing string with an AF = 2 will show twice as much fatigue as one with an AF = 1. The
Cerberus default is 4 but this is considered very conservative and usually an AF between 2 and 3 is
considered normal but depends on such factors as tubing management practices, typical string life,
fatigue calculation methods etc.
Based on tests that have been done to gather fatigue information, 5% of strings will fail once they reach
100% with an AF = 1.
The lowest recommended application factor for field operations where there are any consequences
associated with a possible failure is 1.6. This number is based on the coiled tubing being run under ideal
conditions where all parameters are monitored and the life of the string will be used up in under 1 month's
time. Most coiled tubing operations do not run under these conditions. The average application factor in
use ranges between 2.0 and 2.5 for coiled tubing strings that are fully utilized in 6-9 months. Application
factors below 1.6 should not be used unless the risk of failure to personnel, the environment or equipment
is 0.
• Factory bias weld: This is done when the tubing is still in flat strips in the factory with a 45º angle
cut between the strips. This ensures that when the tubing is rolled the weld is distributed slightly
along the length of the tubing.
• Orbital butt weld: This method is done with a machine and is used to join two sections of pipe
together.
• Manual butt weld: When two sections of pipe are welded by hand. Most often done in the field.
Table 10.5 shows the de-rating factor associated with different weld types.
The allowable stress factor decreases as more fatigue is added to the coiled tubing through increased use.
Table 10.6 shows the Halliburton recommended maximum stress factor based on the fatigue life of the
coiled tubing.
This factor may be less for coiled tubing that will only be run a few times (eg. permanent installations)
Table 10.7 shows the minimum radius that coiled tubing can be bent round before fatigue starts to
become significant. This is the limit for elastic bending.
This is straightforward for a fixed radius tubing guide arch, but Halliburton uses a variety of tubing guide
arches including some with a progressive radius. Different sized coiled tubing starts contacting the guide
arch at different points, and the smallest radius dominates the fatigue calculations. The radius to use
should be based on the data in Table 10.8. This data is based on the tubing leaving the reel at a 45º angle.
If this is not the case, the figure should be adjusted accordingly.
52–96-in. Progressive
Radius Guide Arch
(standard on the
30/38K injector)
72–120-in. Progressive
Radius Guide Arch
(standard on the 60K injector,
also same radius profile used
on 95K segmented guide arch)
The distance across the guide arch is also required for the wellsite geometry, Table 10.9 shows the typical
contact length for each guide arch, but again, this will vary depending on the tubing stiffness due to
tubing OD and wall thickness.
Zero Depth
For most operations it is desirable to have HalWin reporting the depth at the bottom of the tool, however,
for fatigue calculations Cerberus is only interested in where the end of the Coiled Tubing is. It is
important to tell Cerberus where the end of the CT is in relation to the end of the tool which is the depth
that HalWin is bringing into Cerberus.
To further complicate matters, it is usually desirable for the depth indicator in HalWin to match the depth
on the wellbore schematic. Zero depth on the wellbore schematic will often be based on the rig floor level
of the rig that drilled it, which may not be in position any more. The well zero depth can be anywhere
above or below the CT equipment rig-up.
To set up the correct zero depth adjustment, we need to go to the Wellsite Geometry setup in the Job
Manager of Cerberus. There is a box labeled 'Top of Injector to Zero Depth Datum'. The method of
calculating this number is outlined in the table below and shows five scenarios that cover the majority of
situations we are likely to encounter.
For the calculations in the table we need to make a CT Zero depth, this is a depth where it is easiest to
set the depths from, eg. the quick union connection just above the BOP where the tools are deployed into
the well. For zero depth setup, the top of the toolstring (end of the CT) must be at the CT Zero depth.
For the five scenarios below, the following has been assumed for all cases:
• Toolstring length is 200 ft, and the top of the toolstring is located at the CT Zero depth (QU above
the BOP).
• Distance from CT Zero (QU) to the top of the injector is 20 ft.
• The Well Zero Distance height varies and is shown on each picture.
Table 10.10
Distance from CT Zero to Well Zero (Z) 0 (same) +10 +20 +50 -15
Toolstring Length (T/S) 200 200 200 200 200
Counter Depth CD = Z + T/S 200 210 220 250 185
Top of Injector to Well Zero (TI) 20 10 0 (same) -30 35
Cerberus Zero* CZ = TI – T/S -180 -190 -200 -230 -165
* - Number required in Cerberus Job Manager, Wellsite Geometry box labeled 'Top of Injector to Zero
Depth Datum' (With short toolstrings this will be a +'ve number and longer toolstrings -'ve)
If 10 jobs have used acid, then for Job 11, C10 = .55
Cerberus can add additional fatigue due to Heave but it must be set up to do so. From the main Cerberus
screen select Options > Cerberus Setup and check the box to Enable Heave Calculations. This adds a tab
to the Job Log screen in Job manager allowing details of the wave size and frequency to be included in
the fatigue calculations.
The primary purpose of this job log is to document all tubing movements and pressure changes to track
the fatigue life of the coiled tubing string. The secondary purpose is to document the job activities and
fluid stages.
The sample job logs in this section allow the accurate reporting of the job details. A job log entry should
be made whenever the any of the following items occur:
• Tubing direction changes, even slightly (.3 ft / .1 m)
• Depth changes by about 1,000 ft (300 m)
• Tubing or wellhead pressure changes by 500 psi (30 bar)
• Fluid changes
• Pump rate changes
• Perform job actions
• Unusual events
The purpose of the first three items is to provide the minimum information to do bending fatigue
calculations. The last four items are used to document the job, to help in the interpretation of pressure
readings, and to help determine fluid friction through the reel.
The following pages show examples of coiled tubing job logs that can be used to record data throughout
a job. They include spaces for all the important information required to accurately calculate coiled tubing
fatigue. Electronic versions of these can be obtained by emailing the contact email address at the start of
this manual.
Item Distance ft / m
Reel to Gooseneck
COUNTRY
COMMENTS
COILED TUBING WORKSHEET